Trnsys 18

a TRaNsient SYstem Simulation program

Volume 5

Multizone Building modeling

with Type56 and TRNBuild

Solar Energy Laboratory, Univ. of Wisconsin-Madison

http://sel.me.wisc.edu/trnsys

TRANSSOLAR Energietechnik GmbH

http://www.transsolar.com

CSTB – Centre Scientifique et Technique du Bâtiment

http://software.cstb.fr

TESS – Thermal Energy System Specialists, LLC

http://www.tess-inc.com

5–1
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

About This Manual

The information presented in this manual is intended to provide a complete reference on
multizone building simulation with Trnsys. It includes a description of the building model (known
as Type 56) and a user guide for the associated visual interface (TRNBuild). This manual is not
intended to provide detailed information about the Trnsys simulation software nor any of its other
utility programs. Detailed information concerning these programs can be found in other parts of
the Trnsys documentation set. The latest version of this manual is always available for
registered users on the Trnsys website (see here below).

Revision history
• 2004-09 For Trnsys 16.00.0000
• 2005-04 For Trnsys 16.00.0038
• 2005-11 For Trnsys 16.01.0000
• 2007-02 For Trnsys 16.01.0003
• 2009-11 For Trnsys 17.00.0006
• 2010-02 For Trnsys 17.00.0009
• 2012-02 For Trnsys 17.01.0006
• 2017-02 For Trnsys 18.00.0008
• 2019-11 For Trnsys 18.02.0000

Where to find more information

Further information about the program and its availability can be obtained from the Trnsys
website or from the Trnsys coordinator at the Solar Energy Lab:

Trnsys Coordinator Email: trnsys@engr.wisc.edu

Solar Energy Laboratory, University of Wisconsin-Madison Phone: +1 (608) 263 1586
1500 Engineering Drive, 1303 Engineering Research Building Fax: +1 (608) 262 8464
Madison, WI 53706 – U.S.A.

Trnsys website: http://sel.me.wisc.edu/trnsys

Notice
This report was prepared as an account of work partially sponsored by the United States
Government. Neither the United States or the United States Department of Energy, nor any of
their employees, nor any of their contractors, subcontractors, or employees, including but not
limited to the University of Wisconsin Solar Energy Laboratory, makes any warranty, expressed
or implied, or assumes any liability or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness or
usefulness of any information, apparatus, product or process disclosed, or represents that its
use would not infringe privately owned rights.
© 2019 by the Solar Energy Laboratory, University of Wisconsin-Madison
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. This manual
and the software may be used or copied only under the terms of the license agreement. Except
as permitted by any such license, no part of this manual may be copied or reproduced in any
form or by any means without prior written consent from the Solar Energy Laboratory, University
of Wisconsin-Madison.

5–2
Type 56 Contributors

The TRNBuild program and the Type 56 described in this manual was developed by
TRANSSOLAR Energietechnik GmbH, the German distributor of Trnsys. Further information
about the programs and their availability can be obtained from the Trnsys distributor from which
you purchased the programs or:

TRANSSOLAR Energietechnik GmbH

Curiestr. 2
70563 Stuttgart
Germany
Phone: +49/ 711 / 679 76 - 0
Fax: +49/ 711 / 67976 - 11
E-mail: hotline@transsolar.com
http://www.trnsys.de
Sections which are new compared to Trnsys Version 17 are marked in purple.

5–3
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table of contents
5. MULTIZONE BUILDING MODELING WITH TYPE56 AND TRNBUILD 5–8
5.1. Introduction 5–8
5.2. TRNBuild 5–9
5.2.1. Overview Improvements 5–9
5.2.2. Getting Started 5–11
5.2.2.1. Settings 5–12
5.2.2.2. Opening and Creating a New File 5–13
5.2.2.3. Importing a Trnsys3d file 5–14
5.2.2.4. Entering the Required Input 5–16
5.2.3. The Project Dialog Box 5–18
5.2.3.1. Orientation 5–18
5.2.3.2. Properties 5–20
5.2.3.3. Inputs 5–21
5.2.3.4. Outputs 5–23
5.2.3.5. Balance Outputs 5–47
5.2.4. Construction Types 5–52
5.2.4.1. Definition of a New (Opaque) Construction Type 5–53
5.2.4.2. The (Opaque) Construction Type Library 5–55
5.2.4.3. Definintion of a New (Opaque) Layer 5–56
5.2.4.4. The (Opaque) Layer Library 5–57
5.2.4.5. Advanced (Opaque) Construction Types 5–58
5.2.4.6. Definition of a New Window Type 5–67
5.2.4.7. The Window Library 5–72
5.2.5. Schedules 5–73
5.2.6. Regime Types 5–75
5.2.6.1. Definition of Infiltration Types 5–75
5.2.6.2. Definition of Ventilation Types 5–75
5.2.6.3. Definition of Heating Types 5–76
5.2.6.4. Definiton of Cooling Types 5–78
5.2.6.5. Definition of Comfort Types 5–79
5.2.6.6. Definition of Gain Types 5–81
5.2.6.7. Definition of Daylight depending Control Types 5–83
5.2.7. Zone - Airnode 5–87
5.2.7.1. Required Regime Data 5–88
5.2.7.2. Opaque Surfaces 5–90
5.2.7.3. Windows 5–91
5.2.7.4. Infiltration 5–94
5.2.7.5. Ventilation 5–94
5.2.7.6. Heating 5–95

5–4
 5.2.7.7. Cooling 5–95
5.2.7.8. Comfort 5–96
5.2.7.9. Gains 5–97
5.2.7.10. Coupling between airnodes 5–97
5.2.7.11. Zone Geometry Modes 5–98
5.2.7.12. Zone Radiation Modes 5–99
5.2.7.13. Zone Daylight Modes 5–101
5.2.8. Geometry Information 5–103
5.2.9. Generating Files for Type 56 5–104
5.2.9.1. Saving the TRNBuild File 5–104
5.2.9.2. Maximum heat load calculation 5–104
5.2.9.3. Generate Shading / Insolation matrix 5–106
5.2.9.4. Generate view factor matrix 5–107
5.2.9.5. Generate Radiance Files 5–108
5.2.10. Exporting Trnsys3d file 5–111
5.2.11. Input Data Limits of TRNBuild 5–112
5.2.12. Building Input Description File created By TRNBuild 5–113
5.2.12.1. Rules Governing the “BID Language” 5–113
5.2.12.2. Properties 5–114
5.2.12.3. Types 5–118
5.2.12.4. Orientations 5–132
5.2.12.5. Building 5–133
5.2.12.6. Radiation Mode 5–133
5.2.12.7. Geometry Mode 5–134
5.2.12.8. Daylight mode 5–134
5.2.12.9. Walls 5–135
5.2.12.10. Windows 5–146
5.2.12.11. Regime 5–149
5.2.12.12. Output 5–152
5.2.12.13. EXTENSION_WINPOOL 5–153
5.2.12.14. EXTENSION_BuildingGeometry 5–154
5.2.12.15. EXTENSION_VirtualSurfaceGeometry 5–155
5.2.12.16. EXTENSION_ShadingGeometry 5–156
5.2.12.17. EXTENSION_GEOPositionGeomtry 5–156
5.2.12.18. EXTENSION_ DaylightSensorPoints 5–157
5.2.12.19. EXTENSION_AdditionalDaylightGeometry 5–157
5.2.12.20. EXTENSION_VAMPARAMS 5–158
5.3. Trnsys Component Configuration 5–159
5.3.1. Parameters 5–159
5.3.2. Inputs 5–160
5.3.3. Outputs 5–161
5.4. Mathematical Description of Type 56 5–162
5–5
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.1. Thermal Zone /Airnode 5–162

5.4.1.1. Convective Heat Flux to the Air Node 5–162
5.4.1.2. Coupling 5–163
5.4.1.3. Radiative Heat Flows (only) to the Walls and Windows 5–164
5.4.1.4. Integration of Walls and Windows 5–164
5.4.1.5. Transfer Function Method by Mitalas 5–166
5.4.1.6. The Long-Wave Radiation 5–168
5.4.1.7. Detailed Radiation Transfer Model 5–171
5.4.1.8. Distribution of Long-Wave Radiation Internal gains 5–172
5.4.1.9. Distribution of Solar Radiation 5–172
5.4.1.10. External Walls 5–175
5.4.1.11. Walls with Boundary Conditions 5–176
5.4.1.12. Adjacent, Internal Walls and Walls with Identical Boundary Conditions 5–176
5.4.1.13. Total Gains from Surfaces in a Airnode 5–176
5.4.1.14. Infiltration, Ventilation, and Convective Coupling 5–177
5.4.1.15. Floating Airnode Temperature (No Heating or Cooling) 5–178
5.4.1.16. Simplified Heating and Cooling 5–180
5.4.1.17. Simulation Timestep versus Wall Timebase 5–183
5.4.2. Optical and Thermal Window Model 5–184
5.4.2.1. Description of the Window 5–184
5.4.2.2. 2-Band-Solar-Radiation-Window-Model 5–184
5.4.2.3. Transmission of Solar Radiation 5–185
5.4.2.4. Heat Flux between Window Panes 5–185
5.4.2.5. Absorption of Short-Wave Radiation 5–186
5.4.2.6. Iterative Solution for Pane Temperatures 5–187
5.4.2.7. Total Energy Flux through the Window Glazing 5–187
5.4.2.8. Edge Correction and Window Frame 5–187
5.4.2.9. External and Internal Shading Devices 5–188
5.4.3. Moisture Balance 5–190
5.4.3.1. Effective Capacitance Humidity Model 5–190
5.4.3.2. Buffer Storage Humidity Model 5–191
5.4.3.3. Mathematical Description of the Buffer Storage Humidity Model 5–191
5.4.3.4. Buffer Storage Example 5–194
5.4.3.5. Comparison of Measurement and Simulation for the Buffer Storage Humidity
Model 5–195
5.4.4. Integrated Model for Thermo-Active Building Elements 5–196
5.4.4.1. Stationary solution in the x–y plane of a thermo-active construction element 5–197
5.4.4.2. Thermal transmittance through the pipe shell 5–201
5.4.4.3. Mean water temperature in a pipe coil 5–202
5.4.4.4. Total resistance 5–202
5.4.4.5. Comparing the calculation methods 5–204

5–6
 5.4.4.6. Variables and Indices 5–206
5.4.5. Integrated Model for Chilled Ceiling Panels 5–208
5.4.6. Comfort model 5–213
5.4.7. Supply air conditioning model 5–216
5.4.8. References 5–217
5.5. Mathematical Description of Auxiliary Tools 5–218
5.5.1. TRNSHD 5–218
5.5.2. View factor calculation 5–221
5.5.3. DaySIM Integration 5–222
5.6. Building Examples for Type 56 5–224

5–7
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5. MULTIZONE BUILDING
MODELING WITH TYPE56 AND
TRNBUILD
5.1. Introduction
This component models the thermal behavior of a building divided into different thermal zones.
In order to use this component, a separate pre-processing program must first be executed. The
TRNBuild program reads in and processes a file containing the building description and
generates two files that will be used by the Type 56 component during a Trnsys simulation. The
file containing the building description processed by TRNBuild can be generated by the user
with any text editor or with the interactive program TRNBuild itself. The required notation is
described fully in the TRNBuild documentation in the following section. TRNBuild generates an
information file describing the outputs and required inputs of Type 56.
There are two ways to model the equipment for heating, cooling, humidification, and
dehumidification. The two methods are similar to the "energy rate" and "temperature level"
control modes available in the Type 12 and 19 load models. With the "energy rate" method, a
simplified model of the air conditioning equipment is implemented within the Type 56
component. The user specifies the set temperatures for heating and cooling, set points for
humidity control, and maximum cooling and heating rates. These specifications can be different
for each zone of the building. If the user desires a more detailed model of the heating and
cooling equipment, a "temperature level" approach is required. In this case, separate
components are required to model the heating and/or cooling equipment. The outputs from the
Type 56 zones can be used as inputs to the equipment models, which in turn produce heating
and cooling inputs to the Type 56 zones.
Note: Only one unit of Type 56 is allowed per simulation.
There are 4 main sections in this guide:
• Section 5.2 explains how to use the TRNBuild program to define the multizone building
data for Type 56 of Trnsys.
• Section 5.3 shows the configuration of Type 56 (Parameters, Inputs, Outputs)
• Section 5.4 and 5.5 describes the mathematical models and assumptions behind the
Type56 multizone building model.
• Section 5.6 presents building examples

5–8
5.2. TRNBuild
TRNBuild has been developed to provide an easy-to-use tool for creating the BUI-file. First,
some basic project data is entered. Then, the user can describe each thermal zone/airnodes
and select the desired outputs. All data entered are saved in the building file (*.BUI,*.B18), a
readable ASCII text file. The BUI-file is very handy for checking data entered in TRNBuild.
Note: The BUI-file has a rigorous syntax. Editing this file may cause a lot of trouble!

Basic steps including an example on how to model the thermal behavior of buildings with Type
are described in section 9.3.1 of the Trnsys Tutorial documentation
\Trnsys18\documentation\09-Tutorials.pdf file.

5.2.1. Overview Improvements

Compared to the previous version, several improvements have been made to TRNBuild and to
the multizone building model itself (Type 56):
User interface TRNBuild
• TRNBuild Navigator extended to regime data (heating, cooling, ventilation, gains) and
constructions data (layers, surfaces, windows) and schedules
• Use of longer names of airnodes and zones, construction types, etc. possible
• Use of small letters for names of airnodes and zones, construction types, etc. possible
• Added opaque surface types (wall, floor, ceiling, roof)
• Rename wall types to construction types
• Added total renewable primary energy and total non-renewable primary energy for opaque
layers and windows
• New glazing library
• New schedule library
• Added annual schedules
• New gain library
• New gain categories: lights, people, equipment, misc, thermal bridge
• Reference area as a new parameter for each airnode
• Area related definition of regime data types (heating, cooling, ventilation, gains) possible
• Electric fraction to regime types
• Extended regime coupling of airnodes from 2 to 6
• Several new outputs (NTypes)
• Description & unit for user-defined inputs

Physical and mathematical modeling:

• Daylight depending control type
• Dynamic daylight simulation for sensor points based on DaySIM
• Comfort calculation extended to elevated air speed acc. ASHRAE Standard 55-2013,
Appendix G
• Complex fenestration model (Add-on)
• Energy demand for supply air conditioning including heat recovery
• Restructuring source code
5–9
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Trnsys 18 offers the option to perform an integrated daylight simulation based on DaySIM. A
thermal model with 3D geometric data is required as starting point. The following shows the
basic steps for a daylight simulation:
• Define radiance materials for window types (see section 5.2.4.6)
• Define daylight mode of thermal zone (see section 5.2.7.13)
• Define daylight sensor point positions (see section 5.2.8)
• Select daylight related outputs (see section 5.2.3.4)
• Generate radiance files (see 5.2.9.5)
• Run Simulation

Further information on the DaySIM integration is found in section 5.5.3 .

Note: Despite these improvements, the BUI-file created by TRNBuild for Trnsys 17 can
be imported into TRNBuild for Trnsys 18. However, files can be saved into a TRNBuild 18
format only. Errors and unexpected behavior may occur by loading files which have been
created or changed outside of TRNBuild!

5–10
5.2.2. Getting Started
Assuming that you have installed the Trnsys package correctly, TRNBuild can be started by
double-clicking on the TRNBuild icon ( ) under the “Building” folder in the Trnsys group.
TRNBuild is also housed within the TrnsysStudio environment program. Here you can right click
on Type 56 and choose “Edit Building” to open TRNBuild.
The initial TRNBuild window is shown in Figure 5.2.2-1. The main menu of the initial TRNBuild
window houses the following items:
• FILE (new, open, close, or save a *.BUI file; import, export or update Trnsys3d file)
• VIEW (toolbar, status bar)
• TOOLS (open *.INF file, max. heat load file calculation, run Trnsys input file, create,
generate matrices and other files)
• OPTIONS (settings such as library versions, external editor, etc.)
• WINDOW (cascade, tile, arrange icons, etc.)
• HELP
After you open a new or existing project three additional items will be available in the main
menu:
• ZONES (add zone, close all zone views and about, delete or copy active zone)
• AIRNODES (add airnode and delete or move active airnode)
Some of the features in the main menu are also present in the tool bar. For users with small
screens, it might be more convenient to hide the toolbar and status bar.

Figure 5.2.2-1: Initial TRNBuild window

5–11
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.2.1. Settings
Under the OPTIONS menu, some settings used in TRNBuild can be specified as shown in
Figure 5.2.2-2.

Figure 5.2.2-2: The settings dialog

The Path for Standard Libraries accessible in the settings window is only used for:
• Trnsys: spacer.lib
• TRNFLOW: headers.txt, pollutant.lib
The path and name for all other libraries, for instance windows, walls, layers or schedules, will
be preset by the path given here, but can be changed interactively whenever needed, for
example when you are describing a new wall or window. Libraries for common windows, walls,
and layers are provided in different languages:
• The United States version contains Standard ASHRAE walls and materials.
• The German version contains materials according to DIN 4108. Glazing materials used on
the German market have been added to the German window library.
An external editor to edit the text files can be chosen in the external editor field.
TRNBuild can import and update/export IDF files created by Trnsys3d for Trnsys. A program
called trnsidf.exe is used for importing the IDF in the Import Application field, and a program
called trnsidfup.exe is used for exporting/updating the IDF in the Export Application field.
In addition, TRNBuild has the ability to generate a view factor matrix file. The application is
called trnvfm.exe and is set in the View Factor Matrix Application field.
Radiance file generation application
Template Trnsys Input file for Import
The path of the Trnsys application is needed for running a “max. heat load calculation” (see
Section 5.2.9.2). Set this in the corresponding field.
Trnsys Input File (only required for starting a simulation within TRNBuild)

5–12
The CHECK BOX "Files and Folders must exist" toggles a test on or off for the existence of file
paths given in the input windows.
In the previous version the resolution of the sky division for shading/insolation matrices was
defined here. This feature is moved to the TRNBuild NAVIGATOR under PROPERTIES (see
section 5.2.3.2 ).

5.2.2.2. Opening and Creating a New File

To open an existing *.BUI file, click on FILE and then click on OPEN. To create a new file, click
on FILE and then click on NEW. The user is asked to select the hemisphere (northern/southern)
corresponding to the location of the project. The hemisphere needs to be defined in order to
compute the correct azimuth angles of surface orientations.

Figure 5.2.2-3: Hemisphere selection

After selecting the hemisphere, the TRNBuild NAVIGATOR window (see Figure 5.2.2-5) opens.
The navigator gives an overview of the project initialization, construction types, schedules,
regime types, zones, TRNFlow and the geo-information of the project.

5–13
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.2.3. Importing a Trnsys3d file

Instead of entering the surfaces manually in TRNBuild, three dimensional data created by
Trnsys3d for Trnsys can be imported. Trnsys3d for Trnsys is a plugin for Trimble SketchUp that
allows you to create a building geometry from scratch: add zones, draw heat transfer surfaces,
draw windows, draw shading surfaces, etc. This information is saved in an *.IDF file. When
importing a Trnsys3d file, the geometry mode of the zones is automatically set to “3D data”. In
this mode the geometry data can not be modified. For more information on the geometry modes
see chapter 5.2.7.11.

Figure 5.2.2-4: Importing Trnsys 3D dialog box

To import an IDF file, select File \ “Import Trnsys3d file” and select the Trnsys3d file. The
hemisphere (northern/southern) corresponding to the location of the project needs to be defined
in order to compute the correct azimuth angles of surface orientations.
During the import, the following steps are performed:
• sorting of zones/airnodes and surfaces
• numbering of surfaces
• volume, capacitance and reference area calculation of airnodes
• surfaces with the construction type “VirtualSurfaces” aren’t imported as heat transfer
surfaces into TRNBuild. (They are used by volume calculation and export function
only.)
• generating of a *.B18 file and opening of the file in TRNBuild
• generating of corresponding *_b18_IDF file with the same order of zones and surfaces
and the same surface numbers. Note: For volume calculation the airnode has to be a
closed volume!!
In TRNBuild non-geometric objects, such as materials, constructions, schedules, internal heat
gains, heating, cooling, controls etc. are added to the project.
After importing the Trnsys3d file, the TRNBuild NAVIGATOR opens. The navigator gives an
overview of the project initialization, construction types, schedules, regime types, zones,
TRNFlow and the geo-information of the project.
If the AddOn trnViewBUI is installed, the imported geometry can be displayed by a double click
on “Geo-Info” in the TRNBuild NAVIGATOR. Further Information on the AddOn trnViewBUI is
found in a seprated Manual (TRNSYS18\documentation\ A4_trnViewBUI.pdf).

5–14
Figure 5.2.2-5: TRNBuild navigator

Figure 5.2.2-6: trnViewBUI

5–15
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.2.4. Entering the Required Input

In TRNBuild required information is entered in one of several formats: input box, radio button,
list box, pull-down menu, or DEF button. The use of each of these formats is explained below:
Input boxes
Input boxes are designed for the user to enter values or text, such as the name of a zone. They
are easy to recognize by their white background color. (Note: gray colored boxes are used for
display only). Some input boxes require a number and will not accept other characters. To enter
information in an input box, double-click anywhere in the input box and enter the required
information using the keyboard.

Figure 5.2.2-7: Input box example

Radio buttons
Radio buttons group a set of mutually exclusive options. The selected option is shown with a
black dot enclosed within a circle. To select a different radio button option with the mouse, just
click on the cycle in front of the option name.

Figure 5.2.2-8: Radio button example

List boxes
A list box provides a list of “source” items from which one or more can be selected as shown in
Figure 5.2.2-9. Select an item with the mouse, scroll it into view if necessary using the scroll
bar. Click on the upper arrow (pointing left) to add an item. The selected item appears in another
box on the left (see Figure 5.2.2-9). To delete an item, select the item in the left list and lick on
the lower arrow (pointing right).Alternatively, the insert and delete key can used.

Figure 5.2.2-9: List box example

5–16
Pull-down menu
A pull-down menu provides a list of items from which only one can be selected. To select an
item, click with the mouse on the arrow on the right side and keep the mouse button pressed
while looking for the desired item. Release the mouse button when the desired item is
highlighted. The pull-down menu reduces to a single bar again and the selected item appears
in a display box.

Figure 5.2.2-10: Pull-down menu example

DEF button
A DEF button is used to define items which can be a constant, an input or a schedule (i.e. the
shading factor of an internal shading device as shown in Figure 5.2.2-11). In the display box,
the defined constant, input or schedule is displayed, respectively. ‘I’ is the abbreviation for input
and ‘S’ the abbreviation for schedule.

Figure 5.2.2-11: The def button and definition window for a constant, an input or a schedule
After clicking on the DEF button, a definition window opens as shown in Figure 5.2.2-11 . A brief
online help is provided in an information box. Using a radio button, the user selects whether a
constant, an input or a schedule is to be defined:
• For a constant, the user enters a single value.
• For an input, the user selects an input from the pull-down menu as well as a multiplication
and addition factor. If the option NEW from the pull-down menu is selected, the user is
asked to enter a new unique input name,short deswcription and unit.
• For defining a schedule, the user selects a schedule from the pull-down menu as well as
multiplication and addition factors. If the option NEW from the pull-down menu is selected,
a dialog for specifying the schedule appears. This dialog offers the option to define a daily,
weekly or annual schedule (for more information on schedules see Chapter 0).

5–17
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.3. The Project Dialog Box

The first branch in the TRNBuild navigator is called PROJECT. You can click on PROJECT to
open the project dialog box. In the project dialog box, the user enters some general information
about the project, defines the ORIENTATIONs of surfaces required by the described building,
defines some basic properties, views the list of required INPUTS to Type 56, and selects the
desired OUTPUTS of Type 56.

Figure 5.2.3-1: Project dialog box

5.2.3.1. Orientation
All possible orientations of external building walls/windows must be defined here by unique
names. The table contains all orientations defined for this project. To add an orientation click on
the “+” button and a dialog box for defining a new orientation opens. To delete an orientation
click on the “-“ button. (Note: only “not used” orientations can be deleted).
The standard format for the orientation name includes the azimuth and slope of surface. The
scheme according to Trnsys convention is as follows:
Y_xxx_zzz
with
Y… single letter N, S, E, W or H
xxx… azimuth angle of the orientation acc. To TRNSYs convention (0…359 degree;
northern hemisphere: 0 … south; 90 … west, 180 … north, 270 … east
southern hemisphere: 180 south; 90 … west, 0 … north, 270 … east )
zzz… slope of the orientation (0…180; 0 … horizontal, 90 … vertical, 180 … facing down)

5–18
 Figure 5.2.3-2: New orientation dialog box
The option “Internal calculation of radiation data” reduces the required input data from the
weather data component significantly. To use this feature only the solar zenith (Input 5) has to
be connected to the weather data component Type 15, Type16, Type99. To rotate the building
(including defined shading geometry) using this option it is recommended to define an equation
TURN in the Trnsys Input file (e.g. “ TURN = 45 “ for rotation of 45 degrees towards west) and
connect the rotated solar azimuth angle (AAZM_Type56 = SolarAzimuthAngle – TURN”) to
INPUT 6 of Type 56. If you use the studio wizards for creating a new building project the
equations and connections are generated automatically.
If the option “external calculation of radiation data” is selected, three inputs of incident radiation
to the Type 56 Trnsys component will be required. This is generally provided by the weather
component.
The orientation named H_0_0 is automatically recognized as the horizontal radiation. If this
orientation doesn’t exist, no diffuse geometric shading and daylight calculation is performed.
Note: It is highly recommended to use the standard format. The former so-called “free
format” is available for backwards compatibility only.

5–19
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.3.2. Properties
In the Project Initialization window the PROPERTIES button opens a dialog box shown in

Figure 5.2.3-3. General values and parameters for internal calculation of heat transfer
coefficients can be specified. In TRNBuild 18 parameters for comfort calculation can also be
defined here. If the user does not define them, the following default values are used.

Figure 5.2.3-3: Properties

Heat transfer coefficients depend heavily on the temperature difference between surface and
fluid and the direction of heat flow. For example, the flow pattern evolved by a chilled ceiling is
similar to that of a heated floor, but completely different to that of a vertical surface. The
mathematical formula used for appropriate heat transfer coefficients is of the form
conv = const (Tsurf–Tair)exp .
The coefficients const and exp can be changed here to fit different approaches from heat
transfer research. Standard values are taken from literature; see Trnsys Manual, description of
Type 80 for further details.
Note: The automatic calculation of heat transfer coefficients has to be activated during the
description of a new surface (see Section 5.2.7.2) or in the Construction Type MANAGER and
5–20
it is applied only to these explicitly defined construction types. In case of heated or chilled
building surface, the heat transfer will depend on surface temperature, so automatic heat
transfer coefficient calculation is strongly recommended.
For all other construction types the standard approach will still be a constant heat transfer
coefficient resulting.
The automatic calculation of heat transfer coefficients requires an internal iteration which
increases simulation time compared to the use of constant heat transfer coefficients.
In Trnsys 18 the procedure for evaluating the cooling effect of elevated air speed using the
Standard Effective Temperature (SET) described by ASHRAE Standard 55-2013, Appendix G
is implemented to meet these requirements. To be useful for the evaluation and design of
climate concepts the method is implemented to simulate an occupant-controlled fan. The user
can specify up to 4 elevated air speed levels and the code automatically selects the lowest
airspeed level required to achieve a PMVeas of ±0.5 which is equivalent to a satisfaction of
90 % of the occupants with the environmental conditions. The base air speed level is defined in
COMFORT type manager dialog (see Section 5.2.6.5). The other three air speeds levels are
defined for all comfort types here. The air speed levels have to be in ascending order. Note:
The option elevated air speed as to be activated in the COMFORT type manager (see Section
5.2.6.5).

5.2.3.3. Inputs
By clicking on the INPUTS button, an overview of INPUTs defined within the project is shown
(see Figure 5.2.3-4).
New INPUTs can be added here to create a list of inputs for the definition of gains, controller
strategies etc. In Trnsys 18 for new inputs a unit and a short decription can defined in addition
to the name.
Unused INPUTs can be deleted, but it is not possible to delete INPUTS used in definitions
somewhere in the building description. In certain cases it might be convenient to change the
sequence of INPUTs. This is done via drag and drop.

5–21
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.3-4: The inputs dialog box

5–22
5.2.3.4. Outputs
By clicking on the OUTPUTS button, the OUTPUTS dialog box opens as shown in Figure
5.2.3-5. In general, defining the OUTPUTS is the last step of the building description. The user
may adjust the time base of the transfer function if necessary.
The time base defines the time interval when the wall history of the transfer functions is shifted
(see section 5.4.1.5 ). The default value of 1 is adequate for most cases. The most accuarate
setting would be a time base equal to the time step. However, this might not be possible
depending on the used contrsuction types and time step size. If an error message related to the
transfer function generation appears the time base can be set to 0.5 for light walls. For heavy
constructions a time base of 2 might be used.

Caution: The following conditions have to be fulfilled for the time base:
SimulationStartTime = l * Timebase l = 0,1,2,... (integer value)
SimulationTimeStep = Timebase / n n = 1,2,...(integer value)
The SimulationStartTime and the SimulationTimeStep are defined in the TRNSYS Studio and
the TRNSYS Input file (*.DCK).

Figure 5.2.3-5: The output dialog box

In addition, the user can edit, add or delete outputs of Type 56, so-called NTypes. Default
outputs are provided (airnode air temperatures (NType 1) and sensible energy demands
(NType2) for all specified zones). To add a new output, the user clicks on the “+”-button and the
NEW OUTPUT dialog box opens (see Figure 5.2.3-6). For adding outputs the option
USERDEINED has to be selected.

5–23
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.3-6: Adding a new user-defined output

First select the airnode or group of airnodes for the NType has to be selected. This can be done
in the “Airnode” section of the output data dialog.
Choose one of the following options:
• Thermal airnodes
• External nodes (only available if the Add-On TRNFLow is installed)
• Auxiliary nodes (only available if the Add-On TRNFLow is installed)
• Airlinks (only availbale if the Add-On TRNFLow is installed)
Nodes that are available appear in the right box. To select a node or group of airnodes by
double clicking or using the top arrow. The selected nodes will now appear in the left box.
Next choose the kind of NTypes:
• Airnode outputs
• Group of airnode outputs
• Surface outputs
• Comfort outputs
• Balances (extremely helpful overview)
• TRNFlow outputs (only available if the Add-On TRNFLow is installed)
The NTypes are color coded in the available outputs section (lower right box). Most outputs
have a yellow background. The outputs that are colored in green must be further defined. To do
so, add them to the selected outputs (lower left box) and double click on the respective NType.
Now a dialog will open specific items can be selected e.g. for NType 28 (values of schedules)
the single schedules can be chosen. If an output is already selected, it appears with a red
background. To edit a previously defined OUTPUT, double-click on the output in the lower left
Ntypes overview window.

5–24
 Figure 5.2.3-7: Specifing an output with a green background

In Table 5.2.3-1 below, a list of optional outputs is shown. Table 5.2.3-1 is divided into so called
“airnode outputs” where a single output is produced for each airnode specified and so called
“surface outputs” where a single output is produced for specified surfaces of an airnode. In
addition, outputs for groups of airnodes can be defined. Airnodes are combined in groups by
stating the airnodes in a row and then specifying the desired NType numbers of possible group
outputs. For each of these NType numbers, a group output for the stated zones is produced.
A themal zone is not equal to an airnode. A thermal zone may consist of more than one airnode.
Only balance outputs are based on thermal zones.

5–25
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.3-1: Optional Outputs

Airnodes Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 1 TAIR air temperature of airnode [°C]

sensible energy demand, heating(-), cooling(+)

NType 2 QSENS [kJ/hr]
(supply air conditioning not included)

total convection to air from all surfaces within airnode incl.

NType 3 QCSURF [kJ/hr]
internal shading

NType 4 QINF sensible infiltration energy gain of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 5 QVENT sensible ventilation energy gain of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 6 QCOUP sensible coupling gains of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 7 QGCONV internal convective gains of airnode [kJ/hr]

sensible change in internal energy of air in airnode since

NType 8 DQAIR [kJ/hr]
the beginning of the simulation

NType 9 RELHUM relative humidity of airnode air [%]

latent energy demand of airnode, humidification(-),

NType 10 QLATD [kJ/hr]
dehumidification (+); (supply air conditioning not included)

latent energy gains of airnode including ventilation,

NType 11 QLATG infiltration, coupling, internal latent gains and vapor [kJ/hr]
adsorption in walls

total shortwave solar radiation transmitted through external

NType 12 QSOLTR [kJ/hr]
windows of airnode (but not kept 100 % in airnode)

NType 13 QGRAD defined internal radiative gains of airnode [kJ/hr]

total radiation absorbed (or transmitted) at all inside surf.

NType 14 QTABSI of airnode (includes solar gains, radiative heat, internal [kJ/hr]
radiative gains and wallgains)

total radiation absorbed at all outside surf. of airnode

(includes solar gains, radiative heat, internal radiative
NType 15 QTABSO [kJ/hr]
gains and wallgains, but not longwave radiation exchange
with Tsky or other surfaces)

total convective and longwave rad. gains (T sky) to outside

NType 16 QTCOMO [kJ/hr]
surf.

5–26
Surface Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 17 TSI inside surface temperature [°C] [°C]

NType 18 TSO outside surface temperature [°C] [°C]

energy from inside surf. incl. conv. to air and longwave

NType 19 QCOMI [kJ/hr]
radiation to other surfaces

energy to outside surf. incl. conv. to air and longwave

NType 20 QCOMO [kJ/hr]
radiation to other surfaces or Tsky

absorbed (or transmitted) at inside surf (includes solar

gains, radiative heat, internal radiative gains and
NType 21 QABSI [kJ/hr]
wallgains, except longwave radiation exchange with other
walls)

radiation absorbed at outside surf. [kJ/hr] (includes solar

gains, radiative heat, internal radiative gains and
NType 22 QABSO [kJ/hr]
wallgains, except longwave radiation exchange with other
walls or Tsky)

Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 23 TSTAR star node temperature of airnode [°C]

NType 24 TMSURF weighted mean surface temperature of airnode [°C]

NType 25 TOP operative airnode temperature [°C]

NType 26 QVAPW heat of vapor adsorption in walls of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 27 QUA static UA-transmission losses (UA*dT) of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 28 value of schedule

NType 29 ABSHUM absolute humidity of airnode air [kgwater / kgdry_air]

NType 30 sensible heating demand of airnode (positive

QHEAT [kJ/hr]
values); (supply air conditioning not included)

NType 31 sensible cooling demand of airnode (positive

QCOOL [kJ/hr]
values); (supply air conditioning not included)

Note: NType 27 (static UA-transmission losses of walls + windows of airnode) and NType 46
do not use the transfer functions calculated by TRNbuild but instead uses the stationary U-
values to calculate steady state transmission losses of walls and windows without considering
any capacitance effects. The following values of the surface resistance (combined for
convection and radiation) are used for the U-value calculation:
HBACK > 30 kJ / (h m² K) => 1/α = 0.04 m² K / W
30 ≥ HBACK >0.005 => 1/α = 0.13 m² K / W
0.005 ≥ HBACK => 1/α = 0 m² K / W

5–27
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

HFRONT => 1/α = 0.13 m² K / W

If the NType 27 and 46 are used in short term calculations, large errors in the energy balances
of the building may occur due to the neglect of internal energy changes within massive walls.

5–28
Outputs for Groups of Airnodes:

NType# Label Description Unit

sum of sensible heating demand for specified

NType 32 SQHEAT airnodes (positive); (supply air conditioning not [kJ/hr]
included)

sum of sensible cooling demand for specified

NType 33 SQCOOL airnodes (positive); (supply air conditioning not [kJ/hr]
included)

NType 34 SQCSURF sum of surf. conv. gains of specified airnodes [kJ/hr]

sum of sensible infiltration gains of specified

NType 35 SQINF [kJ/hr]
airnodes

sum of sensible ventilation gains of specified

NType 36 SQVENT [kJ/hr]
airnodes

sum of sensible coupling gains of specified

NType 37 SQCOUP [kJ/hr]
airnodes

NType 38 SQGCONV sum of int. conv. gains of specified airnodes [kJ/hr]

sum of changes in internal energy of air in

NType 39 SDQAIR specified airnodes (since the beginning of the [kJ/hr]
simulation)

sum of latent energy demand of specified airnodes

NType 40 SQLATD humidification(-), dehumidification (+);(supply air [kJ/hr]
conditioning not included)

sum of latent energy gains of specified airnodes

NType 41 SQLATG including ventilation, infiltration, coupling and [kJ/hr]
vapor adsorption in walls

sum of shortwave solar radiation transmitted

NType 42 SQSOLT through windows of specified airnodes (but not [kJ/hr]
kept 100 % in airnode)

sum of internal radiative gains of specified

NType 43 SQGRAD [kJ/hr]
airnodes

total rad. absorbed (or transmitted) at inside surf.

NType 44 SQABSI of specified airnodes (includes solar gains, rad. [kJ/hr]
heat, int. rad. and wallgains)

total rad. absorbed at outside surf. of specified

NType 45 SQABSO airnodes (incl. solar gains, rad. heat, int. rad. and [kJ/hr]
wallgains, but not l-wave with Tsky)

sum of static transmission losses (UA*dT) of

NType 46 SQUA [kJ/hr]
specified airnodes

sum of heat of vapor adsorption in walls of

NType 47 SQVAPW [kJ/hr]
specified airnodes

Surface Outputs:
5–29
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 48 ICOND condensation flag (0 or 1) for inside surfaces

NType 49 OCOND condensation flag (0 or 1) for outside surfaces

NType 50 UWIN U-value of glazing and frame for external windows [kJ/ hr m² K]

g-value (solar heat gain coeff.) of glazing of

NType 51 GWIN external window only (= Balance 3 (primary solar):
gglass

NType 52 TIGLS inside surface temperature of the glazing [°C]

NType 53 TOGLS outside surface temperature of the glazing [°C]

NType 54 TIFRM inside surface temperature of the frame [°C]

NType 55 TOFRM outside surface temperature of the frame [°C]

Note: NType 50 (U-value of glazing and frame for external windows) does not use the surface
heat transfer coefficients deinfed in the project but instead uses the following standard surface
heat transfer coefficients (combined for convection and radiation):
HBACK > 30 kJ / (h m² K) => 1/α = 0.04 m² K / W
30 ≥ HBACK >0.005 => 1/α = 0.13 m² K / W
0.005 ≥ HBACK => 1/α = 0 m² K / W
HFRONT => 1/α = 0.13 m² K / W

Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 56 QSEC secondary heat flux of all windows of airnode [kJ/hr]

Surface Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 57 TALM node temperature of active layer [°C]

NType 58 TOFL fluid outlet temperature of active layer [°C]

energy input by fluid of active layer to active layer

NType 59 QALFL [kJ/hr]
(> 0: cooling, < 0: heating)

NType 60 QALE energy input by gains of active layer to active layer [kJ/hr]

total energy input by fluid&gains of active layer to

NType 61 QALTL [kJ/hr]
active layer

5–30
Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 62 PMV predicted mean vote (PMV) value of airnode

predicted percentage of dissatisfied persons

NType 63 PPD [%]
(PPD) value of airnode

Surface Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 64 QSGL solar rad. absorbed on all panes of window [kJ/hr]

solar rad. absorbed on internal shading device of

NType 65 QSISH [kJ/hr]
window

NType 66 QSOFR solar rad. absorbed on outside of window frame [kJ/hr]

NType 67 QSIFR solar rad. absorbed on inside of window frame [kJ/hr]

solar transmission to outside through external

NType 68 QSOUT [kJ/hr]
window

5–31
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

total solar rad. absorbed on all panes of all

NType 69 QTSGL [kJ/hr]
windows of airnode

total solar absorbed on internal shading device of

NType 70 QTSISH [kJ/hr]
all windows of airnode

total solar absorption on outside frame of external

NType 71 QTSOFR [kJ/hr]
windows of airnode

total solar rad. absorbed on inside of the frame of

NType 72 QTSIFR all ext. window and both sides of all adjacent [kJ/hr]
windows of airnode

total solar transmission to outside through external

NType 73 QTSOUT [kJ/hr]
window of airnode

total solar radiation passing the glass surface of

external windows (absorption on external shading
NType 74 QTSPAS devices and reflection of external glass surface are [kJ/hr]
excluded! -> total radiation absorbed or
transmitted by building components)

total solar rad. absorbed at all inside surfaces of

NType 75 QTSABS [kJ/hr]
airnode (for windows: secondary heat flux)

NType 76 QTWG total wallgains on inside surfaces of airnode [kJ/hr]

total longwave rad. losses to sky of outside

NType 77 QTSKY [kJ/hr]
surfaces of airnode

radiative energy rate of sensible heating demand

NType 78 QRHEAT [kJ/hr]
of airnode

5–32
Surface Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

Total solar (direct & diffuse) rad. absorbed at

NType 79 QSIAB [kJ/hr]
inside surface; for windows: secondary heat flux

NType 80 QIBAB solar direct rad. absorbed at inside surface [kJ/hr]

NType 81 QIDAB solar diffuse rad. being absorbed at inside surface [kJ/hr]

NType 82 QWG wall gain on inside surface of wall or window [kJ/hr]

NType 83 QSKY longwave rad. losses to sky of external surface [kJ/hr]

NType 84 QRGAB internal rad gains absorbed on inside surface [kJ/hr]

rad. energy rate of sens. heating demand

NType 85 QRHEA [kJ/hr]
absorbed on inside surf

equivalent resistance between star node and

NType 86 REQV [(hr K)/kJ]
surface

Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 90 THEAT Set temperature heating [°C]

NType 91 PHMAX Maximum power of heating [kJ/hr]

NType 92 HUMHEAT Desired Humidity for heating [%] or [kg/kg]

NType 93 TCOOL Set temperature cooling [°C]

NType 94 PCMAX Maximum power of cooling [kJ/hr]

NType 95 HUMCOOL Desired Humidity for cooling [%] or [kg/kg]

NType 96 ACHINF Airchange rate infiltration [1/h]

NType 97 GABSHUM humidity gain of defined gains [kg/kg]

latent energy demand of airnode by

NType 98 QDEHUM [kJ/hr]
dehumidification (positive values)

latent energy demand of airnode by humidification

NType 99 QHUM [kJ/hr]
(positive values)

5–33
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Surface Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 100 ISHADE Internal shading factor of window [-]

Total external shading factor of window for

OSHADB [-]
NType 101 direct radiation incl. geometric shading

Total external shading factor of window for

OSHADD [-]
NType 102 diffuse radiation incl. geometric shading

Total direct radiation on outside of external

IBSHAD [kJ/hr]
NType 103 surface (incl. shading)

Total diffuse radiation on outside of external

IDSHAD [kJ/hr]
NType 104 surface (incl. shading)

Primary beam radiation distribution factor of

FSOLBPR [-]
NType 105 inside surface

Non-primary beam radiation distribution factor

FSOLB [-]
NType 106 of inside surface

NType 107 HCONVO eff. outside conv. heat transfer coeff (BACK) [kJ/hr m² K]

NType 108 HCONVI eff. inside conv. heat transfer coeff (FRONT) [kJ/hr m² K]

NType 109 QSICONV Energy gain inside by convection [kJ/hr]

Energy absorbed on inside surface by longwave

QABSILW [kJ/hr]
NType 110 radiation exchange

NType 111 TIFL Inlet temperature of active layer [°C]

NType 112 MFLAL Inlet mass flow rate of active layer [kg/hr]

NType 113 AREA surface area [m²]

Incident direct radiation on outside of external

IB [kJ/hr]
NType 114 surfaces (without shading effects)

Incident diffuse radiation on outside of external

ID [kJ/hr]
NType 115 surfaces (without shading effects)

Incident total radiation on outside of external

IT [kJ/hr]
NType 116 surfaces (without shading effects)

5–34
Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

convective energy gain of airnode due

transmitted solar radiation through external
NType 117 QSOLAIR [kJ/hr]
windows which is transformed immediately into
a convective heat flow

NType 118 VOLUME Air volume of airnode [m³]

Surface Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

Shading control signal for integrated radiation

depending shading of external windows
NType 119 SHADCNTRL [-]
(0..integrated shading control not active, 1..
integrated shading control active (=closed))

Comfort Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

Mean radiant temperature (output not

TMR [°C]
NType 120 influenced by elevated air speed)

NType 122 TOP Operative temperature [°C]

NType 123 SET Standard effective temperature [°C]

NType 124 PMV Predicted mean vote (incl. elevated air speed) [-]

Percentage of persons dissatisfied (incl.

NType 126 PPD [%]
elevated air speed)

NType 128 CLO Clothing factor [clo]

NType 129 MET Metabolic rate [met]

NType 130 WORK External work [met]

Air velocity (optimized elevated air speed if

NType 131 VAIR [m/s]
active)

NType 132 EAS Optimized elevated air speed level (0,1,2 or 3) [m/s]

NType 133 FSHADE Shading factor of comfort sensor [-]

Sun position depending projection factor

NType 134 FPROJ [-]
(0…no, 1…yes)

5–35
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Surface Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

Geometric shading factor of window for direct

NType 140 GSHADB [-]
radiation

Geometric shading factor of window for diffuse

NType 141 GSHADD [-]
radiation

Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

NType 150 REFAREA Reference floor area [m²]

Sensible energy gains from “lights” gain of

QGLIGHT [kJ/hr]
NType 151 airnode

Sensible energy gains from “equipment” gains

QGEQUIP [kJ/hr]
NType 152 of airnode

Sensible energy gains from “miscellaneous”

QGMISC [kJ/hr]
NType 153 gains of airnode

Sensible energy gains from “people” gains of

QGPEOPLE [kJ/hr]
NType 154 airnode

Electric energy demand of “lights” gains of

QELLIGHT [kJ/hr]
NType 155 airnode

Electric energy demand of “equipment” gains of

NType 156 QELEQUIP [kJ/hr]
airnode

Electric energy demand of “miscellaneous”

NType 157 QELMISC [kJ/hr]
gains of airnode

NType 158 QELGAINS Electric energy demand of "all" gains of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 159 QELHEAT Electric energy demand of heating of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 160 QELCOOL Electric energy demand of cooling of airnode [kJ/hr]

NType 161 QELVENT Electric energy demand of ventilation of airnode [kJ/hr]

Electric energy demand of HVAC components

NType 162 QELHVAC [kJ/hr]
(heating, cooling, ventilation) of airnode

Airnode Outputs:

NType# Label Description Unit

Reference area for thermal bridge gain/loss of

163 THBAREA [C]
airnode

Sensible energy gain from "thermal bridge"

164 QGTHB [kJ/hr]
gains/losses of airnode

5–36
 QAHU_H total heating energy to condition supply air to set [kJ/hr]
170 point conditions (sum of defined ventilations with
supply air conditioning)

171 QAHU_C total cooling energy to condition supply air to set [kJ/hr]
point conditions (sum of defined ventilations with
supply air conditioning)

172 QAHU_SENS_H heating energy to condition supply air to reach set [kJ/hr]
point temperature after HX, Dehum (sum of defined
ventilations with supply air conditioning)

173 QAHU_SENS_C cooling energy to condition supply air to reach set [kJ/hr]
point temperature after HX (sum of defined
ventilations with supply air conditioning)

174 QAHU_HRSENS_ heating energy provided by heat recovery unit (sum [kJ/hr]
H of defined ventilations with supply air conditioning)

175 QAHU_HRSENS_ cooling energy provided by heat recovery unit (sum [kJ/hr]
C of defined ventilations with supply air conditioning)

176 QAHU_HUM_H heating energy for humidification process (sum of [kJ/hr]

defined ventilations with supply air conditioning)

177 QAHU_DEHUM_C cooling energy for dehumidification process (sum [kJ/hr]

of defined ventilations with supply air conditioning)

180 TAIR_WB wet bulb temperature of airnode [C]

181 TAIR_DP dew point temperature of airnode [C]

TAHU_HR dry bulb temperature after heat recovery of 1st [C]

185
ventilation with supply air conditioning

TAHU_HRWB wet bulb temperature after heat recovery of 1st [C]

186
ventilation with supply air conditioning

TAHU_HRDP dew point temperature after heat recovery of 1st [C]

187
ventilation with supply air conditioning

RHAHU_HR rel. humidity of air after heat recovery of 1st [%]

188
ventilation with supply air conditioning [%]

WHU_HR Humidity ratio of air after heat recovery of 1st

189 [kg/kg]
ventilation with supply air conditioning [kg/kg]

5–37
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Surface Outputs (complex fenestration model):

NType# Label Description Unit

QSBSH Solar rad. absorbed on shading devices between of

301 [kJ/h]
glass panes (for complex fenestration model only)

TGLAY1 Mean temperature of 1st glazing layer (available for [°C]

302
complex fenestration model only)

TGLAY2 Mean temperature of 2nd glazing layer (available for [°C]

303
complex fenestration model only)

TGLAY3 Mean temperature of 3rd glazing layer (available for [°C]

304
complex fenestration model only)

TGLAY4 Mean temperature of 4th glazing layer (available for [°C]

305
complex fenestration model only)

TGLAY5 Mean temperature of 5th glazing layer (available for [°C]

306
complex fenestration model only)

TGLAY6 Mean temperature of 6th glazing layer (available for [°C]

307
complex fenestration model only)

TGGAP1 Outlet temperature of gap 1 (for not ventilated gaps [°C]

310 = gap temperature, available for complex
fenestration model only)

TGGAP2 Outlet temperature of gap 2 (for not ventilated gaps [°C]

311 = gap temperature, available for complex
fenestration model only)

TGGAP3 Outlet temperature of gap 3 (for not ventilated gaps [°C]

312 = gap temperature, available for complex
fenestration model only)

TGGAP4 Outlet temperature of gap 4 (for not ventilated gaps [°C]

313 = gap temperature, available for complex
fenestration model only)

TGGAP5 Outlet temperature of gap 5 (for not ventilated gaps [°C]

314 = gap temperature, available for complex
fenestration model only)

MFGAP1 mass flow of gap 1 (available for complex [kg/hr]

317
fenestration model only) [kg/h]

MFGAP2 mass flow of gap 2 (available for complex [kg/hr]

318
fenestration model only) [kg/h]

MFGAP3 mass flow of gap 3 (available for complex [kg/hr]

319
fenestration model only) [kg/h]

5–38
 MFGAP4 mass flow of gap 4 (available for complex [kg/hr]
320
fenestration model only) [kg/h]

MFGAP5 mass flow of gap 5 (available for complex [kg/hr]

321
fenestration model only) [kg/h]

Airnode Outputs (Daylight):

NType# Label Description Unit

ILLUM_H Global horizontal illuminance outside the building

400 [lux]
(without shading effects)

ILLUM_DH Diffuse horizontal illuminance outside the building

401 [lux]
(without shading effects)

ILLUM_DN Direct normal illuminance outside the building

402 [lux]
(without shading effects)

403 DLSHADE Daylight shading control signal [-]

405 AREADCL1 Floor area related to 1st daylight controlled gain [m²]

406 ILLUMDLC1 Daylight illuminance of 1st controlled gain [lux]

407 ILLSETDLC1 Illuminance set point of 1st daylight controlled gain [lux]

Lighting control type of 1st daylight controlled gain

408 TYPEDLC1 (1…always on, 2…on/off, 3…continuous, [-]
4…continuous on/off)

409 FDIMDLC1 Dimming fraction of 1st daylight controlled gain [-]

Continuous daylight autonomy of 1st daylight

410 CDADLC1 [%]
controlled gain

411 DADLC1 Daylight autonomy of 1st daylight controlled gain [%]

Useful daylight illuminance of 1st daylight controlled [%]

412 UDIDLC1
gain

415 AREADCL2 Floor area related to 2nd daylight controlled gain [m²]

416 ILLUMDLC2 Daylight illuminance of 2nd controlled gain [lux]

417 ILLSETDLC2 Illuminance set point of 2nd daylight controlled gain [lux]

418 Lighting control type of 2nd daylight controlled gain

TYPEDLC2 (1…always on, 2…on/off, 3…continuous, [-]
4…continuous on/off)

419 FDIMDLC2 Dimming fraction of 2nd daylight controlled gain [-]

5–39
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

420 Continuous daylight autonomy of 2nd daylight

CDADLC2 [%]
controlled gain

421 DADLC2 Daylight autonomy of 2nd daylight controlled gain [%]

422 Useful daylight illuminance of 2nd daylight controlled [%]

UDIDLC2
gain

425 AREADCL3 Floor area related to 3rd daylight controlled gain [m²]

426 ILLUMDLC3 Daylight illuminance of 3rd controlled gain [lux]

427 ILLSETDLC3 Illuminance set point of 3rd daylight controlled gain [lux]

428 Lighting control type of 3rd daylight controlled gain

TYPEDLC3 (1…always on, 2…on/off, 3…continuous, [-]
4…continuous on/off)

429 FDIMDLC3 Dimming fraction of 3rd daylight controlled gain [-]

430 Continuous daylight autonomy of 3rd daylight

CDADLC3 [%]
controlled gain

431 DADLC3 Daylight autonomy of 3rd daylight controlled gain [%]

432 Useful daylight illuminance of 3rd daylight controlled [%]

UDIDLC3
gain

435 STDFILE_DL Daylight standard output file is printed. The output

file contains statistic outputs (continuous daylight
autonomy, daylight autonomy and Useful daylight
illuminance). For these variables the selected
ON/OFF factor (schedule which is 0or 1) is used. In
addition, the selected ON/OFF factor is set to this
NType.

5–40
Balance Outputs (printing standard files):

NType# Label Description Unit

901 BAL_1 Solar Balance for Zones is printed [kJ/hr]

902 BAL_2 Solar Balance for Sum of all Zones is printed [kJ/hr]

903 BAL_3 Solar Balance for External Window is printed [kJ/hr]

904 BAL_4 Energy Balance for Zones is printed [kJ/hr]

905 BAL_5 Energy Balance for Sum of all Zonesis printed [kJ/hr]

906 BAL_6 Energy Balance for Wall Surfacesis printed [kJ/hr]

907 BAL_7 Moisture Balance for Airnodes is printed [kJ/hr]

908 BAL_8 Moisture Balance for Sum of all Airnodes is printed [kJ/hr]

The balance NTypes 901 – 908 are defined like the other outputs but in contrast to the other
ones they don’t return a value. If they are defined a balance output files are printed in the
directory of the Trnsys input file DCK. These files contain hourly integrated values. The balances
are described in detail in Section 5.2.3.5 .
In addition to the balance output files each item of the balance is available as NType

Zone Outputs corresponding to Balance 901 (see 5.2.3.5.1):

NType# Label Description Unit

910 B1_QBAL BAL 1: solar balance for one zone [kJ/hr]

BAL 1: total external solar radiation on all [kJ/hr]

911 B1_QSEXT
windows of one zone including frame

BAL 1: solar gains due to exchange with [kJ/hr]

912 B1_QSADJ adjacent zones (gains +; Losses -). Including
multiple reflection.

BAL 1: solar blocked due to reflection of [kJ/hr]

913 B1_QBREFG glazing layers and shading devices of all
windows of a zone

BAL 1: solar blocked due to absorption on [kJ/hr]

glazing layers and shading devices of all
914 B1_QBABSG external windows (= secondary heat flux going
out but without convective loss from gap
ventilation (see B1_QSHVOUT)

BAL 1: solar blocked due to frames of all [kJ/hr]

915 B1_QBFRM windows of a zone. (absorbed and reflected
solar)

solar blocked due to geometric shading of all [kJ/hr]

external windows of a zone
916 B1_QBGSHD
(Trnsys 17: solar blocked due to geometeric
and external shading)

5–41
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

BAL 1: solar radiation leaving zone by [kJ/hr]

917 B1_QSLOSS
transmission through external windows of zone

BAL 1: absorbed solar gains on all windows of [kJ/hr]

zones going inside (secondary heatflux of total
918 B1_QSGWIN
window but without convective gain from gap
ventilation (see B1_QISHCCI))

Obsolete (incl in B1_QBREFG for Trnsys 18) [kJ/hr]

919 B1_QBRISHD solar blocked due to reflection on internal
shading devices of all windows of a zone

BAL 1: convective energy gain of zone due to [kJ/hr]

920 B1_QISHCCI absorbed solar going inside by ventilation of
internal shading device

BAL 1: absorbed solar radiation on all walls of [kJ/hr]

921 B1_QSGWALL
zone

BAL 1: convective energy gain of zone due [kJ/hr]

transmitted solar radiation through external
961 B1_QSOLAIR windows which is transformed immediately into
a con. heat flow to internal air
(same as balance 4: NType 961)

BAL 1: convective loss due to absorbed solar going [kJ/hr]

922 B1_QSHVOUT
out by gap ventilation

Surface Outputs corresponding to Balance 903 (see 5.2.3.5.3):

NType# Label Description Unit

BAL 3: solar balance for one external window [kJ/hr]

930 B3_QBAL
should be always 0

BAL 3: total external solar radiation on the [kJ/hr]

931 B3_QSEXT
external windows including frame

solar blocked due to geometric shading of [kJ/hr]

external windows of a zone
932 B3_QBGSHD
(Trnsys 17: solar blocked due to geometeric and
external shading)

BAL 3: solar blocked due to frame of external [kJ/hr]

933 B3_QBFRM
window of a zone

BAL 3: solar blocked due to reflection of glazing [kJ/hr]

934 B3_QBREFG
and shading layers of external window

BAL 3: solar blocked due to absorption on [kJ/hr]

glazing and shading devices of external
935 B3_QBABSG windows (= secondary heat flux of external
window going out without convective loss from
gap ventilation (see B3_QSHVOUT)

BAL3: solar radiation absorbed and removed by

946 B3_ QSHVOUT
ventilated gaps to outside

5–42
 obsolete (incl. in B3_QBREFG): solar blocked [kJ/hr]
936 B3_QBRISHD due to reflection on internal shading device (only
shortwave radiation included,

obsolete (incl. in B3_QBABSG): solar blocked [kJ/hr]

due to reflection on internal shading device (part
937 B3_QBLWISHD
which is absorbed and then going out only
longwave)

BAL 3: secondary heat flux of external window [kJ/hr]

938 B3_QSHFPR only primary solar no reflected radiation or
radiation through other windows

BAL 3: short wave transmission through [kJ/hr]

939 B3_QSTRNS
external window to zone (primary solar)

940 gtot total g-value (SHGC) of external window [kJ/hr]

fc_Gshade shading coefficient of geometric shading [kJ/hr]

shading coefficient of external shading (for [kJ/hr]

941 fc_Eshade
complex fenestration model: not available)

942 gframe g-value (SHGC) of frame of external window [kJ/hr]

943 gglas g-value (SHGC) of glas of external window [kJ/hr]

shading coefficient internal shading (for [kJ/hr]

944 fc_Ishade
complex fenestration model: not available)

945 AI angle of incidence for window balance [kJ/hr]

Zone Outputs corresponding to Balance 904 (see 5.2.3.5.4):

NType# Label Description Unit

NType BAL 4: energy balance for zone should be [kJ/hr]

B4_QBAL
950 always close to 0

NType [kJ/hr]
B4_DQAIRdt BAL 4: change of internal energy of zone
951

NType BAL 4: power of ideal heating [kJ/hr]

B4_QHEAT
952 (convective+radiative)

NType [kJ/hr]
B4_QCOOL BAL 4: power of ideal cooling
953

NType [kJ/hr]
B4_QINF BAL 4: infiltration gains
954

NType [kJ/hr]
B4_QVENT BAL 4: ventilation gains
955

NType [kJ/hr]
B4_QCOUP BAL 4: coupling gains
956

5–43
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

NType BAL 4: transmission into the surface from inner [kJ/hr]

B4_QTRANS
957 surface node

NType [kJ/hr]
B4_QGINT BAL 4: internal gains (convective+radiative)
958

NType [kJ/hr]
B4_QWGAIN BAL 4: wall gains
959

NType BAL 4: absorbed solar gains on all inside [kJ/hr]

B4_QSOL
960 surfaces of zone

BAL 4: convective energy gain of zone due [kJ/hr]

NType transmitted solar radiation through external
B4_QSOLAIR
961 windows which is transformed immediately into
a con. heat flow to internal air

5–44
Surface Outputs for walls corresponding to Balance 906 (see 5.2.3.5.6)

NType# Label Description Unit

NType BAL 6: energy balance for a wall should be [kJ/hr]

B6_BAL
972 always 0

NType [kJ/hr]
B6_DQWALL BAL 6 : change of internal energy of wall
973

NType BAL 6 : combined heat flux to inside (going into [kJ/hr]

B6_QCOMI
974 zone+; going into wall -)

NType BAL 6 : combined heat flux to outside (going to [kJ/hr]

B6_QCOMO
975 outside-; going into wall +)

NType BAL 6 : Total radiative gains for inner surface [kJ/hr]

B6_QRADGI
976 node

NType BAL 6 : Total radiative gains for outside surface [kJ/hr]

B6_QRADGO
977 node

NType BAL 6 : Total energy gains by an active layer or [kJ/hr]

B6_QALG
978 a chilled ceiling (heating -; cooling +).

5–45
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Airnode Outputs corresponding to Balance 907 (see 5.2.3.5.7 )

NType# Label Description Unit

NType BAL 7: moisture balance of an airnode should [kg/hr]

B7_MWBAL
980 be always 0

NType BAL 7: change of water stored in the air of [kg/hr]

B7_MDWAIR
981 airnode

NType BAL 7: change of water stored in the surfaces of [kg/hr]

B7_DMWBUF
982 airnode for the detailed humidity

NType [kg/hr]
B7_MWINF BAL 7: water gain of zone due to infiltration
983

NType [kg/hr]
B7_MWVENT BAL 7: water gain of zone due to ventilation
984

NType [kg/hr]
B7_MWCOUP BAL 7: water gain of zone due to coupling
985

NType [kg/hr]
B7_MWIGAIN BAL 7: water gain from internal loads
986

NType BAL 7: water gain due to ideal humidification of [kg/hr]

B7_MWHUM
987 heating type

NType BAL 7: water loss due to ideal dehumidification [kg/hr]

B7_MWDHUM
988 of cooling type

5–46
5.2.3.5. Balance Outputs

5.2.3.5.1. BALANCE 1 - SOLAR BALANCE FOR ZONES (NTYPE 901)

This balance shows how much solar radiation is blocked, how much is entering the
zone and how much is exchanged with other zones. This balance is printed always for all zones
in one file (called SOLAR_ZONES.BAL) if NType 901 was selected in the output manager for
one zone.

B1_QBAL = B1_QSEXT + B1_QSADJ - B1_QBREFG - B1_QBABSG -

B1_QBFRM - B1_QBGSHD - B1_QSLOSS - B1_QSGWIN -
Eq. 5.2.3-1
B1_QISHCCI - B1_QSGWALL - B1_QSOLAIR -
- B1_QSHVOUT [kJ/hr]

Balance:
B1_QBAL solar balance for one zone should be close 0.
Maximum possible Gains:
B1_QSEXT total external solar radiation on all windows of one zone including frame
B1_QSADJ solar gains due to exchange with adjacent zones (gains +; Losses -). Including
multiple refection.
Blocked Gains:
B1_QBGSHD solar blocked due to geometric shading devices of all windows of a zone
B1_QBREFG solar blocked due to reflection of glazing and shading layers of all windows of
a zone
B1_QBFRM solar blocked due to frames of all windows of a zone. Secondary heat flux into
zone from absorbed solar on external surface of frame is not included.
B1_QBABSG solar blocked due to absorption on glazing and shading layers of all external
windows (only absorbed gains not entering the zone)
Losses:
B1_QSLOSS solar radiation leaving zone through external windows of zone (excluding solar
reflected by internal shading device)
B1_QSHVOUT solar radiation leaving zone as convective energy gain (absorbed solar going
out by gap ventilation)
Gains of zone:
B1_QSGWIN Absorbed solar gains on all windows of zones going inside (secondary heatflux
for total window including frame and internal shading device without
CCISHADE Part)
B1_QISHCCI Absorbed on all internal shading devices of zone and directly transferred to the
airnode by ventilation (CCISHADE).
B1_QSGWALL absorbed solar radiation on all walls of zone.
B1_QSOLAIR convective energy gain of zone due transmitted solar radiation through external
windows which is transformed immediately into a con. heat flow to internal air.
(same as B4_QSOLAIR)

5–47
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.3.5.2. BALANCE 2 - SOLAR BALANCE FOR SUM OF ALL ZONES (NTYPE 902)
This balance is the same as Balance 1 but all values for all zones are summed up together. If
NType 902 was selected in the output manager for one zone, this balance is printed in one file
called SOLAR_TOT.BAL.

5.2.3.5.3. BALANCE 3 - SOLAR BALANCE FOR EXTERNAL WINDOW (NTYPE 903)

This Balance shows how much primary solar radiation is blocked and how much is
entering the zone through a EXTERNAL window. Due to the aim of this balance is to show the
performance of a window and its shading devices only the solar radiation entering a external
window is taken into account. Reflected radiation from the room or solar radiation entering
through other windows is excluded from this balance.
If NType 903 was selected in the output manager, this balance will be printed for all selected
external windows in one file each (called SOLAR_WIN_XXX.BAL).

B3_QBAL = B3_QSEXT - B3_QBGSHD

. - B3_QBFRM - B3_QBREFG - B3_QBABSG Eq. 5.2.3-2
. - B3_QSHFPR - B3_QSTRNS - B1_QSHVOUT [kJ/hr]

Balance:
B3_QBAL solar balance for one external window should be close 0.

Maximum possible Gains:

B3_QSEXT total external solar radiation on the external windows including frame

Blocked Gains:
B3_QBREFG solar blocked due to reflection of glazing and shading layers of external
window
B3_QBGSHD solar blocked due to geometric shading devices of external window
B3_QBFRM solar blocked due to frame of external window of a zone.
B3_QBABSG solar blocked due to absorption on glazing and shading layers of
external window (only absorbed from primary solar radiation on this
window)
B3_QSHVOUT solar radiation leaving zone as convective energy gain (absorbed solar
going out by gap ventilation)

Gains of zone:
B3_QSHFPR secondary heatflux of external window only primary solar no reflected
radiation or radiation through other windows included.
B3_QSTRNS short wave transmission through external window to zone

Out of these parts the performance of the window and its shading devices can be calculated:

gtot = (B3_QSTRNS + B3_QSHFPR) / B3_QSEXT

gtot = fc_Gshade * fc_Eshade * gframe * gglas * fc_ishade Eq. 5.2.3-3

5–48
5.2.3.5.4. BALANCE 4 – SENSIBLE ENERGY BALANCE OF ZONES (NTYPE 904)
The system boundary for this energy balance includes the inside surface node of all
surfaces of a zone. Due to this radiative and convective heat fluxes appear in this balance. This
is different from the balance shown in Section 5.4.1.1 which contains the convective heat flux
to an air node only.
Note: The energy balance 4 doesn’t include the surface constructions themselves! Therefore,
energy stored in a construction as well as energy input into the construction by an active layer
is not part of this balance but effects the transmission gains of the balance! (see also 5.2.3.5.6
- detailed balance for surfaces).
If NType 904 was selected in the output manager, this balance will be printed for all zones in
one file (called ENERGY_ZONES.BAL).

B4_QBAL =- B4_DQAIRdt + B4_QHEAT - B4_QCOOL + B4_QINF

+ B4_QVENT + B4_QCOUP + B4_QTRANS
Eq. 5.2.3-4
+ B4_QGINT + B4_QWGAIN + B4_QSOL
+ B4_QSOLAIR [kJ/hr]

Balance:
B4_QBAL energy balance for one zone should be always close to 0. For saving time the
matrix of Type 56 isn’t always (only if the error is less than a certain
tolerance. Due to this fact the energy balance of the zone isn’t always 0.

B4_DQAIRdt change of internal energy of zone (calculated with capacitance of air +additional
capacitance which might be added in TRNBuild)
B4_QHEAT power of ideal heating (convective+radiative)
B4_QCOOL power of ideal cooling
B4_QINF infiltration gains
B4_QVENT ventilation gains
B4_QCOUP coupling gains
B4_QTRANS transmission gains (from the surface construction to the inner surface node)
B4_QGINT internal gains (convective+radiative)
B4_QWGAIN user-defined gain to the side of the surface facing towards the zone
B4_QSOL absorbed solar gains on all inside surfaces of zones (Note: This gain isn’t equal
to Balance 1, because the absorbed solar gains of the inside surface of all
windows are considered. These absorbed gains may go inside or
outside. For Balance 1, the absorbed gains on the inside and outside node
going inside are used.)
B4_QSOLAIR convective energy gain of zone due transmitted solar radiation through external
windows which is transformed immediately into a con. heat flow to internal air.

5.2.3.5.5. BALANCE 5 – SENSIBEL ENERGY BALANCE: SUM OF ALL ZONES

(NTYPE 905)
This balance is the same as Balance 4 but all values for all zones are summed up together. If
NType 905 was selected in the output manager for one zone, this balance is printed in one file
called ENERGY_TOT.BAL.

5–49
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.3.5.6. BALANCE 6 - ENERGY BALANCE FOR SURFACES (NTYPE 906)

This Balance shows the detailed energy balance of a surface. If NType 906 was selected in the
output manager, this balance will be printed for all selected walls in one file each (called
ENERGY_SURF_XXX.BAL).

B6_BAL = - B6_DQWALLdt – B6_QCOMI + B6_QCOMO + B6_QRADGI

Eq. 5.2.3-5
+ B6_QRADGO - B6_QALG [kJ/hr]

B6_BAL energy balance for a surface should be close 0.

B6_DQWALLdt change of internal energy of surface
B6_QCOMI combined heat flux to inside (going into zone+; going into wall -)
B6_QCOMO combined heat flux to outside (going to outside-; going into wall +)
B6_QRADGI Total radiative gains for inner surface node (including solar gains, rad.
internal gains wallgains and rad. heating see 5.4.1.3)
B6_QRADGO Total radiative gains for outside surface node (including solar gains,
rad. internal gains wallgains and rad. heating see 5.4.1.3)
B6_QALG Total energy gains by an active layer or a chilled ceiling (heating -;
cooling +).

5–50
5.2.3.5.7. BALANCE 7 - MOISTURE BALANCE FOR ZONES (NTYPE 907)
This Balance shows the moisture balance for all zones separately. Note: if the humidity
ratio reaches 100 % with an on going positive water gain to the zone. This will still lead to a
increasing amount of water stored in the air while actually there would be water drops
somewhere on surfaces.

B7_MWBAL = B7_MDWAIR + B7_DMWBUF - B7_MWINF - B7_MWVENT -

B7_MWCOUP - B7_MWIGAIN - B7_MWHUM + Eq. 5.2.3-6
B7_MWDHUM [kJ/h]

B7_MWBAL moisture balance for each zone should be close 0.

B7_MDWAIR change of water stored in the air of zone
B7_DMWBUF change of water stored in the surfaces of zone for the detailed humidity
model (sum of deep and surface storage)
B7_MWINF water gain of zone due to infiltration
B7_MWVENT water gain of zone due to ventilation
B7_MWCOUP water gain of zone due to coupling
B7_MWIGAIN water gain from internal loads
B7_MWHUM water gain due to ideal humidification of heating type
B7_MWDHUM water loss due to ideal dehumidification of cooling type

5.2.3.5.8. BALANCE 8 - MIOSTURE BALANCE FOR SUM OF ALL ZONES (NTYPE 908)
This balance is the same as Balance 7 but all values for all zones are summed up together.

5.2.3.5.9. BALANCE 9 – SUMMARY

This balance is automatically printed for all building simulations (SUMMARY.BAL). The first part
of this summary balance is based on balance 4 - energy balance per zone where all values per
time step are summed over the total simulation time.

5–51
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.4. Construction Types

The second branch in the TRNBuild navigator is called construction types. Here all the layers
used by opaque surface contructions, the opques surface constructions (walls, floors, ceilings,
roofs) and windows are listed and the total number of each construction type is shown in
brackets.
To add a new wall, floor, ceiling or roof type, right click on the respective icon. Now, you can
either define a new construction type under “Add Surface” or add an existing one from a library.
You can also right-click on an existing construction type in the list to delete, rename, copy or
save it to the library. If you left-click on an existing construction type in the list, detailed
information will appear. This can be done respectively to add layers or windows.

Figure 5.2.4-1: Editing a construction type in the list

Construction types can also be added directly in the zone. To do so, open the zone dialog box
by clicking on the respective zone in the TRNBuild navigator. Select “new” in the pull-down
menu to define a new construction type or “library” to choose a construction type from a library.
See Chapter 5.2.7 for more information on the zone dialog box.

Figure 5.2.4-2: Adding new construction type directly in the zone dialog box

5–52
5.2.4.1. Definition of a New (Opaque) Construction Type
To define a new surface type, select NEW from the pull-down menu of Construction Type and
a dialog as shown in Figure 5.2.4-3 will pop up. Besides entering a unique name for the wall
type, the user must first specify the construction of the wall type. The construction is specified
by a series of layers starting from the “inside” surface (front) of the wall to the “outside”
(back). The user can create a new layer (see Chapter 0 ) select a layer from a library (see
Chapter 0), or select a previously defined layer by using the right box and the arrow buttons.
After entering the thickness the selected layer appears in the left box. The thickness of a layer
in the left box can be edited by double-clicking. TRNBuild calculates the total wall thickness as
well as a standard U-value. This standard U-value is determined with combined heat transfer
coefficients of 7.7 W/ (m² K) inside and 25 W/ (m² K) outside.

Figure 5.2.4-3: Adding new construction type

In addition to the wall construction, the solar absorptance is required. The solar absorptance
coefficients depend on the properties of the surface finish. For daylight simulation it is assumed
that the visible light absorption is equal to the solar absorption.
The longwave emission coefficient can also be defined. The default value is 0.9. Note. The
coefficients of inside surfaces are used by the detailed longwave radiation mode only! If
the standard or simple model in is selected the entered values are ignored and set to 0.9. To
change the radiation mode double click on the respective thermal zone/airnode in the TRNBuild
navigator. In the arinode dialog, select “radiation modes” on the top right. Now select the
required model in the radiation mode dialog. See Chapter 5.2.7.12 for more information.
For the most commonly used longwave radiation models (standard and detailed model), the
convective heat transfer coefficient (without a radiative part!) must be defined. Common
values are:
• inside: 11 kJ / h m² K
• outside: 64 kJ / h m² K
While a constant heat transfer coefficient will be sufficient in most cases, it is possible to choose
internal calculation for any surface within a zone if desired. You will have to select whether the
surface is a floor, a ceiling or vertical to fit the appropriate heat transfer mechanism. See Chapter
5.2.3.2 Properties for further information.

5–53
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Note: The automatic calculation of heat transfer coefficients is only appropriate for
inside surfaces. Therefore it can not be used for outside surfaces of external or
boundary walls. For this kind of surfaces a user defined correlation may be defined
taking into account also wind influence.

If the longwave radiation mode “simple model” is selected for a zone combined heat transfer
coefficients have to be defined for the side of the surface facing the zone.

Outside surface solar absorptance coefficient

Roof tile, colored ceramic, slate, concrete
• rough surface, dark red 0.75 ... 0.80
• smooth surface, dark color 0.70 ... 0.75
• asbestos concrete 0.60 ... 0.65

Roof coating
• green 0.60 ... 0.65
• aluminum color 0.60 ... 0.65
• light grey, bright 0.30 ... 0.40
• white, smooth 0.20 ... 0.25

Exterior wall
• smooth surface, dark color 0.70 ... 0.75
• rough surface, medium bright color 0.65 ... 0.70
yellow and yellow red clinker, brick)
• smooth surface, medium bright color 0.60 ... 0.65
(chalky sandstone, asbestos concrete)
• rough surface and white color 0.30 ... 0.35
• smooth surface and white color 0.25 ... 0.30

Metallic surface
• zinc sheet, aged and dirty 0.75 ... 0.80
• aluminum, matted surface 0.50 ... 0.55
• aluminum color 0.35 ... 0.40
• bright and polished surface 0.20 ... 0.25
Figure 5.2.4-4: Solar absorptance coefficients

Note: The solar absorptance coefficient should not be used for solar radiation
distribution. Please use either the distribution factor GEOSURF or the Insolation matrix
for that behalf.

5–54
5.2.4.2. The (Opaque) Construction Type Library
Before creating a new construction type, it is recommended to check the wall library by selecting
LIBRARY from the WALL Type pull-down menu within the ZONE window. The wall library
window opens as shown in Figure 5.2.4-5.

Figure 5.2.4-5: Adding a new construction type from a library

Here, the user can use the mouse to select the wall construction from two different libraries: a
program library and a user library. If the German library version is selected under SETTINGS
from the OPTIONS menu, typical wall constructions are available. If the United States version
is selected, 144 wall constructions according to the ASHRAE Standard are provided.
The definition of surfaces can be loaded from standard libraries as can be seen in the upper
part or from user defined libraries. In both cases, the path and file name can be changed from
wall to wall by use of the interactive file dialog boxes.
At the bottom of the dialog box, the construction type name, solar absorptance and convective
heat transfer coefficients can be adjusted. The ‘front’ and ‘back’ default values for the solar
absorptance and convective heat transfer coefficient correspond to the internal surface and
external surface, respectively, for both vertical and horizontal external walls. Thus, they can be
changed based on the desired construction category. While a constant heat transfer coefficient
will be sufficient in most cases, it is possible to choose internal calculation if desired. You will
have to select whether the wall is a floor a ceiling or vertical to fit the appropriate heat transfer
mechanism. See Chapter 5.2.3.2 Properties for further information.

5–55
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.4.3. Definintion of a New (Opaque) Layer

If the user selects “add layer”, the definition window for a new layer opens (see Figure 5.2.4-6).
The user can now enter the corresponding material properties for the layer.
You can right-click on an existing layer type in the navigator list to delete, rename, copy or save
it to the library. If the layer is saved to the library and will be available for other projects and will
appear in the previously described layer library window.

For the definition of a new layer there are 4 options:

Massive: this is the most common one usually used in all constructions

Massless: only used when TRNBuild is not able to create the transfer
functions of a wall with only massive layers. In that case this layer
type is used for verythin layers where the thermal mass can be
neglected

Active: used for concrete core cooling and heating, capillary tube system
and for floor heating and cooling systems (see Section 5.2.4.5.1 )

Chilled ceiling: chilled ceiling panel decoupled from the rest of the wall due to
insulation or airspace (see Section 5.2.4.5.2)

In Trnsys 18, two optional parameters for calculating the embodied energy of the complete
construction type are added.

or

Figure 5.2.4-6: Adding a new layer

5–56
5.2.4.4. The (Opaque) Layer Library
Sometimes when defining a new construction type a new layer is needed. Before defining a new
layer, the user should check the provided layer libraries. To open the layer library dialog box,
select library in the new construction dialog box or right-click on the layer icon in the TRNBuild
navigator. The layer library dialog box opens as shown in Figure 5.2.4-7 . Here, the user can
use the mouse to select layers from two different libraries: a program library and a user library.
If the German library version is selected under SETTINGS from the OPTIONS menu, over 500
different layers are available. If the United States version is selected, over 500 different layers
are also available. A default layer name is given by the program, but it is recommended that the
user change it into a more meaningful one. Finally, the user must specify the thickness of the
layer.

or

Figure 5.2.4-7: Adding a new layer from a library

The path and file name for program lib or user lib can be changed for each selected layer by
choosing the file in the def boxes.

5–57
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.4.5. Advanced (Opaque) Construction Types

5.2.4.5.1. DEFINITION OF A CONSTRUCTION WITH AN ACTIVE LAYER
To model a radiant heating and cooling system, an “active layer” is added to the wall, floor or
ceiling. The layer is called “active” because it contains fluid filled pipes that either add or remove
heat from the surface. The active layer is described by 5 parameters (see Figure 5.2.4-8).

Figure 5.2.4-8: Adding a new active layer

For surfaces containing an active layer, the convective heat transfer coefficient between the
surface and zone air depends on the temperature of the active layer. Consequently, it is
recommended to use the internal calculation of heat transfer coefficients, see Section 5.2.3.2
for further information.
After finishing the wall definition, the wall is marked with an “A” in the overview box of walls. In
addition, a button for the active layer specification is displayed in the zone window. By clicking
on this button, entities like the inlet mass flow rate, inlet temperature, number of loops and
additional energy gain at the fluid level (see Figure 5.2.4-9) can be modified. The number of
loops is used to calculate the pipe length:
wall area
pipe length =
pipe spacing  number of loops

5–58
 Figure 5.2.4-9: The active layer specification dialog
The following thermoactive systems can be modeled:
• Concrete core cooling and heating
• Capillary tube system
• Floor heating and cooling systems
Concrete core cooling and heating
According to the equations given in the manual a specific minimum mass flow rate is necessary
to assure that a linearization of the exponential curve between inlet and outlet temperature is
possible. In most common cases the specific mass flow rate has to be greater then 13 kg/hm²
(the exact value is calculated for each active Layer). Therefore an ordinary piping system can
be modeled by 2 segments in series for most cases. The thickness of both layers adjacent to
the active layer must be ≥ 0.3 * pipe spacing
Capillary tube system
In addition to previous versions, capillary tube systems can now be modeled too. Unfortunately,
2 segments in series like for the ordinary piping system are insufficient: Depending on the
entered data up to 8 segments are required.
Floor heating and cooling system
For defining floor heating and cooling systems, please follow this guideline:
1. For entering the layers of the floor heating system start with a thickness of the layer
adjacent to the active layer with a thickness ≥ 0.3 * pipe spacing.
2. Define an active layer. Automatically, a new layer with the same properties of the layer
above the active layer is added below.
3. Enter an insulation layer with a resistance of at least 0.825 (m² K / W)
4. Now you can modify the thickness of the layer between the active layer and the
insulation layer (thickness ≥ 1/ 2 * outside pipe diameter)

d 1  0.3 * d x
dx

active layer 
d 2  /2

R > 0.825 m²K/W

Figure 5.2.4-10: Wall with an active layer for floor heating or cooling
5. After confirmation of the inputs you get back to the regime data window. When the
active layer wall is selected, you see a specification button, leading you to the next
menu, the active layer definition window (see Figure 5.2.4-12).

5–59
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.4-11: Active layer specification bar

6. Depending on the definition of pipe diameter, spacing, mass flow per unit area etc. it
might be necessary to define several segments. The first segment of a heating system
will have the highest surface temperature, resulting in a higher heat flow to the room,
the next segment somewhat smaller and so on. For airnodes with 3D geometric
information the splitting of surfaces have to be done in Trnsys3D and then manually
connected. For airnodes without 3D geometric information an automatic process, called
"Autosegmentation" is provided to ease the use of the active layer and to support a
physically correct use.
7. Pushing the button “Divide Surfaces” (see Figure 5.2.4-12) will start the auto
segmentation of the surface which generates the appropriate number of surfaces
related to the segments. If you want to see the details of that calculation, toggle the
“show calculation” check box on before autosegmentation.
Note: the check disappears anyway after segmentation. The surface numbers associated
with the segments appear in the “surface number of segments” window, except when no
segments are needed; in this case the statement “no segmentation” appears.

5–60
 Figure 5.2.4-12: Autosegmentation button
7. Finally, press the OK-button, then the wall window shows the active layer wall you
defined indicated by AS1, and a number of surfaces indicated by ASN. The original area value
of the active layer wall is evenly shared between these surfaces (see Figure 5.2.4-13).

Figure 5.2.4-13: Auto segments AS1 Asn

The bui-file syntax uses the keywords MFLOWMIN for the minimum mass flow rate allowed and
ASEGSURF for the list of associated wall segments:

5–61
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

WALL =BDU_AL1133 : SURF= 91 : AREA= 7 : BOUNDARY=INPUT 1*TRAUM : INTEMP = INPUT 1*TINAL1 : MFLOW = INPUT 1*MFTAB : NLOOP = 1 ;
: MFLOWMIN = 2 : ASEGSURF = 91 ,5 ,6 ,
WALL =BDU_AL1133 : SURF= 5 : AREA= 7 : BOUNDARY=INPUT 1*TRAUM : MFLOW = INPUT 1*MFTAB : NLOOP = 1 ;
: MFLOWMIN = 2 : ASEGSURF = 91 ,5 ,6 ,
WALL =BDU_AL1133 : SURF= 6 : AREA= 7 : BOUNDARY=INPUT 1*TRAUM : MFLOW = INPUT 1*MFTAB : NLOOP = 1 ;
: MFLOWMIN = 2 : ASEGSURF = 91 ,5 ,6 ,

Figure 5.2.4-14: Keywords associated with segmentation

5.2.4.5.2. DEFINITION OF A CONSTRUCTION WITH A CHILLED CEILING LAYER

For modeling a cooling ceiling panel, a “chilled ceiling” layer (see Figure 5.2.4-15) is added to
the ceiling definition. This layer can only be added on position 1 or for adjacent walls using the
FRONT/BACK switch on the last position of a wall definition.

Figure 5.2.4-15: The chilled ceiling dialog box

Besides the parameters pipe spacing, inside diameter and specific heat coefficient of fluid
additional parameters to define the performance at test conditions after the German norm DIN
4715-1 for the chilled ceiling panel are needed. These parameters as specific norm power,
specific norm mass flow rate, norm area and norm number of loops can be obtained from the
producer of a chilled ceiling panel.
There are two options for the chilled ceiling panel to be coupled to the ceiling.

5–62
The first is an air gap between chilled ceiling and ceiling. In that case the air gap and the heat
transfer within the gap is model internally and the air gap has not to be defined as a Layer. So
the next layer after a chilled ceiling in a wall definition could be e.g. a concrete layer.
The second option is direct contact: in that case the model requires for the next layer in the wall
definition an insulation with a Resistance > 10
To divide the specific normpower into radiative and convective part the mean surface
temperature o,kd has to be known at test conditions unfortunately only the mean fluid
temperature W is a standard output of a chilled ceiling panel test after DIN4715-1 (see Figure
5.2.4-16).

Figure 5.2.4-16: Chilled ceiling panel

Figure 5.2.4-17 shows the resistance model for chilled ceiling test conditions after 4715-1. With
the heat transfer coefficient Uwrx = 1/ (Rw+Rr+ Rx) the mean surface temperature can be
calculated for any condition. The heat transfer coefficient Uwrx can be calculated internally from
the specific norm power with an approximation for common used chilled ceiling panels or be an
user defined input. Also the difference between mean fluid temperature and mean surface
temperature if known for test conditions can be entered directly. The resulting heat transfer
coefficient Uwrx is then displayed for information only.

5–63
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.4-17: Resistance model for chilled ceiling test conditions after 4715-1.
In an expert mode additional heat transfer coefficients for the upper and the lower side of a
chilled ceiling panel may be added. Also the coefficients for the calculation of the heat transfer
in an air gap may be modified in the expert mode.

Figure 5.2.4-18: Expert mode for chilled ceiling

The model automatically calculates the convective heat transfer into the room depending on the
panel surface temperature and the zone air temperature. The model adjusts the heat transfer
calculated according to Type 80 with a fin-factor to fit the performance at norm conditions e. g.
for a convective cooling panel. Therefore the convective heat transfer coefficient option for a
wall with chilled ceiling is always predefined by TRNBuild on the side with the chilled ceiling
layer to internal calculation/ceiling (see Figure 5.2.4-19).

5–64
 Figure 5.2.4-19: Wall with chilled ceiling dialog box
With a double click on the specification bar of a wall with chilled ceiling this will open a window
where for each wall with a chilled ceiling the inlet temperature the mass flow rate and the number
of fluid loops can be entered.

5–65
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.4-20: Chilled ceiling specification

5–66
5.2.4.5.3. DEFINITION OF A CONSTRUCTION “THERMAL BRIDGE”
Since this feature wasn’t compatible with 3D geometry it was replaced in TRNBuild by thermal
brigde losses definition within the regime type of an airnode (see Chapter 5.2.6.6 ) in Trnsys 18.
However, if a Trnsys17 project file contains a thermal bridge construction it is still imported
correctly by Trnsys 18 and handled as in Trnsys17during the simulation.

5.2.4.6. Definition of a New Window Type

To define a new window type in TRNBuild, select NEW from the pull-down menu of WINDOW
Type and a window as shown in Figure 5.2.4-21 will pop up.

Figure 5.2.4-21: The new window type dialog box

Besides entering a new unique name for the window type, the user must specify the glazing and
frame properties as well as the optional properties of the shading devices. In the following, some
of the properties are explained more in detail:
• ID Number
The ID number has to be a unique number which provides the connection to the optical and
thermal property data of the glazing system. These properties have to be generated by an
external program Window 7.x (LBNL, 2014). Window 7.x is developed by the Lawrence Berkeley
National Laboratory (LBNL) and is available for free. (further information can be found in a
separate tutotial for generating new glazing systems with Window 7.x). Click on “Lib” for
selecting a glazing system from the program glazing library of TRNBuild which contains a large
variety of glazing systems. The desired glazing system can be selected by a mouse click. After
clicking “OK” glazing ID, U-value and the g-value are set according to the selection. In addition,
the properties data block of the glazing system is copied into your current building project file.
Alternatively, glazing-IDs can be loaded from the “Pool”, i.e. data already used in the actual
project.
Note: The glazing library contains product specific glazings which are based on data provided
by glass manufactures. Neither TRANSSOLAR Energietechnik GmbH nor any of their
contractors, subcontractors, or employees makes any warranty, expressed or implied, or
assumes any liability or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of any

5–67
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

information, apparatus, product or process disclosed, or represents that its use would not
infringe privately owned rights.
Note:Typing in an ID Number manually which isn’t contained in the “Pool” list will cause an
error!!

In Figure 5.2.4-22 The property data block for a glazing system is shown. The yellow highlighted
data is used by the window model. The displayed g-value, u-value and dvisible light
transmittance are marked red.
BERKELEY LAB WINDOW v7.4.6.0 DOE-2 Data File : Multi Band Calculation : generated with Trnsys18.std
Unit System : SI
Name : DOE-2 WINDOW LIB
Desc : GU_ClimaGuard_N_#3_Ar90
Window ID : 3201
Tilt : 90.0
Glazings : 2
Frame : 3 Wood 2.270
Spacer : 2 Class2 0.068 1.550 -0.143
Total Height: 1500.0 mm
Total Width : 1200.0 mm
Glass Height: 1360.3 mm
Glass Width : 1060.3 mm
Mullion : None
Gap Thick Cond dCond Vis dVis Dens dDens Pr dPr
1 Ar90/Air1 16.0 0.01712 5.410 2.062 6.300 1.711 -0.0060 0.687 -0.0001
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Angle 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Hemis
Tsol 0.562 0.562 0.558 0.552 0.544 0.522 0.467 0.353 0.175 0.000 0.483
Abs1 0.104 0.105 0.107 0.110 0.114 0.119 0.125 0.130 0.127 0.000 0.116
Abs2 0.095 0.095 0.097 0.098 0.097 0.095 0.092 0.082 0.051 0.000 0.091
Abs3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Abs4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Abs5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Abs6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rfsol 0.239 0.238 0.238 0.240 0.246 0.265 0.317 0.435 0.647 1.000 0.300
Rbsol 0.249 0.249 0.250 0.252 0.260 0.280 0.332 0.449 0.666 1.000 0.314
Tvis 0.741 0.740 0.735 0.729 0.718 0.689 0.616 0.465 0.230 0.000 0.638
Rfvis 0.129 0.128 0.129 0.133 0.143 0.170 0.240 0.394 0.653 1.000 0.215
Rbvis 0.126 0.125 0.126 0.129 0.139 0.165 0.230 0.373 0.627 1.000 0.207
SHGC 0.660 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Tvis_daylight: 0.800

Layer ID# 33000 33009 0 0 0 0

Tir 0.000 0.000 0 0 0 0
Emis F 0.860 0.040 0 0 0 0
Emis B 0.860 0.860 0 0 0 0
Thickness(mm) 4.0 4.0 0 0 0 0
Cond(W/m2-K )250.0 250.0 0 0 0 0
Spectral File 33000_GU_Flo 33009_GU_Cli None None None None

Overall and Center of Glass Ig U-values (W/m2-K)

Outdoor Temperature -17.8 C 15.6 C 26.7 C 37.8 C
Solar WdSpd hcout hrout hin
(W/m2) (m/s) (W/m2-K)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14
0 6.71 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14
783 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14
783 6.71 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14

Figure 5.2.4-22: Porperty data of glazing system

For the new glazing systems library of Trnsys 18, new standard files of TRNSYS 18
(TRNSYS18.std and TRNSYS18_evis.ssp) were used. In these files, the integral characteristic
of transmittance and reflectance for the visible range is based on the energy spectrum required
by the 2 band solar radiation model of Type 56. For most other standard files available for the
program Window, these integral characteristics for the visible wave lengths do not represent the
entire visible range, owing to spectral sensitivity of the human eye. The reason for introducing
a TRNSYS18 standard file is to allow a more accurate simulation of solar radiation of two
windows with high selective glazing properties (e.g. sun protection glazing) in series.
For the new glazing data base the syntax of the glazing property data is extended to include the
used standard file and the visible transmittance owing to spectral sensitivity of the human eye
which can be helpful for selecting the radiance material for daylight simulation.

5–68
The “Description” of a glazing system (e.g. GU_ClimaGuard_N_#3_Ar90 in Figure 5.2.4-22) in
the library is made up of the following composition:
YY_name_NN_filling
YY - Manufacturer code
(GU…Guardian, IP…Interpane, SG…SaintGobain, GT Glas Trösch)
name - Glazing system name
NN - Coating position e.g #3 (numeration starts on the outer face)
filling - Filling between glass panels

• ID Spacer
For calculating the edge correction of the U-value of the glazing 5 spacer types are available.
For Spacer ID = 0 all parameter including the glass height and width are read from the w74-
lib.dat For Spacer ID 1 to 4 the height and width of one glazing module has to be defined.

Spacer ID Spacer ID 1. Coefficient 2. Coefficient 3. Coefficient

0 data from w7.4-lib.dat - - -

1 Aluminum - ASHREA Metallic 2.33 -0.01 0.138

2 Stainless steel (dual seal) 1.03 0.76 0.0085

3 Butyl/Metal (fiberglass etc) 0.82 0.80 0.0022

4 Insulated 0.35 0.83 0.018

5 No spacer - - -

• U-VALUE and g-VALUE

The dispayed U-value and the g-value of the glazing are for user information only. (Note: Both
values aren't used in the simulation but are calculated by Type 56.) Note that for adjacent
windows it is important which side is defined as front or back. For example for an office with a
double-facade the front side should be defined towards the office. For external windows the side
towards the zone is automatically defined as front.

• Optional Properties of Shading Devices

The properties entered for the shading devices are effective only if a shading device is actually
defined for the window in the zone description (see Section 5.2.7.3). The coefficient CCISHADE
defines the part of the absorbed radiation on the internal shading device which is directly
transferred to a convective heat flux. If the option “add as convective gain” is checked this
convective heat flux is going to the air node. Otherwise the heat fluy is removed. The convective
heat flux depends on the actual temperatures, the type of shading device (louvers, blinds, etc.)
and the geometry of the air volume between the shading device and the window, especially the
height of the shading device and the distance to the inner window pane. If the internal shading
device is located very close to the inner window pane without any flow of air in between,
CCISHADE should be set to zero. A value of one for this coefficient represents an internal
shading device located in the room very far from the window. Typical values for CCISHADE
range from 0.3 to 0.6.
ISHADE defines the opaque fraction of a shading device 1-. The internal shading device may
have different reflection properties of the opaque part on the front and back sides. Therefore,
the reflection towards the window (REFLISHADE) and the reflection towards the zone
(REFLOSHADE) can be specified.

5–69
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

The following example of measured data for a closed internal shading device illustrate the
correlation of these variables:
transmission  30.0 %
absorption  43.4 %
reflection  26.6 %
=> ISHADE = 1-  = 0.7
=> REFLISHADE = /(1- ) = 0.38
ISHADE = 0.7
20 %
100 % absorbed REFLISHADE= 0.38
at window CCISHADE = 0.33

7.7 % = 54 %* ISHADE* (1-REFLISHADE)* CCISHADE

convection to air node
54 %
26 %
reflected
16.2 % = 54 %* (1-ISHADE)
solar radiation transsmitted
through shading
14.3 % = 54 %* ISHADE* REFLISHADE
reflection by shading

15.8 % = 54 %* ISHADE* (1-REFLISHADE)* (1-CCISHADE)

longwave radiation to window

Figure 5.2.4-23: Example for a closed internal shading device

Although the longwave emission coefficients can be user defined, the user defined values are
used by the detailed longwave radiation model only. If the standard or simple model is selected
the values are ignored and set to 0.9.
For user convenience, radiation depending control for shading devices of external windows is
availbale. In order to use this feature, the shading control has to be set to “integrated control” in
the window definition of the airnode (see section 5.2.7.3 ) If the total radiation on the window
exceeds the defined value (ITSHADECLOSE) the shading device closes completely, if the total
radiation on the window fall below the defined value (ITSHADEOPEN) the shading device is
reopened completely. Thereby, the total incient radiation is the total radiation in the plane of the
window without geometrical shading effects (e.g. like a tilted radiation sensor on a roof).

• Optional Daylight Properties

In Trnsys 18, daylight simulation based on DaySIM is integrated in Type 56 in addition to the
thermal simulation.
For windows, the window type dialog has been extended for defining optional daylight properties
by radiance material names. A radiance material name is assigned for two states of the window:
shaded and unshaded.
For selecting names click on the button “open radiance material file”, search for an appropriate
material and copy the name e.g. glass_80 into the input text box. The material “glass_80”
represents a glazing with a visible light transmittance of 80 %. The user can add missing
radiance materials to the library. (There are data bases for radiance materials available e.g.
www.lighting-materials.com/learn.)
Note: The syntax of the radiance material file which is described in the file header has to be
met!

5–70
To help selecting the radiance material of the unshaded state, the visible transmission for
daylight related to the glazing ID is displayed.
If a window type has no operable shading device at all, the radiance material file for unshaded
should be used for shaded as well.
If no detailed information is available for the shaded state, the visible light transmittance
multiplied by a shading factor might be used as a first guess.
Note: The visible transmission for daylight does not represent the entire visible range, owing to
the spectral sensitivity of the human eye, which means that it differs from the characteristic used
by the 2-band thermal model. In most cases, the visible light transmittance for daylight is given
in publications and is stored in the glazing data base.

##########################################################
### radiance material file
##########################################################
#
# syntax description:
# '#' - to start a comment lines
#
# each material description starts with a line: void material name
# with
# void - key word for defining a radiance material
# material
# - glass (transparent material)
# - plastic (opaque material with uncolored highlights)
# - metal (similar to plastic, but specular highlights are modified by …
# - mirror (used for reflecting planar surfaces)
# name - referenced for TRNSYS Type56 daylight material definition
#
# see material syntax in each section
# see also http://radsite.lbl.gov/radiance/refer/ray.html
##########################################################

########### glazing #####################################

# glass_ syntax description : #############################
# void glass name
# 0 0 3 transmissivity_red transmissivity_green transmissivity_blue

…….

# glass_80
# visual transmittance: 80%
# visual transmissivity: 87.15%
void glass glass_80
0
0
3 .8715 .8715 .8715

Figure 5.2.4-24: Window Type manager – radiance material file

• FRAME properties
The properties of the frame are not read from the W74-LIB.Dat file. They must be entered in
TRNBuild. The cframe-value has to be entered without the heat transfer coefficients h o and hi .
The solar absorptance is used for both sides of the frame.

• CONVECTIVE HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT (FRAME & GLAZING)

The convective heat transfer coefficient defined (without a radiative part!) is used for the whole
window (glazing + frame). Common values are inside: 11 kJ / h m² K and outside: 64 kJ / h m²
K. Like mentioned above for the input of opaque surface constructions, the internal calculation
of heat transfer coefficients can be selected. (See Chapter 5.2.3.2 ) for further information on
internal heat transfer calculation. The outside surface heat transfer coefficient is dominated by
forced convection due to wind, but for the inside surface the internal calculation makes sense,
since the glass surface temperature varies largely with room conditions.

5–71
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.4.7. The Window Library

The window Library contains prederfined complete windows (glazing system + shading data +
frame (see previous chapter). The window library can be selected by LIBRARY from the pull-
down menu of WINDOW Type within the ZONE window. The window library opens as shown in
Figure 5.2.4-25 .

Figure 5.2.4-25: Adding a window from the WINID-Pool library

Here, the user can use the mouse to select windows from two different libraries: a program
library and a user library. If the German library version is selected under SETTINGS from the
OPTIONS menu, common window constructions of German glazing systems are available.
This library contains product specific glazings which are based on data provided by Pilkington,
Saint Gobain, Interpane and Luxguard. Neither TRANSSOLAR Energietechnik GmbH nor any
of their contractors, subcontractors, or employees makes any warranty, expressed or implied,
or assumes any liability or responsibility for the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of any
information, apparatus, product or process disclosed, or represents that its use would not
infringe privately owned rights.
The library was created with the program WINDOW 7.4 from the Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory,
USA. For further information on the WINDOW program, please check the main Trnsys
Reference Manual.
A default window type name is given by TRNBuild after the selection, but it is recommended
that the user change it to a more meaningful one.

5–72
5.2.5. Schedules
The third branch in the TRNBuild navigator manages the schedules of the opened project.
Here all the schedules are listed and the total number of schedules is shown in brackets.
Analogous to the construction types, schedules can be edited by right clicking on them. To
see more information about a schedule, left-click on it.

Figure 5.2.5-1: Editing a schedule in the list

To add a schedule, right click on the schedule icon. Here, you can either define a new
schedule or import an existing one from a schedule library.

Figure 5.2.5-2: Adding a schedule from a library

Here, the user can take advantage of earlier defined schedules in libraries or any existing
*.bui-file. Just select the schedule from one of two different libraries: a program library and
a user library
To define a new schedule, choose “add schedule” and define the type name first. Then
select either a daily, monthly or annual schedule. Then the daily schedule is defined by
entering values for the desired time intervals (see Figure 5.2.5-3). For a weekly schedule,
the user selects a daily schedule for every day of the week by a pull-down menu as shown
in Figure 5.2.5-4. If the desired daily schedule has not yet been defined, the option NEW
allows the user to define a new daily schedule. In Trnsys 18 annual schedules can also be
defined. Similar to the daily schedule, you can enter a value for a time interval by choosing
the beginning and ending date and time (see Figure 5.2.5-5).

5–73
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.5-3: Daily schedule Figure 5.2.5-4: Weekly schedule

Figure 5.2.5-5: Annual schedule

5–74
5.2.6. Regime Types
The regime types are also listed in the TRNBuild navigator. This includes the infiltration,
ventilation, heating, cooling, comfort, gain and daylight control types. The types are listed unter
their respective category and the total number of each category is shown in brackets. To add a
new regime type, right click on the respective icon. A new dialog box opens and you can define
a new regime type. You can also right-click on an existing regime type in the list to delete,
rename, copy or save it to the library. If you left-click on an existing regime type in the list,
detailed information will appear.

Figure 5.2.6-1: Editing a regime type in the list

5.2.6.1. Definition of Infiltration Types

An air flow into the zone from outside the zone can be specified by adding infiltration. To add
an infiltration type, right-click on the icon and select “add infiltration”. A dialog box for the new
infiltration type opens.

Figure 5.2.6-2: Adding a new infiltration type

Now enter a new unique name for the infiltration type and define the air change rate of the
infiltration by clicking on the DEF button. You can enter a constant, an input or a schedule.

5.2.6.2. Definition of Ventilation Types

An air flow e.g. from heating or cooling equipment into the airnode can be specified by a
ventilation type. To add a ventilation type, right-click on the icon and select “add ventilation”. A
dialog box for the new ventilation type opens.

5–75
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.6-3: Adding a new ventilation type.

Besides entering a new unique name, the user must define the supply air flow rate as well as
the temperature and humidity of the air flow.
In Trnsys 18 the user has 5 options for defining the supply air flow. Especially the option of
defining the supply area flow related to the reference floor area allows to use one ventilation
type for several airnodes. In addition, a specific fan power can be entered which is used to
calculate the electrical energy demand related to ventilation.
Next, the user selects wether the supply air conditioning is done outside of Type 56 by another
component or if the air handling unit for supply air conditions is calculated internally by Type56.
For the second option Type 56 calculates the energy demand required to bring the supply air
flow from outside (ambient) conditions to the userdefined inlet conditions (see section 5.4.7 ).
By selecting the option OUTSIDE for the temperature and the humidity, the temperature and
the humidity of the outside air are used. The DEF button indicates that they can be defined as
a constant, an input, or a schedule.
The humidity can be defined as relative or humidity ratio (absolute humidity). If the option
“”supply air conditioning = internal calculation” is selected the user can define humidification to
a min. supply humidity and/or dehumidification to max. supply humidity.

5.2.6.3. Definition of Heating Types

The heating requirement of any airnode subject to idealized heating control can be determined
by specifying a heating type. If the heating equipment is modeled externaly by a component
other than the Type 56 component, the heating type should not be used. Instead, outputs of the
external conditioning equipment component(s) should lead to inputs of Type 56 defined as
ventilation airchange, temperature and humidity or outputs of a supplied heating power should
connect to inputs of Type 56 defined as convective and radiative gains.
To add a heating type, right-click on the icon and select “add heating”. A dialog box for the new
heating type opens.

5–76
 Figure 5.2.6-4: Adding a new heating type
Besides entering a new unique name, the user must define the room setpoint temperature, the
heating power with its radiative part, and the humidification of the air within the airnode. As
indicated by the DEF button, all variables can be defined as a constant, an input, or a schedule.
By selecting the option UNLIMITED for the heating power, the heating power is set to a very
high number. The userdefined heating power can be defined as absolute value or related to
reference floor area of wirnode. In addition an electric power fraction power can be entered
which is used to calculate the electrical energy demand related to the heating device.
The humidification can be turned on or off. If it is turn on, the user must specify the desired
humidity by clicking on the DEF button. The humidity can be defined as relative or absolute
humidity (humidity ratio).
For the simulation of heating equipment with both convective and radiative effects, a radiative
fraction of the heating power RRAD may be defined. This fraction of the heater power is supplied
as internal radiative gains and distributed to the walls of the zone. As the set temperature for
the heating equipment is related to the air temperature of the zone, the radiative fraction of the
heating power RRAD cannot be higher than 0.99 in order to have a convective part remaining
to ensure stable control of the heating equipment. For using RRAD greater than 0 it is
recommended to limit the maximum power.
Note: For zones with more than one airnode the radiative fraction of the heating power
RRAD has to be 0.

5–77
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.6.4. Definiton of Cooling Types

The cooling requirement of any airnode subject to idealized cooling control can be determined
by specifying a cooling type. If the cooling equipment is modeled externally by a type other than
the Type 56 component, the cooling type should not be used. Instead, outputs of the external
conditioning equipment component(s) should lead to inputs of Type 56 defined as ventilation
airchange, temperature and humidity or outputs of a supplied heating power should connect to
inputs of Type 56 defined as convective and radiative gains.
To add a cooling type, right-click on the icon and select “add cooling”. A dialog box for the new
cooling type opens.

Figure 5.2.6-5: Adding a new cooling type

Besides entering a new unique name, the user must define the room setpoint temperature, the
cooling power, and the dehumidification of the air within the zone. As indicated by the DEF
button, all variables can be defined as a constant, an input, or a schedule. By selecting the
option UNLIMITED for the cooling power, the cooling power is set to a very high number. The
userdefined cooling power can be defined as absolute value or related to reference floor area
of wirnode. In addition an electric power fraction power can be entered which is used to calculate
the electrical energy demand related to the cooling device.
The dehumidification can be turned on or off. If it is turned on, the user must specify the desired
humidity of the air above which there is dehumidification by clicking on the DEF button. The
humidity can be defined as relative or absolute humidity (humidity ratio).

5–78
5.2.6.5. Definition of Comfort Types
The thermal comfort calculation is based on EN ISO 7730. To add a comfort type, right-click on
the icon and select “add comfort”. A dialog box for the new comfort type opens.

Figure 5.2.6-6: Adding a new comfort type

Now enter a new unique name for the comfort type and define four entities:
• CLOTHING factor
In EN ISO 7730 a lot of clothing factors are given for a large variety of clothing. The following
table gives a brief data for common clothing ensembles:

Clothing ensemble Clothing factor [clo]

Nude 0

Shorts 0.1

Light summer clothing 0.5

(long light-weight-trousers, open neck shirt with
short sleeves)

Light working ensemble 0.6

(Athletic shorts, woolen socks, cotton work shirt,
work trousers)

Typical business suit 1.0

Typical business suit + Cotton coat 1.5

5–79
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Light outdoor sportswear 0.9

(Cotton shirt, trousers, T-shirt, shorts, socks,
shoes, single ply poplin jacket)

Heavy traditional European business suit 1.5

• METABOLIC rate
The metabolic rate represents a heat production depending on the activity level:

Degree of Activity Metabolic rate [met]

(acc. to EN ISO 7730)

Seated, relaxed 1.0

Seated, light work 1.2

(office, home, school, laboratory)

Standing, light work 1.6

(Shopping, laboratory, light factory work)

Standing, moderate work 2.0

(Sale activity, housework, operating of a
machine

Walking, 2 km/h 1.9

Walking, 3 km/h 2.4

Walking, 4 km/h 2.8

Walking, 5 km/h 3.4

• EXTERNAL WORK
In general the external work is around 0.
• REALTIVE AIR VELOCITY
The air velocity relative to the person must be entered.
As indicated by the DEF button, the user can enter a constant, an input or a schedule for all
values. For more information check the EN ISO 7730. Apart from the normative part of the
paper, the appendices also provide detailed information on clothing factors etc.
For the evaluation of comfort concepts with tempered air and elevated air speed in warmer
zones such as tropical climates adaptive comfort models are required.
In Trnsys 18 the procedure for evaluating the cooling effect of elevated air speed using the
Standard Effective Temperature (SET) described by ASHRAE Standard 55-2013, Appendix G
is implemented. This feature is especially useful to evaluate comfort concepts with tempered air
and elevated air speed in warmer zones such as tropical climates.
The SET can be calculated for a wide range of six environmental and personal parameters: air
temperature (Tair), mean radiant temperature (MRT), relative humidity (RH) average elevated
air speed (v), clothing factor (clo) and metabolic rate (met). To evaluate the cooling effect of
elevated air speed first the SET is calculated for the parameters and the given air speed. In a
second step the air speed is replaced by still air (0.15 m/s) and an adjusted averaged air and
mean radiant temperature is calculated to achieve the same SET as in the previous step
(ANSI/ASHRAE. 2015). With the adjusted averaged temperatures the air speed of still air and
5–80
the remaining parameters the Predicted Mean Vote for elevated air speeds (PMVeas) is
calculated.
To be useful for the evaluation and design of climate concepts the method is implemented to
simulate an occupant-controlled fan. The user can specify up to 4 air speed levels and the code
automatically selects the lowest airspeed level required to achieve a PMVeas of ±0.5 which is
equivalent to a satisfaction of 90 % of the occupants with the environmental conditions. Note:
The 1st air speed level is defined within the comfort type whereas the additional 3 are defined
under properties (see Chapter 5.2.3.2 )

5.2.6.6. Definition of Gain Types

Internal gains (including persons, electrical devices, etc.) can be defined by GAINS. To add a
gain type, right click on the gain icon. Here, you can either define a new gain type or in Trnsys
18 import an existing one from a gain library.
Before creating a new gain type, check the gain library by selecting “add gain from library”. The
gain library dialog box opens as shown in Figure 5.2.6-7.

Figure 5.2.6-7: Adding a gain from a library

Here, the user can select gain types from two different libraries: a program library and a user
library. In both cases, the path and file name can be changed to load gains. To add a gain,
double-click on it in the library field and it will appear in the “selected types” field. After closing
the gain library dialog box, the selected types will now appear in the list of gain types.
To add a new gain type, right-click on the icon and select “add gain”. A dialog box for the new
gain type opens.

5–81
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.6-8: Adding a new gain

Besides entering a new unique name, select the gain category. The category “thermal bridge”
is treated different from the others and is described later. Next, the gain type can be defined as
an absolute gain or a specific gain related to the referece floor area of an airnode. (Note: Within
the airnode gain definitions a fraction of the reference floor area of that airnode can be assigned
(see section 0). Then the radiative and convective power can be entered by clicking the DEF
button. In general, a gain is defined as positive value and a loss is defined as negative. Optional
an electric power fraction related to the radiative and convective power can be specified.
For Trnsys 18 it is recommended to define in the gain type dialog the maximum reference area
related power. The control of the gain (on/off and reducing the maximum value) for a specific
arinode is done in the airnode regime definition where two scaling factors are available.

Themal bridge effect

For taking into account a thermal bridge effect of the envelope the category “thermal bridge”
can be selected. Next, the thermal bridge effect can be defined as an absolute gain/loss or a
specific gain/loss related to the envelope area of an airnode (The envelope area consists of
external and boundary surfaces). Then the radiative and convective loss coefficients can be
specified by clicking the DEF button. For thermal bridge calculation the loss coefficients have to
be entered as positive values. The direction of the resulting heat flux (gain or loss) depends on
the actual temperature difference (Toutside – Tinside).

5–82
5.2.6.7. Definition of Daylight depending Control Types
In Trnsys 18 daylight control types can be implemented into a project. A control signal
depending on the daylight level within an airnode can be defined by DAYLIGHT CONTROL.
The resulting light gain is determined by this conrol signal fp and the maximum light gain as
shown below:
𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑔𝑎𝑖𝑛 = 𝑓𝑝 ∗ 𝑚𝑎𝑥. 𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑔𝑎𝑖𝑛
The option of adding a control type from a control type library will be available soon. For now,
to add a new daylight control type, right-click on the control type icon and select “add daylight
control”. A dialog box for defining the new daylight control type opens.

Figure 5.2.6-9: Adding a new gain type

First, enter a unique name for the new daylight control type in the input box on the top.
The dialog box is sectioned in three parts: lighting control type, illuminance set points and
daylight illuminance on the sensor.
First, the artificial light control type must be selected. There are four options for this.

The first option “always on” does not turn off or dim the artificial lighting. Here the daylight is not
considered and the control type for artificial lights is always on. The second option is “on/off",
which uses a hysteresis loop shown in Figure 5.2.6-10 and Figure 5.2.6-12 to turn the control
on or off. Two illuminance setpoints must be defined for this option. One setpoint describing
when the control turns off/ articial lights should turn off (top) and one when the control turns on
again / artificial lights should turn on again (bottom). In the example below the setpoint values
500lux and 300lux were used.
Off (green):
𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 > 𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑠𝑒𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡 → fp = 0
On (red):
𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑑𝑎𝑦𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 ≤ 𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒2𝑛𝑑 𝑠𝑒𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡 → fp = 1

5–83
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.6-10: Artificial lighting control type – on/off

The third option “continuous” is a control type that dims the artificial lights to a minimum but
does not completely switch them off. The artificial lights start dimming when the daylight
illuminance of the zone reaches the illuminance setpoint. The control then dims the artificial
lights depending on the daylight. To define the minimum to which the artificial lights are dimmed,
two values (the minimum input power fraction and the minimum light output fraction) must be
specified. Figure 5.2.6-11 shows how this artificial lighting control type works.

𝑓𝑝,𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑓𝐿 < 𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛

𝑓𝑝 = { 𝑓𝐿 +(1−𝑓𝐿)𝑓𝑃,𝑚𝑖𝑛 −𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤ 𝑓𝐿 ≤ 1
1−𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛

Figure 5.2.6-11: Artificial lighting control type – continuous

5–84
The last option is “continuous on/off”. This control type is a combination of the second and third
option. Here two setpoints must be defined under illuminance setpoint. The first setpoint
describes when the control starts dimming the lights. The control then dims the artificial lights
depending on the daylight. The minimum input power and minimum output fraction must be
defined, once they are reached, the artificial lights turn off. They are turned on again when the
daylight illuminance in the zone equals or surpasses the second setpoint.
Off :
𝑓𝐿 < 𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛 → fp = 0
On:
𝑓𝐿 +(1−𝑓𝐿 )𝑓𝑃,𝑚𝑖𝑛 −𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑓𝐿 ≥ 𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑢𝑛𝑑 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑜𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛𝑎𝑙 = 1 → fp =
1−𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛

HINT: The parameters for the control have to be set with care. There is no on/off control when
𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒2𝑛𝑑 𝑠𝑒𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡 ≤ 𝑓𝐿,𝑚𝑖𝑛 ∗ 𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑠𝑒𝑡 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡 . In cases when fL,min is chosen to have a
high value the daylight control is not able to turn on the artificial light again.

Figure 5.2.6-12: Artificial lighting control type – continuous on/off

The second section of the daylight depending control type dialog is called illuminance setpoint.
In this area, the user can define the illuminance at which the artificial lighting is turned off or
when the artificial lights start dimming. The illuminance setpoint section changes depending on
the type of lighting control selected.

In the daylight illuminance area, the input of the daylight illuminance is specified. There are three
options for this. If option 1 “daylight factor” is chosen, Trnsys multiplies the entered daylight
factor with the total horizontal illuminance to calculate the daylight illuminance in the zone
(𝐼𝑙𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 𝐷𝐹 𝑥 〖𝐼𝑙𝑙)𝑡𝑜𝑡,ℎ𝑜𝑟 . )

Figure 5.2.6-13: Daylight illuminance input option 1 – daylight factor

5–85
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

The second option is “userdefined value”. Here, the entered value is assumed to be the daylight
illuminance in the zone. This option is useful when using pre-calculated data from a file
generated in a co-simulation by Type 332 (Daysim). For options 1 and 2, the daylight illuminance
can be specified by entering a constant value, an input or a schedule.

Figure 5.2.6-14: Daylight illuminance input option 2 – userdefined value

Option 3 “daylight sensor position” uses the Daysim model integrated in Type 56. For this option,
a maximum of four daylight sensor positions can be selected. During the simulation, the mean
daylight illuminance of the sensor positions is calculated and used for the control type.
To be able to select the sensor positions, they must first be defined in geometry information
dialog. To open this dialog box, go to the TrnBuild navigator and double-click “Geo- Info” (for
more information see section 5.2.8).

Figure 5.2.6-15: Daylight illuminance input option 2 – daylight sensor position

If this option is selected, an integrated daylight simulation is required. The following shows the
basic steps for a daylight simulation:

• Define radiance materials for window types (see section 5.2.4.6)

• Define daylight mode of thermal zone (see section 5.2.7.13)
• Define daylight sensor point positions (see section 5.2.8)
• Select daylight related outputs (see section 5.2.3.4)
• Generate radiance files (see 5.2.9.5)
• Run Simulation

Further information on the DaySIM integration is found in section 5.5.3 .

5–86
5.2.7. Zone - Airnode
Note: If you imported a Trnsys3d file zones and geometry will already be in the project. The
geometry mode is automatically set to 3D-data. In this mode the data can not be modified. For
more information on the geometry modes see Chapter 5.2.7.11.
To add a new zone, right-click on the zone icon in the TRNBuild navigator. Now enter a zone
and airnode name. More airnodes can be added to the zone later. The zone dialog box opens
containing all the information describing the thermal zone of the building as shown in Figure
5.2.7-1.
By right-clicking on the respective zone in the TRNBuild navigator, the zone menu opens where
you can select to view the zone information, delete or rename the zone or close the zoneview.
To open the zone dialog box, click on the respective zone name within the TRNBuild navigator.

Figure 5.2.7-1: The zone dialog box

Airnodes
In general, a zone consists of one airnode. The simulation of multi-airnode zones is an
advanced modelling feature. Large volumes like atria are often modelled by a stack of
airnodes within one zone. Thereby the top airnode may have a higher temperature as the
bottom airnode. The solar radiation entering a zone is distributed to all surfaces of all airnodes
of that zone such that the radiation transmitted by the roof glazing of the top airnode may
strike the floor surface of the bottom airnode. In addition, all surfaces of all airnodes of a zone
are in longwave radiation exchange if the radiation mode longwave detailed is used (see
section 5.2.7.12).
In the zone dialog box, airnodes can be added, deleted or moved to another zone by using the
three green buttons on the upper left.

5–87
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.7-2: Moving an active airnode to another zone

To edit an airnode select it in the pull-down menu. The data describing an airnode can be
divided into four main parts:
a) the required REGIME DATA,
b) the opaque surfaces of the airnode,
c) the WINDOWs of the airnode and
d) optional REGIME data equipment data and operating specifications including
INFILTRATION, VENTILATION, COOLING, HEATING, GAINS, COMFORT and
COUPLING.
In addition, geometry, radiation and daylight modes are defined for zones (not airnodes!)
When entering data for a new airnode, it is recommended to proceed in the order shown
above.

5.2.7.1. Required Regime Data

The following data is entered in the regime data section for each airnode:
• volume volume of the air within the airnode
• capacitance total thermal capacitance of airnode air plus that of any mass not
considered as walls (e.g. furniture,...)
• ref. floor area reference floor area of the airnode (used by REGIME data defition)
In order to simplify the input, default values for all parameters except the volume are provided.
The capacitance will be automatically set to a default value of 1.2*volume. However, it is
recommended to check the default values carefully and to adjust them if necessary.

• Initial values values that are assumed at the beginning of the simulation
If needed, you can change the initial temperature and relative humidity of the airnode
air
by clicking on the “initial values” icon.

5–88
 Figure 5.2.7-3: Initial values dialog box

• Humidity model a simple (capacitance) or detailed (buffer storage) model

Figure 5.2.7-4: The detailed humidity model dialog box

In order to model the buffer effect of humidity within a zone, two humidity models are available.
The simple humidity model represents an effective capacitance model in which only the humidity
capacitance ratio must be specified. The humidity capacitance ratio entered accounts for
humidity capacitance of the air plus any other mass within the zone.
The more detailed model describes a different humidity buffer divided into a surface and a deep
storage portion. Each buffer is defined by three parameters as shown in Figure 5.2.7-4. The
exchange coefficient of the surface buffer storage describes the humidity exchange between
the zone air and the surface buffer. The exchange coefficient of the deep buffer surface
describes the humidity exchange of the surface and the deep buffer storage. See the main
Trnsys Reference Manual for a detailed description of this model.

5–89
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.7.2. Opaque Surfaces

The information about surfaces within a zone is displayed in the left lower part of the airnode
window. Here, the user can add, delete or edit the surfaces of an airnode. A box in the upper
part provides an overview of all defined surfaces. By clicking on a wall within this overview box,
the definition of the selected wall is displayed below and can be edited. To delete a defined wall,
select the desired wall in the overview box and click on the delete button.

Figure 5.2.7-5: Adding a new wall

To add a new wall, click on the ADD button below the overview box and a new undefined wall
is added as shown in Figure 5.2.7-5.
• SURFACE ID NUMBER
The surface number is a unique number used for surface identification. The number is
generated by TRNBuild automatically and can’t be changed.
• SURFACE Type
The surface type describes whether this surface represents a wall, floor, ceiling or roof in the
airnode.
Now it is necessary to define this new surface:
• CONSTRUCTION Type
The surface type can be specified by using the pull-down menu on the right side. This menu
offers the option of defining a new surface type, selecting a surface type out of a library, defining
a surface with a coldbridge effect, or selecting a previously defined surface type. The first two
options are explained in Chapter 0 and 0 in detail. The name of the selected surface type
appears in the display box.

5–90
• AREA
The entered area of the surface should include the area of all windows within the wall. For
internal walls, the area should be doubled, because the front as well as the back face of the
surface is exposed to the zone.
• CATEGORY
The surface category is set to EXTERNAL by default. To change the surface category, use the
pull-down menu on the right side. The following surface categories are available:
EXTERNAL an exterior surface
INTERNAL a surface within an airnode
ADJACENT a surface that borders another airnode
BOUNDARY a surface with boundary conditions
The display of the other required input data adjusts automatically based on the surface category.
• GEOSURF
Explicit distribution factors can be defined by the user for the distribution of direct solar radiation
entering a zone (not airnode!). The value of GEOSURF represents the fraction of the total
entering direct solar radiation that strikes the surface. The sum of all values of GEOSURF is not
allowed to exceed 1 within a zone. The movement of the sun patches within a zone can be
modeled by defining a SCHEDULE or an INPUT. The default value of GEOSURF is 0. If the
sum of values within a zone is zero, the direct radiation is distributed the same way as the diffuse
radiation (by absorptance weighted area ratios). Note: A detailed radiation mode for distributing
beam radiation through external windows depending on the geometry and current sun position
is available (for further information see 5.2.7.12 radiation modes.)
• SURFACE GAIN
With surface gain an energy flux to the inside and/or outside of the surface can be defined
• ORIENTATION (for external surface only)
The orientation of the surface needs to be selected from a list. For adding a new orientation see
section 5.2.3.1. For models with 3D data the orientation is already defined by the import and
should not be changed.
• VIEW FACTOR TO SKY (for external surface only)
For the “view factor to the sky” (fraction of the sky to the celestrial hemisphere seen by the wall)
a value ≤ 1 must be entered (i.e. 1 for a horizontal surface, 0.5 for a vertical surface with
unobstructed view). The value is used as a weighting factor between “ground” and sky
temperature for the longwave radiation exchange.
• BOUNDARY TEMPERATURE (for boundary surface only)
For simplification the defined boundary temperature is often given as combined temperature of
air temperature and mean radiant temperature. Therefore, the heat transfer coefficient defined
for the back side of the surface has to be a combined heat transfer coefficient instead of a pure
convective one. If the heat transfer by radiation should be treated separate from the convection,
the radiative heat flux has to be defined as a “surface gain outside”
• EXTERNAL SHADING FACTOR (for external surface only)

5.2.7.3. Windows
Windows can be defined for external and adjacent opaque surfaces or as additional window
without a related base surface. If an external or adjacent surface is highlighted in the overview
box of “walls,floors,ceilings,roofs” the right part of the AIRNODE window allows the user to edit,
delete or add windows for that particular surface.

5–91
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

By clicking on a window within the overview box, the definition of the selected window is
displayed below and can be edited. To delete a defined window, select the desired window in
the overview box and click on the DELETE button.

Figure 5.2.7-6: Adding a new window

To add a new window, click on the ADD button below the overview box and a new undefined
window is added as shown in Figure 5.2.7-6.
• SURFACE ID NUMBER
The surface number is a unique number used for surface identification. The number is
generated by TRNBuild automatically and can’t be changed.
• SURFACE Type
The surface type is set automatically to window.
• CONSTRUCTION Type
The window type can be specified by using the pull-down menu on the right side. This menu
offers the options of defining a new window type, selecting a window type out of a library or
selecting a previously defined window type. The first two options are explained later in detail.
The name of the selected window type appears in the display box. Also, TRNBuild displays the
U-value (describing window losses) and the g-value (solar heat gain coefficient or SHGC) of the
selected window for user information (if available).
• AREA
When the *.BUI file is written, the entered area of the window will be subtracted automatically
from the wall area.
• CATEGORY

5–92
The category is created automatically by TRNBuild depending on the base surface category
(external or adjacent). The display of further required input data adjusts automatically based on
the window category.
• GEOSURF
Explicit distribution factors can be defined by the user for the distribution of direct solar radiation
entering a zone. The value of GEOSURF represents the fraction of the total entering direct solar
radiation that strikes the surface. The sum of all values of GEOSURF is not allowed to exceed
1 within a zone. The movement of the sun patches within a zone can be modeled by defining a
SCHEDULE or an INPUT. The default value of GEOSURF is 0. If the sum of values within
greater zero but not equal 1 used GEOSURF values will be normalized so that the sum in the
zone is equal 1. If the sum of values within a zone is zero, the direct radiation is distributed the
same way as the diffuse radiation. Note: A detailed radiation mode for distributing beam
radiation through external windows depending on the geometry and current sun position is
available (for further information see 5.2.7.12 radiation modes.)
• GAIN
With gain an energy flux to the inside window surface can be defined
• ORIENTATION
The orientation needs to be defined for adjacent windows and so called “additional windows”
(windows that do not relate to a base surface). For the adjacent windows either the orientation
of the front side or the back side can be used.
• VIEW FACTOR TO SKY (for external window only)
For the “view factor to the sky” (fraction of the sky to the celestrial hemisphere seen by the wall)
a value ≤ 1 must be entered (i.e. 1 for a horizontal surface, 0.5 for a vertical surface with
unobstructed view). The value is used as a weighting factor between “ground” and sky
temperature for the longwave radiation exchange.

• SHADING DEVICE
The user has to define a shading factor which represents the opaque area of the shading device
to the whole window area. As the DEF button indicates, the shading factor can be a constant,
an input or a schedule.
For an EXTERNAL window the user can select an internal and/or external shading device.
The shading control can be defined in two ways:
a) integrated radiation depending control according to window type
For this option the shading factor has to be specified for a completely closed shading
device.
The actual control (open or closed) is calculated by the given level of total incident radiation
on
the window plane acc. to the window type. (see section 5.2.4.6 )
b) external control
The defined shading factor has to include the control.
For an adjacent window an internal shading device can be defined at the FRONT side only.The
defined shading factor has to include the control.

5–93
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.7.4. Infiltration
The specification of infiltration is optional and the default setting of the infiltration is off. After
clicking on the INFILTRATION button in the AIRNODE window, a dialog box opens as shown
in Figure 5.2.7-7. The user can switch the infiltration on and define an infiltration type for the
zone by selecting a type previously defined in the TRNBuild navigator. (For creating a new
infiltration type see section 5.2.6.1)

Figure 5.2.7-7: Adding infiltration in an airnode

5.2.7.5. Ventilation
The specification of ventilation is optional and the default setting of the ventilation is off. After
clicking on the VENTILATION button in the AIRNODE window, a dialog box opens as shown in
Figure 5.2.7-8. The user can add/delete ventilation types by selecting a type previously defined
in the TRNBuild navigator. (For creating a new ventilation type see section 5.2.6.2)

Figure 5.2.7-8: Adding ventilation in an airnode

5–94
5.2.7.6. Heating
The specification of a heating control is optional and the default setting of the heating control is
off. After clicking on the HEATING button in the AIRNODE window, a dialog box opens as shown
in Figure 5.2.7-9. The user can switch the heating control on and define a heating type for the
airnode by selecting a type previously defined in the TRNBuild navigator. (For creating a new
heating type see section 5.2.6.3)

Figure 5.2.7-9: Adding heating in an airnode

5.2.7.7. Cooling
The specification of a cooling control is optional and the default setting of the cooling control is
off. To define a cooling control, click on the COOLING button. The user can switch the cooling
control on and define a cooling type for the airnode by selecting a type previously defined in the
TRNBuild navigator. (For creating a new cooling type see section 5.2.6.4)

Figure 5.2.7-10: Adding cooling in an airnode

5–95
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.7.8. Comfort
The specification of comfort is optional and the default setting is “off”. More than one comfort
module can be defined for an airnode.

Figure 5.2.7-11: Adding comfort in an airnode

The user can add a comfort module and define a comfort type for the airnode by selecting a
type previously defined in the TRNBuild navigator from the pull-down menu. (For creating a new
comfort type see section 5.2.6.5 )
In addition to the comfort type, the user has to select the model for determining the mean radiant
temperature, one of the key figures for comfort evaluation.
• Userdefined mode
As indicated by the DEF button, the mean radiant temperature can be defined as a
constant, an input, or a schedule.
• Internal calculation - simple model
The calculation is based on an area weighted mean surface temperature of all
surfaces of a zone (not airnode!)
• Internal calculation - detailed model
The calculation is based on view factor calculation. Therefore, a geometric position
has to be selected. (see section 5.2.8) Note: For this model, the detailed longwave
radiation mode has to be activated! (see section 5.2.7.12)

5–96
5.2.7.9. Gains
The specification of gains is optional. By default there are no gains defined. To change the
default setting, click on the GAINS button in the AIRNODE window and an input window opens.

Figure 5.2.7-12: Adding gains in an airnode

• Gain type
The gain types set for the airnode are shown in the top field. You can delete a gain from the
node by selecting it and then clicking the “-“ button. To add a new gain select the gain type by
chosing it from the pull-down menu under “gain type”. You can also choose “new” to open the
new gain type dialog box and define a new gain type or “library” to open the gain library dialog
box and select a previously defined gain type from a library (See Chapter 5.2.6.6).
• Scale
After selecting a gain type, you can choose up to two different scales for each gain..For example
a weekly schedule for occupation can be defined as scale1 and annual schedule containing a
reduction to 50% in vacation time can defined as scale2. The resulting schedule is the product
of both scales. If you have one scaling factor only the second scaling factor should be 1.
If the chosen gain type refers to the reference floor area, select “yes” under multiplication by
reference floor area. If e.g. the gain should refer to 30 % of the floor reference area only the
“fraction of airnode reference floor area” has to be set to 0.3.
• Daylight depending control
For gains due to atrifical lighting (gain catergory = lights), it may make sense to add a daylight
depending control. This prevents unnecessary internal gains due to artificial lighting when
natural daylight light is sufficient. If the daylight depening control is switched on a previously
defined daylight control type can be selected for control (see section 5.2.6.7).

5.2.7.10. Coupling between airnodes

The regime coupling enables to define a coupling between airnodes although the airnodes do
not have an adjacent surface. For each airnode up to six coupling airflows from “adjacent”
airnodes can be defined here. First, the coupling has to be activated, than the airnode from
5–97
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

which the air flow is coming has to be selected. Finally, the coupling airflow has to be defined
as a constant, schedule or input.
(Note: In Trnsys 17 this option was limited to airnodes within one zone and two coupling
airnodes.)

Figure 5.2.7-13: Coupling airnodes dialog box

5.2.7.11. Zone Geometry Modes

TRNBuild supports different levels of geometric surface information for each zone:
• Manual
The surfaces are defined within TRNBuild by their area. No three dimensional data is
defined. No detailed radiation modes are available for this geometry mode.
• Mixed
For some surfaces three dimensional data is available due to importing an Trnsys3d
file. The geometric information of these surfaces can’t be modified nor can surfaces be
deleted. However, the user may add new surfaces within TRNBuild. For this geometry
mode only detailed external shading can be applied.
• 3D data
For all surfaces of the zone three dimensional data is provided due to importing an
IDF file. The geometric information of these surfaces can’t be modified nor can
surfaces be deleted. For this geometry mode, detailed internal and external radiation
modes can be selected.
The geometry mode can only be changed to one with less information.
Note: If the geometry mode is set to MAUNAL all three dimensional data is deleted!!!

5–98
 Figure 5.2.7-14: Geometry mode dialog

5.2.7.12. Zone Radiation Modes

A so-called solar to air factor which is used in several standards is integrated in TRNBuild. The
solar to air factor (FSOLAIR) is the fraction of solar heat entering an airnode through the glazing
which is immediately transferred as a convective gain to the internal air. This fraction depends
on the quantity of internal items with very low thermal capacity such as furniture etc.. Note: The
solar to air factor is equal for all air nodes of a thermal zone!
Different radiation modes for direct and diffuse shortwave radiation and longwave radiation
distribution are available within a thermal zone (not airnode!). Besides the standard models
detailed modes can be selected if the geometry mode is set to “3D data”. Simulations show that
for zones with an ordinary facade of punched windows, the increased level of detail has a low
impact on the results but increases input effort and computing time. Therefore, it is
recommended to select detail modes only if necessary.
Beam radiation distribution:
• standard mode
Userdefined distribution factors for surfaces so called GEOSURF values are applied.
The value of GEOSURF represents the fraction of the total entering direct solar
radiation that strikes the surface. The sum of all values of GEOSURF is not allowed to
exceed 1 within a zone. The default value of GEOSURF is 0. If the sum of values
within greater zero but not equal 1 used GEOSURF values will be normalized so that
the sum in the zone (not airnode!) is equal 1. If the sum of values within a zone is
zero, the direct radiation is distributed the same way as the diffuse radiation. For most
cases this model provides adequate accuracy.
• detailed mode
For external windows, shading and insolation matrices are used to distribute the
primary solar direct radiation entering the zone. These matrices are based on the
three dimensional data of the building and shader surfaces. An auxiliary program
called TRNSHD is called by TRNBuild for generating these files. For beam radiation
entering a zone by adjacent windows the standard mode with GEOSURF is applied.
This mode is recommended for simulating highly glazed zones (double façade,
atrium) where the correct distribution of direct solar radiation is important. Note. If
shading devices are activated the distribution becames less important. For ordinary
zones with furniture the increase of accuracy by using this mode has a low impact on
the results.
Diffuse radiation distribution:

5–99
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

• Diffuse radiation distribution – standard mode

The standard mode is based on aborption-transmission weighted area ratios for all
surfaces of a zone. For most cases this model provides adequate accuracy.
• Diffuse radiation distribution – detailed mode
For a detailed treatment of shortwave diffuse radiation including multi-reflection, the
new radiation model applies so-called Gebhart factors. The key factor of this method
is the view factor matrix. For generating the matrix TRNBuild calls an auxiliary
program called TRNVFM.
This mode is recommended for simulating highly glazed zones without a shading
device where diffuse radiation plays an important role (north facing double façade or
atrium). For ordinary zones with punched windows and shading devices the increase
of accuracy by using this mode has a low impact on the results.
Longwave radiation exchange:
• Longwave radiation exchange of surfaces within a zone – standard mode
The standard mode is based the starnode approach. No user defined emissivities of
inside surfaces nor radiation exchange over more than one airnode can be taken into
account. For most cases this model provides adequate accuracy.
• Longwave radiation exchange of surfaces within a zone – detailed mode
For a detailed treatment of Longwave radiation exchange including multi-reflection,
the new radiation model applies so-called Gebhart factors. The key factor of this
method is the view factor matrix. For generating the matrix TRNBuild calls an auxiliary
program called TRNVFM.
This mode is recommend for modeling the effect of low –e materials or detailed
comfort analysis where the comfort depends on the location within the zone. For
ordinary zones the increase of accuracy by using this mode has a low impact on the
results. This mode increases the calculation time by a factor of 2 – 3!!

Figure 5.2.7-15: Radiation mode dialog

Note: For all detailed radiation modes the zone (not airnode!) has to be a convex and closed
volume for generating the insolation matrix and the view factor matrix!!.
Convex means that every surface in the zone should be in the line of sight with all other surfaces
of the zone (obstructed views). The terms convex and concave are illustrated in Figure 5.2.7-16
for a 2D sets. For the convex set which looks somewhat like a deformed circle the (black) line
segment joining points x and y lies completely within the (green) set. Since this is true for any
points x and y within the set, the set is convex. Since the red part of the (black and red) line-
segment joining the points x and y lies outside of the (green) set, the set is non-convex

5–100
 convex set concave set
Figure 5.2.7-16: Convex and concave sets

5.2.7.13. Zone Daylight Modes

For calculating the illuminance on defined daylight sensor points within a zone (not airnode!)
two configuration sets are generated by the integrated tool “Generate radiance files” (see
section 5.2.9.5):
• Unshaded
The properties of the radiance material defined in the window type (see section
5.2.4.6 ) for “unshaded” are used.
• Shaded
The properties of the radiance material defined in the window type (see section
5.2.4.6 ) for “shaded” are used.
The user can now select between two different control modes for switching configurations:
• Basic control
The shaded configuration is used if all external windows of a zone with a defined
external and/or internal shading device have a current shading factor > 0.01.
(Note: For zones with adjacent windows only the basic control doesn’t work (zone is
always unshaded). In this case user-defined control should be defined.
• Userdefined control
The user can use his own control strategy for switching configurations. The unshaded
configuration is used when the control signal is 0. The shaded configuration is used,
when the control signal is 1. For more configurations (e.g. only one of two windows is
shaded) further control signals must be defined (2, 3, …). This option requires manual
file generation in addition to the integrated one for each of these userdefined
configurations (see section 5.2.9.5).
It is recommended to use the output DLSHADE (Daylight shading control signal) for checking
the control signal.

5–101
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.7-17: Daylight mode dialog

5–102
5.2.8. Geometry Information
Three dimensional geometry data can be imported into TRNBuild. To open the Geo info dialog
box, double-click the geo-info icon in the TRNBuild navigator. The geometry data is divided into
three groups:
• Building geometry (display only.)
• External shading geometry (display)
• GeoPosition Geometry
This data is used to define the position for comfort calculation or radiative gains as
well as daylight sensor points. To add a geoposition click the “+” button. Then select
the zone name and enter the coordinates. Unfortunately, this data can’t be imported
and has to be entered by hand. Keep in mind, that the viewing direction of a sensor
point is automatically defined to be upwards (direction vector: 0,0,1).

Figure 5.2.8-1: Geometry information dialog box

In addition the geometry is displayed in the AddOn trnViewBUI (if installed.) Further Information
on the AddOn trnViewBUI is found in a seprated Manual
(TRNSYS18\documentation\ A4_trnViewBUI.pdf).

Figure 5.2.8-2: Geometry displayed by trnViewBUI

5–103
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.9. Generating Files for Type 56

All information imported and defined in TRNBuild is saved into one file: the so-called BUI file or
B18 in order to distinguish it from previous versions. The BUI file is used to generate several
other files depending on the selected modes.

5.2.9.1. Saving the TRNBuild File

The following three Type 56 standard files are generated automatically every time the BUI file
is saved:
• a file containing all information about the building excluding the wall construction (*.BLD)
and
• another file that contains the transfer functions for the walls (*.TRN).
• In addition, an information file (*.INF) is generated as log file which needs to be checked for
error messages. The information file contains the processed BUI file followed by the values
of wall transfer function coefficients, the overall heat transfer conductance U and the related
U-value. This information may be useful for the user in verifying the wall description data.
Next, the list of inputs required for the Type 56 is printed. These will most commonly be
outputs of other components in the Trnsys simulation. Also, the information file (*.INF)
provides a list of outputs of Type 56 as selected by the user. These outputs may be inputs
to other components. Finally, a brief table of used contruction types, the totel surface area
and their U-values as well as the embodied energery metric PERT and PENRT are printed
to the information file.
The *.BLD and *.TRN files are used by Type 56 during the simulation process. The generated
files get the name as the opened *.BUI file and are located in the same directory. If an error
occurs, no files are generated. A dialog box displays detailed information on the error.

5.2.9.2. Maximum heat load calculation

The option „Max. heat load calculation“ in the Tools pull-down menu offers a fast and convenient
way to calculate the maximum heating load of each zone with certain standard conditions at the
respectve location. Due to its static nature, the results can be checked easily by a hand
calculation. Therefore, TRNBuild generates a special BUI file, a corresponding Trnsys input file
including the ambient conditions and starts the simulation by a mouse click.
The calculated heating load is a static one using NType 27 and 4 of Type 56 so that the user
can check the numbers entered in TRNBuild by a hand calculation. The following values of the
outer surface resistance are used for the U-value calculation of walls:
HBACK > 30 kJ / (h m² K) => 1/ = 0.04 m² K / W
30 ≥ HBACK >0.005 => 1/ = 0.13 m² K / W
0.005 ≥ HBACK => 1/ = 0 m² K / W
The inner surface resistance is set to 0.13 m² K / W. The U-value of the windows is calculated
by the window model of Type 56.

5–104
 Figure 5.2.9-1: Settings for maximum heat load calculation
To determine the maximum heat load the user is asked to define some design conditions like
the ambient temperature, the room set temperature, temperature for BOUNDARY WALLS and
an AIRCHANGE rate (see Figure 5.2.9-1). In addition, some display parameters like the unit of
the heating load and an expected maximum value need to be specified. The option “Generate
Type 56 files” should be turned on in order to assure that the correct BLD and TRN files are
used during the following simulation.
After clicking on the START button, a special BUI file called *maxheatload.BUI is generated by
TRNBuild. This file is similar to the current opened BUI-file, but all internal gains are ignored.
Additionally, VENTILATION and COOLING is turned off for all zones. All SCHEDULES and
INPUTS for HEATING and INFILTRATION are transformed into the fixed values entered in the
settings dialog box. However, the user should to be aware when no INFILTRATION or
HEATING is defined within the zone, TRNBuild does not add this automatically! The boundary
temperature of all BOUNDARY WALLs is set to the entered value, except for walls with a
boundary temperature equals IDENTICAL.
For ambient conditions, TRNBuild assumes no solar radiation and a constant value for the
ambient temperature as specified in the settings dialog box. After the creation of the
*maxheatload.BUI file and a corresponding Trnsys input file, TRNBuild generates the Type 56
files (if the option is selected). If the Trnsys 56 files are generated successfully the user has the
option to run the Trnsys simulation by clicking on the button “RUN Trnsys” as shown in Figure
5.2.9-2. However, make sure that the correct path is defined for Trnsys.EXE under the menu
OPTIONS \ SETTINGS. In the Trnsys simulation, the resulting maximum heating power for each
zone as well as the total heating power of all zones are determined. The simulation results are
not only printed into a printer file (*maxheatload.PRN), but also shown on the ONLINE display.
For the ONLINE display, the maximum number of zone is restricted to 19.

Figure 5.2.9-2: Starting the Trnsys simulation

5–105
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.9.3. Generate Shading / Insolation matrix

To take 3D external shading of external windows into account or use the detailed mode for
beam radiation distribution, shading and insolation matrices have to be generated. 3D data of
surfaces is required and a zone has to be convex for generating insolation matrices (see
section 5.2.8).
To generate the shading / insolation matrices select the menu “Tools\ Generate
Shading/Insolation matrix”. When doing so TRNBuild calls an auxilliary tool based on TRNSHD.
TRNSHD subdivides the celestial hemisphere into patches based on the so-called tregenza
model. Under properties in the project branch, the resolution of the sky division can be set to
medium (577 patches) or high (2305 patches). For most cases, the medium resolution is
sufficient.
• SHading Matrix file called *.SHM
For each center point of a patch the sunlit fraction of external windows with three
dimensional data is calculated and saved into the shading matrix file. In addition, a
diffuse radiation sunlit factor is calculated assuming an isotropic sky and written to the
file. If no external window is shaded no *.SHM is generated.
• InSolation Matrix of a zone *_xxx.ISM
In addition to sunlit fractions of external windows, TRNSHD calculates the beam sunlit
fractions of the window that strike each inside surface of the zone. These distribution
factors for all patches are calculated only for zones with detailed beam radiation
mode. For each zone a separate file is created.
The generated files are named the same as the current *.BUI file and are located in the same
directory. If an error occurs, no files are generated. Additional information can be found in the
log file *_shd.log.

Figure 5.2.9-3: Generating a shading/insolation matrix

5–106
5.2.9.4. Generate view factor matrix
When using the detailed mode for longwave radiation a view factor matrix has to be
generated. 3D data of surfaces is required and a zone has to be convex for generating
insolation matrices (see section 5.2.8).
To generate a view factor matrix, select the menu “Tools\Generate view factor matrix”. By doing
so TRNBuild calls an auxiliary tool called TRNVFM. For each zone with a detailed diffuse or
longwave radiation mode the surface viewfactor matrix is calculated and written into the so-
called View Factor Matrix file *.VFM. In addition, the view factor vector for comfort and radiative
gain positions are determined and saved to the same file.
The generated files get the same name as the current *.BUI file and are located in the same
directory. If an error occurs, no files are generated. Additional information can be find in the
log file *_vfm.log.

Figure 5.2.9-4: Generating a view factor matrix

5–107
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.9.5. Generate Radiance Files

When using the integrated daylight simulation feature, daylight coefficients for every sensor
point have to be generated according to the DAYSIM approach [daysim.ning.com]. These
coefficients are obtained by raytracing methods (see 5.5.3) with RADIANCE [www.radiance-
online.org ].

Figure 5.2.9-5: Generating radiance files

There are 3 options available in the generator. In all options two sets of daylight models are
generated. One representing the unshaded state (shd0) where all moveable shading devices
are up and the shaded state (shd1) where all shading devices are down.
1. Generate radiance input files (*rad) only:
This option is used to produce only radiance files for using them in other applications
or for modifying them manually. The radiance files consist of the zone geometry and
all relevant shading geometry including self shading by surfaces of other zones.

2. “classic” format of daylight coefficients for DAYSIM:

Radiance files are generated (see option 1). DAYSIM Routine “gendc” is called to
generate daylight coefficients according to the classic DAYSIM approach. The data is
saved in two files per zone (unshaded and shaded) in the subdirectory /daylight/ of the
simulation folder.

3. “dds” format of daylight coefficients for DAYSIM:

Radiance files are generated (see option 1). DAYSIM Routine “gendc” is called to
generate daylight coefficients according to the dds approach. The data is saved in two
files per zone in the subdirectory /daylight/ of the simulation folder.

5–108
The necessary information that needs to be provided is:
• Location (Latitude, Longitude, standard meridian, site elevation) of the weather station

• Scene rotation angle, if the building should be modeled in orientation other than the
original orientation as drawn with Trnsys3d, enter the angle of rotation. Please make sure
you use the same rotation as used in the manipulation of the azimuth angle (see 5.3.2
Input AAZM)

• The ground may have a significant influence to the daylight results. The ground is
modeled as a ‘ground glow’ generated with the ground reflectance. For being mor
accurate the user may draw the ground surface as shaders in Trnsys3d and assign the
IDs here. The ground reflectance is applied to these shading surfaces. The ground
surface must be defined large enough to shield the ground glow and reflect enough
radiation (a common rule is an extension of 5x building height).

• Reflectivity of shading surfaces. Shading surfaces drawn in Trnsys3d doesn’t contain the
property reflectance. The user may assign a reflectance value for all shading surfaces
here.

• Raytracing simulation and their results are highly depending on the simulation
parameters. The most important parameters appear in the TRNBuild interface:

• ambient bounces (ab): This is the maximum number of diffuse bounces computed
by the indirect calculation. A value of zero implies no indirect calculation. An ab-
value of 5 is already sufficient for a standard room without any complicated facade
elements. This parameter significantly increases the required calculation time and
should be set with care. It has to be even higher if interior rooms of facades
including venetian blinds are considered, as rays may be reflected several times
they find their way out of the building.

• ambient divisions (ad): Ambient divisions sets the number of initial sampling rays
sent from each ambient point into the hemisphere to determine the indirect
incident light. This parameter needs to be high if the luminance distribution in a
scene with a high brightness variation. The error in the Monte Carlo calculation of
indirect illuminance will be inversely proportional to the square root of this number.

• ambient super-samples (as): The number of extra rays that will be used to sample
areas in the divided hemisphere that appear to have high variance. Ambient super
sampling should usually be set to about one half or one quarter of the Ambient
divisions parameter. Super-samples are applied only to the ambient divisions
which show a significant change.

• ambient resolution (ar): This number will determine the maximum density of
ambient values used in interpolation. Error will start to increase on surfaces
spaced closer than the scene size divided by the ambient resolution. The ambient
resolution and ambient accuracy (see below) combined with scene size, gives the
minimum geometry features that are resolved accurately:

simulation resolution = (max scene size x ambient accuracy) / ambient resolution

• ambient accuracy (aa: This value will approximately equal the error from indirect
illuminance interpolation. A value of zero implies no interpolation.

The default settings are related to the recommendation for DaySIM. Depending on the
complexity and size of the model the file generation may take some minutes up to hours. For
checking of the work flow it might be useful to reduce the generation time by using less accurate
settings.

5–109
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

ambient ambient ambient ambient ambient

bounces divisions samples resolution accuracy
Fast
(for checking
3 32 32 300 0.2
only)
Default 5 1000 20 300 0.1

It is highly recommended to study the daylight fundamentals for selecting appropriate

parameters matching the project. Additional radiance parameters are stored in the building
description file. If needed they can be modified there.
Resulting files
The generated data files are all stored in the subdirectory \daylight relative to the building
description file BUI. The following table provides an overview of the file extensions.

File extension Description

*.hea DaySIM header file;

contains all required information (location, Radiance
parameters, etc.)

*.pts Sensor geometry files

*.rad Geometry files

*.dc Daylight coefficients used by Type56

*.cfg Configuration file used by Type 56;

contains all required information for evaluating the dc-files
(location, classic oder dds)

*.log Log file of the generation process

(Note: The comment “no light source found” in the log-file does
not indicate a mistake)

In general, two sets of daylight models are generated automatically for each zone. One
representing the unshaded state (shd0) where all operable shading devices are up and the
shaded state (shd1) where all operable shading devices are down. The following file naming
convention is used:
yyy_shdx_name.*
yyy - zone number
shdx - shd0…unshaded, shd1 shading state1
name - zone name
If more than the two automatically generated states (shd0 and shd1) are needed the
experienced user has the option to generate userdefined configurations manually. (Note: the
user has to ensure the consistency of the manual modification!!)
For the manual generation the file naming convention has to be fulfilled. The “x” is replaced by
the chosen configuration number. According to the two automatically generated files the rad-
files and the hea-files for the additional userdefined configurations must be supplied manually.
In the hea-file the project name has to be adjusted. The necessary adjustments in the rad-file
are for the radiance materials and optionally concern the geometry. The missing dc-files for
the userdefined configurations are generated with the help of a batch-job.

5–110
The following shows an example for content of the batch-file.
c:\TRNSYS18\Building\trnRAD\DAYSIM\bin\gen_dc.exe xxx_shdy_zonenname.hea -dif
c:\TRNSYS18\Building\trnRAD\DAYSIM\bin\gen_dc.exe xxx_shdy_zonenname.hea -dir
c:\TRNSYS18\Building\trnRAD\DAYSIM\bin\gen_dc.exe xxx_shdy_zonenname.hea -paste
pause

It is important to know that the manually generated files are deleted from the directory as soon
as the generation tool integrated in TRNBuild is used again. But as long as there are no
changes concerning the geometry and the material definitions of the model or the raytracing
simulation parameters there is no need to newly generate the radiance files.Daylight related
outputs are the calculated outside illuminance (NType 400 – 402) and a standard output file
(NType 435). A standard daylight output file is written for selected zones in the subdirectory
\Daylight\*.ill. It contains the hourly integrated illuminance values for each sensor point. In
addition, the following common daylight metrics are calculated for the whole simulation period:
• Daylight Autonomy (DA), default: < 300 lux
• Continuous Daylight Autonomy (cDA), default: < 300 lux
• Useful Daylight Illuminance (UDI), default: 100 – 2000 lux
• Daylight factor (DF) for CIE overcast sky
The thresholds of the daylight metrics are stored in the building description file and can be
edited if needed. In general, these metrics are relevant during occupation only. Therefore, a
schedule is assigned to the NTpye as additional data. The value of the schedule has to be 0
(off) or 1 (on).

5.2.10. Exporting Trnsys3d file

The geometry of a project containing zones with “geometry mode = 3D data” can’t be modified
within TRNBuild. The changes need to be performed in the Trnsys3d plugin for Trimble
Sketchup. Therefore, the building project file needs to be exported from TRNBuild to Trnsys3d
and imported back artwards (see section 5.2.2.3 ).
*.b18 files can be exported directly into an T3d IDF file by selecting File \Export Trnsys3d file
and entering a new file name (*.idf).
During the export, the following steps are performed:
• update surface constructions
• save non-geometric data into the template part of the IDF file
• save Trnsys additional surface data
(GEOSURF, wall gain, coupling active layer, shading)
• all airnodes are translated into Trnsys3D zones. (Note: after reimporting an exported
file zones the multiple airnodes are recreated automatically).
Note: The option \Export Trnsys3d file is available only for files which were imported in
TRNBuild by Trnsys Version 17.1 or later.

5–111
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.2.10-1: Exporting the TRNBuild building project to a Trnsys3d file

5.2.11. Input Data Limits of TRNBuild

Type 56 uses a dynamic array sizing in order to reduce fixed data limits. However, the following
limits apply:
• maximum number of INPUTS 999
• maximum number of OUTPUTS 999
• maximum number of SURFACES 999

5–112
5.2.12. Building Input Description File created By
TRNBuild
TRNBuild provides data files necessary for using the Trnsys Type 56 Multi-Zone
Building component. TRNBuild stores all entered data in a socalled BUI - file (*.b18 or *.bui).
The BUI – file is an ASCII file written in the socalled “BID language”. Besides using TRNBuild,
the user may also use any text editor for creating the BUI file. However, due to the rigorous
syntax the usage of a text editor is very susceptible to errors. Therefore, it is strongly
recommended to use TRNBuild.
The user defines simple building blocks, called TypeS, which are used to describe the building.
TypeS represent unique descriptions that can be used many times to either define other TypeS
or to construct the building. For instance, a LAYER Type represents a material description of an
individual wall layer. Several LAYER TypeS may be used to define a unique WALL Type, which
in turn may be used in the description of the building. Other necessary TypeS include
WINDOWS, ORIENTATIONS, GAINS, COMFORT, INFILTRATION, VENTILATION, HEATING,
COOLING, and ZONES. Each of these TypeS is characterized by a name that is assigned to it
and its associated data. Many of the variables that define these TypeS may vary with time.
There are two ways to accomplish this. One is to reference pre-defined periodic functions
defined with SCHEDULE TypeS. Secondly, INPUTS (to the Type 56 component) may be
defined which will ultimately be outputs of other Trnsys components in the simulation. An
example application of SCHEDULES would be to define GAINS for people which depend upon
time of the day and week. INPUTS might be used to consider GAINS from heating or cooling
equipment whose performance depends upon the conditions of the zones.
The completed building description file is converted by TRNBuild into files required by Type 56.
The next section gives general information concerning BUI file and its syntax. The user is
advised to read the next section carefully such that he is able to read and understand the BUI
file. Information on the interface TRNBuild is provided by in the previous sections and the online
help.

5.2.12.1. Rules Governing the “BID Language”

The user constructs a file containing the building description, which is read and
processed by the TRNBuild program. Four groups of data are required in the following order:
PROPERTIES, TypeS, BUILDING, and OUTPUT. PROPERTIES represent general property
data concerning the entire building. OUTPUT defines the level of output from both TRNBuild
and the Type 56 component. The complete set of data terminates with an END statement.
Within each data group, there are a limited number of keywords that are recognized by
the program. In some cases, this data must be in a particular sequence, in other cases not. The
group keywords must appear prior to their data. For each data item within a group, a keyword
precedes the actual data. The keyword must be separated from the data by an equal sign (=).
The data may be a constant numerical value, a name defining a new Type, a name referring to
a previously defined Type, or of a special form to reference previously defined SCHEDULES or
INPUTS. In some instances, more than one data item follows a keyword. In this case, the data
should be separated by a space. Numerical data can be in any format (integer, fixed point, or
floating point). Table 5.2.12-1 is used in the next section to identify the appropriate data types
associated with each keyword.

5–113
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-1: Data Types

Data Type Description

1 constant numerical values(s)

2 text string

3 constant numerical values, SCHEDULE, or INPUT

To use previously defined SCHEDULES or INPUTS, the general form is

Keyword = SCHEDULE A*name + B
or
Keyword = INPUT A*name + B
where A and B are optional scaling parameters and name refers to a previously defined
SCHEDULE or INPUT Type. This scaling feature is very useful for defining gains for different
zones that follow the same schedules. See the example in Section 5.6 .
In general, it is necessary to supply all characters of the keywords. Abbreviation may
be used for the keyword ORIENTATION (ORI) and for the keyword COUPLING (COUPL).
Special characters like é, è ö, ü, ä are also allowed. Each item of program data may be
contained on separate lines in the file or on the same line when separated by a colon (:). It is
also possible to continue a data description from one line to another by the use of a semi-colon
(;) at the end of the first line. Another special character combination is *#C . It allows the
introduction of a comment by the user in the data file, when it appears in the first column of a
record. A single asterisk (*) also introduces a comment. However, these comments are deleted
by TRNBuild.
The Type 56 Multi-Zone Component is designed to be used with a modified set of SI
units as given below. Since Trnsys uses hours for its time base, power and energy units are
based on the unit hour instead of seconds. Required units are given in Table 5.2.12-2.

Table 5.2.12-2: Required Units

Quantity SI Unit Unit

time Hour hr

length Meter m

mass Kilogram kg

temperature degree Celsius °C

energy kilojoule kJ

power or energy rate kilojoules/hour kJ/hr

In the following sections, the program input is described for each data group. This
information is presented in tables for easy reference. For each keyword, the data type along
with a description is given. Data types refer to Table 5.2.12-1.

5.2.12.2. Properties
Following the PROPERTIES keyword, several data items must appear as follows.

5–114
 Table 5.2.12-3: PROPERTIES Data

Keyword Data Data Description Default Unit

Type Value

DENSITY 1 density of air 1.204 kg/m³

CAPACITY 1 specific heat of air 1.012 kJ/kg

PRESSURE 1 pressure of air (Pa) 101325 Pa

HVAPOR 1 heat of vaporization of water 2454 kJ/kg

SIGMA 1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant 2.0411 E- kJ/hr-m²-K4

07

RTEMP 1 approx. average surface temperature 293.15 K

(K)

RTEMP is used to linearize the long-wave radiation exchange between surfaces within
a zone. This value can be approximated by the year-long average zone temperature. In most
HVAC applications, 20°C is reasonable. The effects of RTEMP will normally be small and
therefore only a rough approximation is needed.

Each of the above properties requires a value that is independent of time. The units of
this data must be consistent with that of the rest of the data to be entered. Values of these
properties at 20°C are given in Table 5.2.12-3: PROPERTIES DataTable 5.2.12-3 in the units
of Table 5.2.12-2, except for RTEMP and SIGMA which must be based on an absolute
temperature scale.

5–115
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-4: Properties for internal calculation of heat transfer coefficients

Keyword Data Data Description Default Unit

Type Value

KFLOORUP 1 constant for heated floor 7.2 kJ/m²K

EFLOORUP 1 exponent for heated floor 0.31 -

KFLOORDOWN 1 constant for chilled floor 3.888 kJ/m²K

EFLOORDOWN 1 exponent chilled floor 0.31 -

KCEILUP 1 constant for chilled ceiling 7.2 kJ/m²K

ECEILUP 1 exponent for chilled ceiling 0.31 -

KCEILDOWN 1 constant for heated ceiling 3.888 kJ/m²K

ECEILDOWN 1 exponent for heated ceiling 0.31 -

KVERTICAL 1 constant for vertical wall 5.76 kJ/m²K

EVERTICAL 1 exponent for vertical wall 0.30 -

Table 5.2.12-5: Properties for radiance calculation

5–116
Keyword Data Data Description Default Unit
Type Value

SCENE_ROTATI Scene rotation angle (north to east is °

1 0
ON_ANGLE positive)

GROUND_IDS 1 Shader IDs representing the ground - -

GROUND_REFL -
1 Ground reflectance 0.2
ECTANCE

SHADER_REFLE -
1 Shader reflectance 0
CTANCE

Calculation mode (RAD, CLASSIC, -

CALC_MODE 2 RAD
DDS)

LATITUDE 1 Weather station latitude (west positive) 48 °

Weather station longitude (west °

LONGITUDE 1 -9.2
positive)

Weather station time zone meridian °

TIME_ZONE 1 -15
west of greenich (west positive)

SITE_ELEVATIO m
1 Site elevation 200
N

AB 1 Number of ambient bounces 5 -

AD 1 Number of ambient devisions 1000 -

AS 1 Number of ambient super-samples 20 -

AR 1 Ambient resultion 300 -

AA 1 Ambient accuracy 0.1 -

LR 1 Limit reflections to a maximum of N 6 -

ST 1 Specular Threshold 0.15 -

SJ 1 Specular Jitter 1 -

LW 1 Limit Weight 0.004 -

DJ 1 Direct Jitter 0 -

DS 1 Direct Sampling 0.2 -

DR 1 Direct Relays 2 -

DP 1 Direct Pretest Density 512 -

Table 5.2.12-6: Comfort parameters

5–117
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Keyword Data Data Description Default Unit

Type Value

DIAM-SENSOR 1 Sensor diameter 0.07 m

EPS-SENSOR 1 Sensor IR emissivity 0.82 -

Sensor solar reflectance -

REFL-SENSOR 1 0.47
(not currently used)

ELV_AIRSPEED m/s
1 Elevaited air speed 1 0.3
1

ELV_AIRSPEED m/s
1 Elevaited air speed 2 0.7
2

ELV_AIRSPEED m/s
1 Elevaited air speed 3 1.2
3

Table 5.2.12-7: DAYSIM and other parameters

Keyword Data Data Description Default Unit

Type Value

FSCAL_TREGEN Resolution of shading/insolation matrix

2 MEDIUM -
ZA (MEDIUM or HIGH)

Shading matrix mode

SHM_MODE 1 1
1 = generate shading matrix

SURFGRID 1 (not currently used) 0.2

Min. threshold for Useful Daylight

UDIMIN 1 100 lux
Illuminance (UD)I

Max. threshold for Useful Daylight

UDIMAX 1 2000 lux
Illuminance (UD)I

Min. threshold for daylight autnonomy

DAMIN 1 300 lux
(DA, cDA)

5.2.12.3. Types
There are 13 different TypeS that can be defined. Some TypeS are only useful in the BUILDING
description, others may be used in other Type definitions. TypeS must be defined in a fixed
order as shown in Table 5.2.12-8. The Type keyword must precede the definition of TypeS.
Type definitions are terminated when the keywords BUILDING or OUTPUT are encountered.
Table 5.2.12-8: Required Type order

PROPERTIES

LAYER

INPUTS

5–118
 SCHEDULE

WALL

WINDOW

GAIN

COMFORT

INFILTRATION

VENTILATION

COOLING

HEATING

ZONES

ORIENTATIONS

5.2.12.3.1. INPUT TYPE

This data is used to define all inputs to the Type 56 Multi-Zone Building Component that are in
addition to the ambient conditions and incident radiation.

Table 5.2.12-9: INPUTS Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

names associated with inputs to Type 56

INPUTS 2
Multi-Zone Component

names associated with inputs to Type 56

INPUTS_DESCRIPTION 2
Multi-Zone Component

5.2.12.3.2. CONSTRUCTION TYPES

5.2.12.3.2.1. LAYER Types

There are three types of layers that may be defined:
• layers having non-negligible mass,
• layers to be treated as pure resistances and
• active layers for modeling thermally activated building components. (e.g. concrete slab
cooling)
For layers with mass, the following data applies. Material data can be found within the
description of Type 19 or in the layers library of TRNBuild.

5–119
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-10: Massive LAYER Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

LAYER 2 layer name

THICKNESS 1 layer thickness m

CONDUCTIVITY 1 material thermal conductivity kJ/h m K

CAPACITY 1 material specific heat kJ/kg K

DENSITY 1 material density kg/m3

PERT 1 Total renewable primary energy MJ/kg

Total non-renewable primary

PENRT 1 MJ/kg
energy

For a massless layer, the required data is:

Table 5.2.12-11: Massless LAYER Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

LAYER 2 layer name

material thermal resistance

(reciprocal of overall heat transfer
RESISTANCE 1 h m²K/kJ
coefficient, without surface film
coefficients)

PERT 1 Total renewable primary energy MJ/m²

Total non-renewable primary

PENRT 1 MJ/m²
energy

5–120
For an active layer, the required data is:
Table 5.2.12-12: Active LAYER Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

LAYER 2 layer name

PSPACING 1 pipe spacing center to center m

PDIAMETER 1 pipe outside diameter m

PWALLTHICKNESS 1 pipe wall thickness m

PCONDUCTIVITY 1 pipe wall conductivity kJ/h m K

CPFLUID 3 specific heat coefficient of fluid kJ/kg K

PERT 1 Total renewable primary energy MJ/m²

Total non-renewable primary

PENRT 1 MJ/m²
energy

Note: The pipe diameter has to be smaller than 0.2* pipe spacing!

For a chilled ceiling layer, the following data is required:

5–121
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-13: Chilled Ceiling LAYER Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

LAYER 2 layer name

CC_PSPACING 1 pipe spacing center to center m

CC_PIDIAMETER 1 pipe inside diameter m

CC_CPFLUID 3 specific heat coefficient of fluid kJ/kg K

SP_NORMPOWER 1 specific norm power kJ/h m²

SP_NORMMFLOW 1 specific norm massflow kg/h m²

NORMAREA 1 norm area at test conditions m²

number of loops at test

NORMNLOOP 1
conditions

define kind of contact-chilled

UCOMB 2
ceiling and ceiling

GAP 2 keywords to define an air-gap or

direct-contact between chilled
DIRECT_CONTACT 2 ceiling and ceiling

UWRX 1+2 heat transfer coefficient kJ/hm²K

F(SP_NORMPOWER keyword to define internal

2 -
) calculation of UWRX

only if UWRX calculated from

temperature difference between
DTSURFNORM 1 K
mean fluid and mean surface
temperature at test conditions

PERT 1 Total renewable primary energy MJ/m²

Total non-renewable primary

PENRT 1 MJ/m²
energy

The following data is only used in the expert mode of a chilled ceiling layer:

5–122
 Table 5.2.12-14: Chilled Ceiling LAYER Type expert mode Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

additional heat transfer

UUPCONST 1 coefficient for construction on kJ/hm²K
upper side of chilled ceiling

additional heat transfer

ULOCONST 1 coefficient for construction on kJ/hm²K
lower side of chilled ceiling

constant for heat transfer

K_DOWN 1 calculation in the gap - heatflux kJ/hm²K
going down

exponent for heat transfer

M_DOWN 1 calculation in the gap - heatflux -
going down

constant for heat transfer

K_UP 1 calculation in the gap - heatflux kJ/hm²K
going up

exponent for heat transfer

M_UP 1 calculation in the gap - heatflux -
going up

5.2.12.3.2.2. WALL Types

A WALL Type uses previously described layers. Layers should be given from front of the wall
to back where the front corresponds to the inside surface of the wall for an exterior wall or wall
with a specified boundary condition (see Section 5.2.7.2) and is arbitrary otherwise. Up to 20
layers are allowed for any wall. Both the front and back of every wall are assumed to be black
for internal radiative gains and for long-wave radiation exchange between the internal surfaces.

5–123
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-15: WALL Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

CONSTRUCTION 2 construction name

names of previously defined

layers that comprise the wall from
LAYER 2
front to back (or inside to outside
for external walls)

THICKNESS 1 thickness of each layer m

front surface absorptance for

ABS-FRONT 1 -
solar radiation (material data)

back surface absorptance for

ABS-BACK 1 -
solar radiation (material data)

front surface emissivity for

EPS-FRONT 1 -
longwave radiation

back surface emissivity for

EPS-BACK 1 -
longwave radiation

front surface convective

HFRONT 3 kJ/h m² K
heattransfer coefficient

back surface convective heat

HBACK 3 3 kJ/h m² K
transfer coefficient

keyword internal calculation of

FLOOR - HFRONT or HBACK of a floor; no
other data is required

keyword internal calculation of

CEILING - HFRONT or HBACK of a ceiling;
no other data is required

keyword internal calculation of

VERTICAL - HFRONT or HBACK of vertical
wall; no other data is required

5.2.12.3.2.3. WINDOW-Types
In the program WINDOW 7.4 (Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, USA), a detailed calculation of
reflections between the individual panes and the absorption and transmission of each pane is
performed. Thermal properties and optical data for the window are written to an ASCII file by
the WINDOW 7.4 program. These output files, combined in a window library, are accessible
through a FORTRAN logical unit given as the third parameter of Type 56. An example of the
window data is shown in Table 5.2.12-54.

5–124
 Table 5.2.12-16: WINDOW Type Data for standard window model

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

WINDOW 2 window name

window identification number, reference to

WINID 3
EXTENSION_WINPOOL

convective heat transfer coefficient at the inside

HINSIDE 3 kJ/h m² K
surface of the window

convective heat transfer coefficient at the

HOUTSIDE 3 kJ/h m² K
outside surface of the window

SLOPE 3 slope of the window (vertical = 90) °

FFRAME 3 ratio of the frame area to the total window area %/100

UFRAME 3 heat transfer coefficient of the window frame kJ/h m² K

front and back absorptance for solar radiation of

ABSFRAME 1 %/100
the window frame

additional thermal resistance of the internal

RISHADE 3 h m² K/kJ
shading element

additional thermal resistance of the external

RESHADE 3 h m² K/kJ
shading element

reflection coefficient of the internal shading

REFLISHADE 3 %/100
element towards the window

reflection coefficient of the internal shading

REFLOSHADE 3 %/100
element towards the zone

fraction of the solar radiation absorbed by the

internal shading element that is transferred to
CCISHADE 3 the air node by additional convection between %/100
the inner window pane and the internal shading
element

front surface emissivity of frame for longwave

EPSFRAME 1 %/100
radiation

front surface emissivity of the opaque part of

EPSISHADE 1 %/100
internal shading for longwave radiation

Radiation on the window for closing the shading

ITSHADECLOSE 3 kJ/h m²
device for integrated control model

Radiation on the window for reopening the

ITSHADEOPEN 3 kJ/h m²
shading device for integrated control model

Material name from radiance lib to describe

RADMATERIAL 2
daylight transmisivity

Table 5.2.12-17: WINDOW Type Data for detailed window model

5–125
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

WINMODEL 2 Keyword to describe detailed window model

BASECONFIGID 1 window base configuration number

PSIEDGE 1 Linear thermal transmittance of spacer kJ/hr/m/K

CONFIGIDS 1 Configuration numbers, separated by comma

GAPVENT1 1 Gap nr. of first gap with forced ventilation

Inlet mass flow rate of first gap with forced

GAPMFLOW1 3 kg/h
ventilation

Inlet temperature of first gap with forced

GAPINTEMP1 3 °C
ventilation

GAPVENT2 1 Gap nr. of second gap with forced ventilation

Inlet mass flow rate of second gap with forced

GAPMFLOW2 3
ventilation

Inlet temperature of second gap with forced

GAPINTEMP2 3
ventilation

FLOWTOAIRNO Switch to addventilated flow of last gap as a

1
DE convective gain to airnode

Material name from radiance lib to describe

RADMATERIAL 2
daylight transmissivity of base config

RADMATERIAL_ Material name from radiance lib to describe

2
SHD1 daylight transmissivity of 1st configuration nr.

RADMATERIAL_ Material name from radiance lib to describe

2
SHD2 daylight transmissivity of 2nd configuration nr.

RADMATERIAL_ Material name from radiance lib to describe

2
SHD2 daylight transmissivity of 2nd configuration nr.

RADMATERIAL_ Material name from radiance lib to describe

2
SHD3 daylight transmissivity of 3rd configuration nr.

RADMATERIAL_ Material name from radiance lib to describe

2
SHD4 daylight transmissivity of 4th configuration nr.

FNAME_BSDF1 2 Letter of drive, where CFS file is located

FNAME_BSDF2 2 File path CFS file excluding file

5.2.12.3.3. SCHEDULE TYPES

Schedules are periodic functions whose output may vary according to the time of day and/or
week. Two forms of SCHEDULE Types may be defined. The first requires values of the schedule
as a function of the time of day:

5–126
 Table 5.2.12-18: Hourly SCHEDULE Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

SCHEDULE 2 schedule name

hours of the day at which the output of the

HOURS 1 schedule will change (starting from 0,
ending at 24) [h]

the values of the schedule corresponding to

VALUES 1
the hours given

The hourly SCHEDULE VALUES change with a step at each of the HOURS given, producing a
square-wave. The second form for SCHEDULE TypeS is for specifying the use of different
hourly SCHEDULEs as a function of the day of the week.

Table 5.2.12-19: Daily SCHEDULE Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

SCHEDULE 2 schedule name

days of the week on which the schedule

DAYS 1
changes (starting from 1, ending at 7)

names of previously defined hourly

HOURLY 2
schedules corresponding to the days given

The DAYS of the week are relative to the first day of the simulation. For Trnsys, the year starts
with Monday.

5.2.12.3.4. REGIME TYPES

5.2.12.3.4.1. GAIN Types

Gains are used within the description of each zone. They are considered to include energy
convection, radiation, and humidity.

5–127
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-20: GAIN Type DATA

Keyword Data Type Data Description

GAIN 2 gain name

CONVECTIVE 3 convective energy gain rate

RADIATIVE 3 radiative energy gain rate

HUMIDITY 3 humidity gain (mass per time)

ELPOWERFRAC 3 Electric power fraction of gains

ABSOLUTE /
2 Key word for absolute or area related gains
AREA_RELATED

Gain type category (PEOPLE EQUIPMENT,

CATEGORY 2
MISCELLANEOUS, THBRIDGE)

5.2.12.3.4.2. COMFORT Type

A COMFORT type may be used within the description of each zone. The thermal comfort
calculation is based on EN ISO 7730. A COMFORT type is considered to include clothing factor,
metabolic rate, external work and relative air velocity. No influence of direct or diffuse solar
radiation onto the occupants are considered for PMV and PPD calculation!

Table 5.2.12-21: COMFORT Type DATA

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

COMFORT 2 gain name

CLOTHING 3 clothing factor acc. to ISO 7730 clo

MET 3 metabolic rate acc. to ISO 7730 met

WORK 3 external work acc. to ISO 7730 met

VELOCITY 3 rel. air velocity acc. to ISO 7730 m/s

Switch for SET and PMV calculation with

ELV_AIRSPEED 1 elevated air speed based on ASHRAE 55-2013 -
(0… off; 1… on)

5.2.12.3.4.3. VENTILATION Type

As with infiltration, the ventilation rates are expressed in zone air changes per hour. If heating
or cooling equipment is modeled externally, the AIRCHANGE, TEMPERATURE and HUMIDITY
should be defined in terms of INPUTS to Type 56 from the external equipment. The humidity
can be entered as absolute or relative humidity. In addition, the air flow can be defined as air
mass flow rate or airchanges.

5–128
 Table 5.2.12-22: VENTILATION Type Data

Data Unit
Keyword Data Description
Type

VENTILATION 2 ventilation name

temperature of ventilation air flow (ambient °C

TEMPERATURE 3 temperature if the keyword OUTSIDE is
entered)

number of air changes per hour for 1/hr

AIRCHANGE 3
ventilation flow stream

AIRFLOW 3 air mass flow for ventilation kg/hr

AIRFLOWSPEC 3 air volume flow related to ref. floor area kg/hr/m²

VAIRFLOW 3 air volume flow for ventilation m³/hr

VAIRFLOWSPEC 3 air volume flow related to ref. floor area m³/hr/m²

Specific fan power (related to supply air kJ/hr/(m³/r)

SPECFANPOWER 3
flow)

SENSHR 3 Sensible heat recovery ration

Minimum allowed relative humitity (ambient %

RELMINHUM 3 relative humidity if the keyword OUTSIDE is
entered)

Maximum allowed relative humitity (ambient %

RELMAXHUM 3 relative humidity if the keyword OUTSIDE is
entered)

Minimum allowed absolute humitity kg/kg

ABSMINHUM 3 (ambient absolute humidity if the keyword
OUTSIDE is entered)

Maximum allowed absolute humitity kg/kg

ABSMAXHUM 3 (ambient absolute humidity if the keyword
OUTSIDE is entered)

Switch of internal (1) or external (0)

CALCQAHU 1
calculation of supply air conditions

5.2.12.3.4.4. COOLING Type

The cooling requirement of any zone subject to idealized cooling control can be determined by
specifying a COOLING Type for that regime. If cooling equipment is modeled external to the
Type 56 component, the COOLING Type should not be used. Instead, the VENTILATION
AIRCHANGE, TEMPERATURE and HUMIDITY should be defined as INPUTS, fed by outputs
from the conditioning equipment component(s) or negative CONVECTIVE and RADIATIVE
GAINS should be defined. A temperature setpoint and maximum cooling rate are required to
describe the COOLING Type. If used in conjunction with a HEATING Type, the zone is only free
floating (with no energy requirement) when the temperature is greater than the heating setpoint
and less than the cooling setpoint.

5–129
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-23: COOLING Type Data

Data Unit
Keyword Data Description
Type

COOLING 2 cooling name

ON 3 temperature above which cooling begins °C

POWER 3 the maximum cooling power kJ/hr

the relative humidity of zone air above which %

HUMIDITY 3 there is dehumidification of the air (100 for
free floating)

the absolute humidity of zone air above which kg/kg

ABSHUMIDITY 3
there is dehumidification of the air

AREA_RELATED_POW
1 Switch for absolute (0) area related (1) power
ER

To consider the effect of energy required for dehumidification of air, it is necessary to specify
the humidity of the airnode air above which there is dehumidification. Setting the relative
humidity to 100% results in a free floating humidity. The humidity can be entered as absolute or
relative humidity. It is assumed that there is no limit to the amount of energy available for
dehumidification.

5.2.12.3.4.5. HEATING Type

The heating power required by a building zone subject to idealized heating control can
be determined by specifying a HEATING Type for that regime. If heating equipment is modeled
external to Type 56, the HEATING Type should not be used. Instead, VENTILATION
AIRCHANGE, TEMPERATURE and HUMIDITY should be defined as INPUTS, fed by outputs
from the conditioning equipment component(s) or the supplied heating power should be defined
as CONVECTIVE and RADIATIVE GAINS. A temperature setpoint and maximum heating power
are required to describe the HEATING Type. To consider the effect of energy required for
humidification of air, it is necessary to specify the humidity of the air below which there is
humidification. The humidity can be entered as absolute or relative humidity. Setting this ratio
to 0.0 results in a free floating humidity. It is assumed that there is no limit to the amount of
energy available for humidification.
For the simulation of heating equipment with both convective and radiative effects, a
radiative fraction of the heating power RRAD may be defined. This fraction of the heater power
is supplied as internal radiative gains and distributed to the walls of the zone. As the set
temperature for the heating equipment is related to the air temperature of the zone, the radiative
fraction of the heating power RRAD cannot be higher than 0.99 in order to have a convective
part remaining to ensure stable control of the heating equipment. For using RRAD greater than
0 it is recommended to limit the maximum power. Note: For the detailed longwave radiation
RRAD has to be set 0.

5–130
 Table 5.2.12-24: HEATING Type Data

Data Unit
Keyword Data Description
Type

HEATING 2 heating name

ON 3 temperature below which heating begins °C

POWER 3 the maximum heating power kJ/hr

the relative humidity of zone air below which %

HUMIDITY 3 there is humidification of the air (0 for free
floating)

the absolute humidity of zone air below which kg/kg

ABSHUMIDITY 3 there is humidification of the air (0 for free
floating)

RRAD 3 radiative fraction of the heating power %/100

AREA_RELATED_POW
1 Switch for absolute (0) area related (1) power
ER

5.2.12.3.4.6. DAYLIGHT CONTROL Type

5–131
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-25: DAYLIGHT CONTROL Type Data

Data Unit
Keyword Data Description
Type

DCONTROL 2 Daylight control name

Mode for illuminance calculation (1=daylight -

ILLMODE 1
factor, 2=userdef. Value, 3=daylight sensor)

Depending on ILLMODE: Daylight factor or - or lux

VALUE 3
user defined Illuminance value

Upper Illuminance setpoint (for switching lux

ILLSETPOINT1 1
lights off)

2nd illuminance setpoint (for switching light on lux

ILLSETPOINT2 1
again)

Lighting control type (1=always on, 2=on/off,

CNTRLMODE 1
3=continuous, 4= continuous on/off)

Minimum input power fraction for continuous -

MINPFAC 1
dimming control

Minimum light output fraction for continuous -

MINLFAC 1
dimming control

GEOPOS1 1 1st daylight sensor point (mean value used)

GEOPOS2 1 2nd daylight sensor point (mean value used)

GEOPOS3 1 3rd daylight sensor point (mean value used)

GEOPOS4 1 4th daylight sensor point (mean value used)

5.2.12.3.5. ZONE TYPE

The purpose of the ZONES Type is to define names associated with the zones that will be
described in the BUILDING data group.
Table 5.2.12-26: ZONES Type Data

Data
Keyword Data Description
Type

names associated with zones to be described in

ZONES 2
BUILDING

5.2.12.4. Orientations
This data is necessary for the definition of all possible orientations for external walls and
windows. For each orientation name specified, an input of incident radiation to the Type 56
Trnsys component will be required. This is generally provided by the Type 16 Radiation
Processor.

5–132
 Note: The incident angle for a orientation must range from 0 to 180 degrees. Due to
the fact that the zenith angle of Type 16 (Radiation processor) ranges only between 0
to 90 degrees, the orientation “horizontal” must be defined as a separate surface in
Type 16 (Radiation processor.)
Table 5.2.12-27: ORIENTATIONS Type Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

Setting the hemisphere:

HEMISPHERE 2
NORTHERN or SOUTHERN

names associated with orientations for which

ORIENTATIONS 2
incident radiation is needed

Names associated with orientations in standard

format for which the incident radiation is
INTERNAL_CALCULATION 2
calculated by Type 56 (no radiation input
required)

A new standard format for orientation naming is introduced. This naming scheme includes the
azimuth and slope of surface acc. to Trnsys convention:
Y_xxx_zzz
with
Y… single letter N, S, E, W or H
xxx… azimuth angle of the orientation acc. To TRNSYs convention (0…359 degree;
northern hemisphere: 0 … south; 90 … west, 180 … north, 270 … east
southern hemisphere: 180 south; 90 … west, 0 … north, 270 … east )
zzz… slope of the orientation (0…180; 0 … horizontal, 90 … vertical, 180 … facing down)
The orientation named H_0_0 is automatically recordnize as the horizontal radiation.

5.2.12.5. Building
The building description begins following the BUILDING keyword. Each zone description is
initiated with the keyword ZONE followed by the name associated with the zone to be described.
The names of all zones to be described must have been defined with a ZONES Type. After
zone name RADIATIONMODE and DAYLIGHTMODE have to be specified. Afterwards,
AIRNODES of the ZONE have to specified. Until Trnsys16 a zone was represented by a single
AIRNODE. Thus, the AIRNODE name was identical to the zone name. Since, Trnsys 17 a ZONE
may have multiple airnodes if the following conditions are fulfilled:
Within each AIRNODE description, there are three primary descriptions: WALLS, WINDOWS,
and REGIME.

5.2.12.6. Radiation Mode

This data is necessary for the definition of radiation models used to calculate the distribution of
longwave, and shortwave radition within a zone.

5–133
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-28: Radiation Mode Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

distribution mode of beam radiation entering

through external windows into the zone:
BEAM 2 STANDARD ... userdefined by GEOSURF
DETAILED ... based on insolation matrix
provided by an external file.

distribution mode of diffuse radiation within a

zone:
DIFFUSE 2 STANDARD ... absorption area weighted
DETAILED ... based on view factor matrix
provided by an external file.

distribution mode of longwave radiation within a

zone:
STANDARD ... star node model
LONGWAVE 2
DETAILED ... based on view factor matrix
provided by an external file.
SIMPLE ... one node model

Solar to air factor - fraction of solar heat entering

an airnode through the glazing which is
FSOLAIR 3
immediately transferred as a convective gain to
the internal air

5.2.12.7. Geometry Mode

Since version 17 TRNBuild supports different levels of geomertic surface information for each
zone:
Table 5.2.12-29: Geometry Mode Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

The surfaces are defined within TRNBuild by

MANUAL -
their area. No three dimensional data is defined.

For some surface three dimensional data is

available due to importing an IDF file. The
MIXED - geometric information of these surfaces can’t be
modified nor can surfaces deleted. However, the
user may add new surfaces within TRNBuild.

For all surfaces of the zone three dimensional

data is provided due to importing an IDF file.
3D_DATA -
The geometric information of these surfaces
can’t be modified nor can surfaces be deleted.

5.2.12.8. Daylight mode

Since version 18, TRNBuild supports daylight calculation. There are two ways to determine the
shading control in terms of daylight for a zone. If keyword DLSHADE = -1, a conceptual control
is used. DLSHADE = 0 or 1 are user defined values for unshades or shaded. If DLSHADE = 2
or higher is assigned, user defined files for shading states shd2 or higher are used.
5–134
to X represent user defined shading states, that use
Table 5.2.12-30: Daylight Mode Data

Data
Keyword Data Description
Type

Shading control for daylight sensor points:

-1 = shaded if each window of zone with shading device
has shading factor > 0.01

DLSHADE 3 yyy_shdx_name.*
yyy - zone number
shdx - shd0…unshaded, shd1 shading state1, …
name - zone name …

5.2.12.9. Walls
WALL descriptions refer to previously defined WALL Types. There are four applications of walls
that may be specified: external walls (EXTERNAL), walls separating zones (ADJACENT),
internal walls (INTERNAL), and walls having a known outside boundary condition
(BOUNDARY). Type 56 also offers the possibility to define a certain energy flux to a certain wall
surface. Also, thermally activated walls for cooling/heating are integrated in Type 56. If the wall
type includes an active layer, optional Keywords are used for specification. A special external
wall type to model thermal bridges is added to the wall description. In the following descriptions,
the FRONT of a WALL is associated with the first layer given in the WALL Type definition.
External walls are subjected to ambient conditions. The wall front is assumed to be at the inside
of the zone.
For the distribution of direct solar radiation entering a zone explicit distribution factors can be
defined by the user. The keyword GEOSURF represents the fraction of the total entering direct
solar radiation that strikes the surface. The sum of all values of GEOSURF should not exceed
1 within a zone. If it does, the values will be automatically normalized to ensure a sum of 1 is
used for the simulation. The movement of the sun patches within a zone can be modeled by
defining a SCHEDULE or an INPUT. The default value of GEOSURF is 0. If the sum of values
within a zone is zero, the direct radiation is distributed the same way as the diffuse radiation (by
absorptance weighted area ratios). Note: In the previous version (14.2) both diffuse and direct
radiation were always distributed according to absorptance weighted area ratios.

5–135
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.12.9.1. EXTERNAL WALLS

Table 5.2.12-31: External Wall Data

Data Units
Keyword Data Description
Type

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall m²

keyword specifying an external wall; no other

EXTERNAL -
data is required

ORIENTATION 2 name associated with orientation for this wall

fraction of the sky in the total hemisphere seen -

FSKY 1 by the wall, used as a weighting factor between
Tsground and Tsky

WAGAIN 3 energy flux to the inside wall surface kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation entering -

GEOSURF 3
the zone that strikes this surface

The keyword FSKY gives the fraction of the sky in the total hemisphere in view of the specified
wall. This is parameter is used as a weighting factor between the ambient temperature
(assuming the ground and other obstructions are at the ambient temperature) and the sky
temperature, which is the third input to Type 56.

5–136
5.2.12.9.2. EXTERNAL WALLS WITH ACTIVE LAYERS
Table 5.2.12-32: External Wall with active layer Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall m²

keyword specifying an external wall; no

EXTERNAL -
other data is required

name associated with orientation for this

ORIENTATION 2
wall

fraction of the sky in the total hemisphere

FSKY 1 seen by the wall, used as a weighting factor -
between Tamb and Tsky

WAGAIN 3 energy flux to the inside wall surface kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation

GEOSURF 3 -
entering the zone that strikes this surface

INTEMP 3 inlet temperature of fluid °C

MFLOW 3 inlet flow rate of fluid kg/h

NLOOP 1 number of fluid loops

EGAIN 3 userdefined energy gain kJ/h

keyword defining whether the ALFAEQV is

ALFAEQV_SELECTED -
used instead of the built in correlation

userdefined spec. heat transfer coefficient

between inlet fluid temp. and the mean temp.
ALFAEQV 3 kJ/m² h K
of the plane surface cutting the wall
construction at the center of the fluid pipes

specific desired minimum massflow rate

MFLOWMIN 1 kg/hm²
during simulation for auto segmentation

surfaces order of an auto segmentation first=

ASEGSURF 1
inlet, ... ,last= outlet

The user definition of ALFAEQV is for experts only. The value of ALFAEQV may be time
dependent.

5–137
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.12.9.3. EXTERNAL WALLS WITH CHILLED CEILING

Table 5.2.12-33: External Wall with Chilled Ceiling Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall m²

keyword specifying an external wall; no other

EXTERNAL -
data is required

ORIENTATION 2 name associated with orientation for this wall

fraction of the sky in the total hemisphere

FSKY 1 seen by the wall, used as a weighting factor -
between Tamb and Tsky

WAGAIN 3 energy flux to the inside wall surface kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation

GEOSURF 3 -
entering the zone that strikes this surface

INTEMP 3 inlet temperature of fluid °C

MFLOW 3 inlet flow rate of fluid kg/h

NLOOP 1 number of fluid loops

Chilled ceiling only allowed on position 1 of wall definition. External wall has to be a ceiling.

5.2.12.9.4. EXTERNAL WALLS WITH A THERMAL BRIDGE EFFECT

To consider the effects of thermal bridging on the thermal behavior (heat losses) and other
physics (condensation and mold) of walls, the description of this effect was included in the
building description. Thermal loss rates are found in thermal bridge (coldbridge) catalogues,
and are normally defined in W/m length of the coldbridge or, in Trnsys units, in kJ/h m. Walltypes
for coldbridges are special coldbridge types defined with a resistance and therefore are
considered to be without thermal capacitance.

5–138
 Table 5.2.12-34: Coldbridge Data

Data Units
Keyword Data Description
Type

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

LENGTH 1 length of the coldbridge m

keyword specifying an external wall; no

EXTERNAL -
other data is required

name associated with orientation for this

ORIENTATION 2
wall

fraction of the sky in the total -

hemisphere seen by the coldbridge wall,
FSKY 1
used as a weighting factor between T amb
and Tsky

WAGAIN 3 energy flux to the inside wall surface kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation -

GEOSURF 3
entering the zone that strikes this surface

5.2.12.9.5. WALLS BETWEEN ZONES

For a wall separating zones, it is necessary to specify the name associated with the adjacent
zone and the side of the wall that is within the zone. If the wall is symmetrical about its center,
then the specification of FRONT or BACK for the wall is arbitrary. It is also possible to specify a
mass flow rate of air (COUPLING) from the adjacent zone to the current zone across this wall.

5–139
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-35: Wall Between Zones

Data Units
Keyword Data Description
Type

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall m²

name of the zone which is adjacent to

ADJACENT 2 current zone having this wall in
common

keyword defining whether the front or

FRONT or BACK - back of the wall is in the zone; no other
data is required

convective flow from adjacent zone to kg/hr

COUPLING 3
the current zone across this wall

WAGAIN 3 energy flux to the inside wall surface kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation -

GEOSURF 3 entering the zone that strikes this
surface

The COUPLING is only a mass flowrate into the zone being specified. The magnitude of this
coupling will directly affect the zone temperature and zone humidity, but will have no affect on
the adjacent zone from which the air flowrate originates. It is up to the user to insure proper
mass balances for each zone.

5–140
5.2.12.9.6. WALLS BETWEEN ZONES WITH ACTIVE LAYER
Table 5.2.12-36: Wall Between Zones with Active Layer

Data
Keyword Data Description Unit
Type

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall m²

name of the zone which is adjacent to current

ADJACENT 2
zone having this wall in common

keyword defining whether the front or back of

FRONT or BACK - the wall is in the zone; no other data is
required

a convective flow from the adjacent zone to

COUPLING 3 kg/hr
the current zone across this wall

energy flow to the wall surface in the current

WAGAIN 3 kJ/hr
zone

fraction of the total direct solar radiation the

GEOSURF 3
zone that strikes this surface

INTEMP 3 inlet temperature of fluid °C

MFLOW 3 inlet flow rate of fluid kg/h

NLOOP 1 number of fluid loops

EGAIN 3 energy gain kJ/h

keyword defining whether the ALFAEQV

ALFAEQV_SELECTED -
used instead of the built in correlation

Userdefined spec. heat transfer between

inlet fluid temp. and the mean temp. of the
ALFAEQV 3 kJ/m² h K
plane surface cutting the wall construction at
the center of the fluid pipes

specific desired minimum massflow rate

MFLOWMIN 1 kg/hm²
during simulation for auto segmentation

surfaces order of an auto segmentation first=

ASEGSURF 1
inlet, ... ,last= outlet

The user definition of ALFAEQV is for experts only. The value of ALFAEQV may be time
dependent.
5–141
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.12.9.7. WALLS BETWEEN ZONES WITH CHILLED CEILING

Table 5.2.12-37: Wall Between Zones with Chilled Ceiling

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall

name of the zone which is adjacent to

ADJACENT 2
current zone having this wall in common

keyword defining whether the front or back of

FRONT or BACK - the wall is in the zone; no other data is
required

a convective flow from the adjacent zone to

COUPLING 3 kg/hr
the current zone across this wall

energy flow to the wall surface in the current

WAGAIN 3 kJ/hr
zone

fraction of the total direct solar radiation

GEOSURF 3 -
entering the zone that strikes this surface

INTEMP 3 inlet temperature of fluid °C

MFLOW 3 inlet flow rate of fluid kg/h

NLOOP 1 number of fluid loops

5.2.12.9.8. INTERNAL WALLS

An internal wall is a wall with both surfaces within the same zone. Internal walls are assumed
to affect building response only as the result of their mass.

5–142
 Table 5.2.12-38: Internal Wall Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

total surface area of wall within zone (includes

AREA 1
both sides of the wall)

keyword specifying an internal wall; no other

INTERNAL -
data is required

energy flow to the wall surface in the current

WAGAIN 3
zone [kJ/hr]

fraction of the total direct solar radiation entering

GEOSURF 3
the zone that strikes this surface [%/100]

5.2.12.9.9. WALLS WITH KNOWN BOUNDARY CONDITION

A wall having a known boundary condition might be a concrete floor resting on ground of a
known temperature or a wall adjacent to a zone whose temperature is known. The front of the
wall is considered to be at the inside of the zone. Normally, the boundary condition is the
temperature of a node connected to the back surface of the wall through a pure resistance. It is
possible to specify the surface temperature of the outside by setting the back side heat transfer
coefficient of the WALL Type (HBACK) to a very small value (less than 0.001 kJ/h/m²). This
WALL Type is then only appropriate for use as a wall with a known boundary. The use of a very
small value may be confusing but was kept for backwards compatibility reasons.

5–143
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-39: Data for Wall with Known Boundary Condition

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall

temperature associated with boundary at

side of wall; use the keyword IDENTICAL for
BOUNDARY 3 °C
a boundary temperature equal to the zone
temperature

a convective flow from the boundary to the

COUPLING 3 kg/hr
zone across this wall

the relative humidity associated to the

COUPL_HUMI 3 convective flow from the boundary to the %
zone across this wall

energy flow to the wall surface in the current

WAGAIN 3 kJ/hr
zone

fraction of the total direct solar radiation

GEOSURF 3 -
entering the zone that strikes this surface

5–144
5.2.12.9.10. WALLS WITH KNOWN BOUNDARY CONDITION AND ACTIVE LAYER
Table 5.2.12-40: Data for Wall with Known Boundary Condition and an active layer

Keyword Data Type Data Description Unit

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall

temperature associated with boundary at

side of wall; use the keyword IDENTICAL for
BOUNDARY 3 °C
a boundary temperature equal to the zone
temperature

a convective flow from the boundary to the

COUPLING 3 kg/hr
zone across this wall

the relative humidity associated to the

COUPL_HUM 3 convective flow from the boundary to the %
zone across this wall

energy flow to the wall surface in the current

WAGAIN 3 kJ/hr
zone

fraction of the total direct solar radiation

GEOSURF 3 -
entering the zone that strikes this surface

INTEMP 3 inlet temperature of fluid °C

MFLOW 3 inlet flow rate of fluid kg/h

NLOOP 1 number of fluid loops

keyword defining whether the ALFAEQV is

ALFAEQV_SELECTED -
used instead of the built in correlation

Userdefined spec. heat transfer coefficient

between inlet fluid temp. and the mean temp.
ALFAEQV 3 kJ/m² h K
of the plane surface cutting the wall
construction at the center of the fluid pipes

specific desired minimum massflow rate

MFLOWMIN 1 kg/hm²
during simulation for auto segmentation

surfaces order of an auto segmentation first=

ASEGSURF 1
inlet, ... ,last= outlet

The user definition of ALFAEQV is for experts only. The value of ALFAEQV may be time
dependent.

5–145
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.2.12.9.11. WALLS WITH KNOWN BOUNDARY CONDITION AND CHILLED CEILING

Table 5.2.12-41: Data for Wall with Known Boundary Condition and Chilled Ceiling

Data
Keyword Data Description Unit
Type

WALL 2 Surface type wall

FLOOR 2 Surface type floor

CEILING 2 Surface type ceiling

ROOF 2 Surface type roof

unique surface number for identification (number

SURF 1
must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of wall

temperature associated with boundary at side of

BOUNDARY 3 wall; use the keyword IDENTICAL for a boundary °C
temperature equal to the zone temperature

a convective flow from the boundary to the zone

COUPLING 3 kg/hr
across this wall

the relative humidity associated to the convective

COUPL_HUM 3 %
flow from the boundary to the zone across this wall

WAGAIN 3 energy flow to the wall surface in the current zone kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation entering

GEOSURF 3 -
the zone that strikes this surface

INTEMP 3 inlet temperature of fluid °C

MFLOW 3 inlet flow rate of fluid kg/h

NLOOP 1 number of fluid loops

The chilled ceiling layer is only allowed on position 1 of wall definition. Boundary wall has to be
a ceiling.

5.2.12.10. Windows
Windows are assumed to be EXTERNAL or ADJACENT. By defining an INPUT for the keywords
ESHADE or ISHADE, connected to an external controller, individually controlled shading
devices may be modeled. As in the case of external walls, the FSKY parameter must be
specified for use as a weighting factor between Tamb and Tsky for the calculation of long-wave
radiative exchange.
For the distribution of direct solar radiation entering a zone explicit distribution factors can be
defined by the user. The keyword GEOSURF represents the fraction of the total entering direct
solar radiation that strikes the surface. The sum of all values of GEOSURF should not exceed
1 within a zone. If it does, the values will be automatically normalized to ensure a sum of 1 is
used for the simulation. The movement of the sun patches within a zone can be modeled by
defining a SCHEDULE or an INPUT. The default value of GEOSURF is 0. If the sum of values
within a zone is zero, the direct radiation is distributed the same way as the diffuse radiation (by
absorptance weighted area ratios). Note: In the previous version (14.2) both diffuse and direct
radiation were always distributed according to absorptance weighted area ratios.
5–146
 Table 5.2.12-42: External Window Data

Data
Keyword Data Description Unit
Type

WINDOW 2 name of window type

unique surface number for identification (number

SURF 1
must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of window opening m²

keyword specifying an external wall; no other

EXTERNAL -
data is required

ORIENTATION 2 name associated with orientation for this window

fraction of the sky in the total hemisphere seen

FSKY 1 by the window, used as a weighting factor -
between Tamb and Tsky

WAGAIN 3 energy flow to the surface in the current zone kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation entering

GEOSURF 3 -
the zone that strikes this surface

shading factor of the internal shading device

ISHADE 3 -
(opaque fraction of the device)

shading factor of the external shading device

ESHADE 3 -
(opaque fraction of the device)

Shading state for complexe fenestration systems

CSHADE 3 -
(0 = base config, 1 = Config1, 2 = Config2, …)

Optional keyword for integrated mode for

radiation depening control od shading device:
INTERNAL: the external and internal shading
device are controlled by the integrated mode

SHADECNTRL 2 ISHADE_INTERNAL: only the defined internal

shading device is controlled by the integrated
mode
ESHADE_ITNERNAL: only the defined external
shading device is controlled by the integrated
mode:

5–147
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-43: Adjacent Window Data

Data
Keyword Data Description
Type

WINDOW 2 name of window type

unique surface number for identification

SURF 1
(number must be greater than 0)

AREA 1 area of inside surface of window opening m²

name of the zone which is adjacent to current

ADJACENT 2
zone having this window in common

keyword defining whether the front or back of

FRONT or BACK -
the window is in the zone;

a convective flow from the adjacent zone to kg/hr

COUPLING 3
the current zone across this wall

name associated with orientation for this

ORIENTATION 2
window

WAGAIN 3 energy flow to the surface in the current zone kJ/hr

fraction of the total direct solar radiation -

GEOSURF 3
entering the zone that strikes this surface

ISHADE (only at shading factor of the internal shading device -

3
FRONT) (opak fraction of the device)

Shading state for complexe fenestration

CSHADE 3 systems (0 = base config, 1 = Config1, 2 =
Config2, …)

Optional keyword for integrated mode for

radiation depening control od shading device:
SHADECNTRL 2 ISHADE_INTERNAL: only the defined
internal shading device is controlled by the
integrated mode

5–148
5.2.12.11. Regime
The REGIME represents the air within the airnode. The input data establish initial conditions,
gains, and conditioning. There are optional and required data types. The regime description
begins following the keyword REGIME. The optional data must appear prior to the required data.
Four of the optional inputs refer to previously defined TypeS only.
Table 5.2.12-44: Optional REGIME Data Referring Only to TypeS

Keyword Data Type Data Description

COMFORT 2 name of previously defined COMFORT Type

name of previously defined INFILTRATION

INFILTRATION 2
Type

VENTILATION 2 name of previously defined VENTILATION Type

HEATING 2 name of previously defined HEATING Type

COOLING 2 name of previously defined COOLING Type

This data may appear in any order. Only one statement of COMFORT, INFILTRATION,
HEATING and COOLING is allowed per zone.
It is possible to define more than 1 comfort data for a REGIME with the following data.
Table 5.2.12-45: Optional COMFORT Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

COMFORT 2 name of previously defined COMFORT Type

unique COMFORT identification number

COMFID 1
(number must be greater than 0)

Mean radiation temperature

MRT 3 – userdefined or
- – INTERNAL

ID for the geometric location of the piont source

(only used if radiation mode longwave=detailed;
GEOPOS 1
ID number has to match to the external view
factor matrix file)

5–149
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

It is possible to define thermal gains for a REGIME with the following data.
Table 5.2.12-46: Optional GAINS Data

Keyword Data Type Data Description

GAINS 2 name of previously defined GAIN Type

SCALE 3 1st scaling factor of GAIN Type for this REGIME

ID for the geometric location of the piont source

(only used if radiation mode longwave=detailed;
GEOPOS 1
ID number hsa to match to the external view
factor matrix file)

2nd scaling factor of GAIN Type for this REGIME

SCALE2 3
(SCALE and SCALE2 are multiplied)

Scaling with reference area of airnode

FRAC_REFAREA 1 -1 = no scaling
0…1 = scaling by fraction of reference area

Name of previously defined DAYLIGHT

DLIGHT_CTRL 2
CONTROL Type

A thermal zone may consist of more than one airnode. In general, these airnodes do not have
a common wall. For defining a coupling between these airnode within the same zone, this
regime option can be used. Each airnode may get up to two coupling airflows from “adjacent”
airnodes. (Note: “Upper” and “lower” are just names which don’t correspond to the acutual
location).
Table 5.2.12-47: Optional AIRNODE coupling

Keyword Data Type Data Description

name of previously defined AIRNODE of the

ADJACENT_LOWER 2
same ZONE

a convective flow from the adjacent airnode to

COUPL 3
the current airnode [kg/hr]

name of previously defined AIRNODE of the

ADJACENT_UPPER 2
same ZONE

a convective flow from the adjacent airnode to

COUPL 3
the current airnode [kg/hr]

Following the optional data statements, five or ten data statements are required depending on
the humidity model used.
If the capacitance humidity model is used, a fifth parameter WCAPR must be specified.
WCAPR is used as a multiplier to increase the humidity capacitance due to the air in the zone
and normally ranges from 1 to 10. WCAPR accounts for the humidity capacitance of the air plus
any other mass within the zone. If WCAPR = 1, only the humidity capacitance of the air is used.

5–150
 Table 5.2.12-48: Required REGIME Data using the Capacitance Humidity Model

Data
Keyword Data Description
Type

thermal capacitance of total zone air plus any kJ/K

CAPACITANCE 1 mass not considered as walls (the value 0 is
allowed)

VOLUME 1 volume of air within zone m³

REFAREA ! Reference floor area, used for regimes

TINITIAL 1 initial temperature of zone air °C

PHIINITIAL 1 initial relative humidity of zone air %

humidity capacitance ratio ( set on 1 if only

WCAPR 1
zone air is considered)

If the more advanced buffer storage humidity model is used, six parameters following
PHIINITIAL must be specified. KSURF and KDEEP describe the gradients of the linearized
sorptive isothermal lines of the materials used in the surface and deep buffer storage,
respectively. MSURF and MDEEP give the total mass of the surface and deep buffer storage
materials, respectively. BSURF represents the moisture exchange coefficient between the zone
air and the surface storage. BDEEP represents the moisture exchange coefficient between the
surface and the deep buffer storage. This data is shown in
Table 5.4.3-1.

5–151
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.2.12-49: Required REGIME Data using the Buffer Storage Humidity Model

Data
Keyword Data Description Unit
Type

thermal capacitance of total zone air plus

CAPACITANCE 1 any mass not considered as walls (the value kJ/K
0 is allowed)

VOLUME 1 volume of air within zone m3

TINITIAL 1 initial temperature of zone air °C

PHIINITIAL 1 initial relative humidity of zone air %

gradient of the sorptive isothermal line for kgwater/kgmat/rel.

KSURF 1
the surface buffer storage hum.

gradient of the sorptive isothermal line for kgwater/kgmat/rel.

KDEEP 1
the deep buffer storage hum.

MSURF 1 mass of the surface buffer storage kgmaterial

MDEEP 1 mass of the deep buffer storage kgmaterial

exchange coefficient between zone air and

BSURF 1 kgair./hr
surface buffer storage

exchange coefficient between surface

BDEEP 1 kgair/hr
buffer and deep buffer storage

5.2.12.12. Output
The user identifies the outputs desired from the Trnsys Type 56 component. TRNBuild creates
three data files from the user input. The first file is an information file for the user describing the
inputs and outputs necessary for the Type 56 (*.INF). The other two files will be used by Type
56: one contains the building description (*.BLD) and the other contains the transfer function
coefficients for each wall (*.TRN).
Following the OUTPUT keyword is the data necessary for specifying the calculation of
the wall transfer function coefficients. If these calculations are required (and the corresponding
file), the following data applies:
Table 5.2.12-50: Data for Wall Transfer Function Calculations

Keyword Data Type Data Description

keyword specifying that transfer function

TRANSFER - calculations will be performed; no other data is
required

the time series that characterizes the walls is

based upon a time interval equal to the
TIMEBASE 1 TIMEBASE; ASHRAE recommends 1 hour ( for
heavy constructions, 2 - 4 can be used; 0.5 for
light walls)

5–152
The output data of the Type 56 component is defined by the declaration of the zone airnodes to
which the output refers and by the definition of so-called NTypeS, specification numbers which
refer to the desired quantity (see Table 5.2.3-1).
The default outputs of Type 56 are zone air temperatures and sensible energy demands
(NTypeS 1 and 2) for all zones. To specify the defaults, enter the keywords rather than the
explicit specification.
There are many optional outputs from Type 56 that may be specified by the user. The input data
for this specification are:
Table 5.2.12-51: Data for Optional Arinode Outputs

Keyword Data Type Data Description

AIRNODES 2 names of airnodes for which outputs are desired

numbers associated with the optional outputs of

NTypeS 1 Table 5.2.3-1; these outputs are provided for
each zone specified

Table 5.2.12-52: Data for Optional Surface Outputs

Keyword Data Type Data Description

name of airnode for which outputs are desired

AIRNODE 2
(only one airnode allowed for surface outputs)

number associated with the optional outputs of

NTypeS 1
Table 5.2.3-1;

SURF 1 number of surfaces separated by a comma

Table 5.2.12-53: Data for Optional Comfort Outputs

Keyword Data Type Data Description

name of airnode for which outputs are desired

AIRNODE 2
(only one airnode allowed for surface outputs)

number associated with the optional outputs of

NTypeS 1
Table 5.2.3-1;

COMFID 1 number of comfort ID separated by a comma

Multiple output specifications are possible. Thus it is possible to specify different outputs for
different airnodes. There are optional outputs for airnode quantities, for the surfaces within
airnodes or for quantities summed up for a group of arinodes.

5.2.12.13. EXTENSION_WINPOOL
In chapter 5.2.12.3.2.3 – WINDOW-Types, the key word WINID is described. It refers to a
Window ID, that contains information for optical and thermal properties of a glazing, defined with
the program WINDOW 7.4. All window information of this kind can be found in the following
section:

5–153
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

_EXTENSION_WINPOOL_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_WINPOOL_END_

Table 5.2.12-54: Window data used by the Type 56

BERKELEY LAB WINDOW v7.4.6.0 DOE-2 Data File : Multi Band Calculation : generated with Trnsys18.std
Unit System : SI
Name : DOE-2 WINDOW LIB
Desc : GU_ClimaGuard_N_#3_Ar90
Window ID : 3201
Tilt : 90.0
Glazings : 2
Frame : 3 Wood 2.270
Spacer : 2 Class2 0.068 1.550 -0.143
Total Height: 1500.0 mm
Total Width : 1200.0 mm
Glass Height: 1360.3 mm
Glass Width : 1060.3 mm
Mullion : None
Gap Thick Cond dCond Vis dVis Dens dDens Pr dPr
1 Ar90/Air1 16.0 0.01712 5.410 2.062 6.300 1.711 -0.0060 0.687 -0.0001
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Angle 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Hemis
Tsol 0.562 0.562 0.558 0.552 0.544 0.522 0.467 0.353 0.175 0.000 0.483
Abs1 0.104 0.105 0.107 0.110 0.114 0.119 0.125 0.130 0.127 0.000 0.116
Abs2 0.095 0.095 0.097 0.098 0.097 0.095 0.092 0.082 0.051 0.000 0.091
Abs3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Abs4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Abs5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Abs6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Rfsol 0.239 0.238 0.238 0.240 0.246 0.265 0.317 0.435 0.647 1.000 0.300
Rbsol 0.249 0.249 0.250 0.252 0.260 0.280 0.332 0.449 0.666 1.000 0.314
Tvis 0.741 0.740 0.735 0.729 0.718 0.689 0.616 0.465 0.230 0.000 0.638
Rfvis 0.129 0.128 0.129 0.133 0.143 0.170 0.240 0.394 0.653 1.000 0.215
Rbvis 0.126 0.125 0.126 0.129 0.139 0.165 0.230 0.373 0.627 1.000 0.207
SHGC 0.660 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Tvis_daylight: 0.800

Layer ID# 33000 33009 0 0 0 0

Tir 0.000 0.000 0 0 0 0
Emis F 0.860 0.040 0 0 0 0
Emis B 0.860 0.860 0 0 0 0
Thickness(mm) 4.0 4.0 0 0 0 0
Cond(W/m2-K )250.0 250.0 0 0 0 0
Spectral File 33000_GU_Flo 33009_GU_Cli None None None None

Overall and Center of Glass Ig U-values (W/m2-K)

Outdoor Temperature -17.8 C 15.6 C 26.7 C 37.8 C
Solar WdSpd hcout hrout hin
(W/m2) (m/s) (W/m2-K)
0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14
0 6.71 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14
783 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14
783 6.71 0.00 0.00 0.00 1.37 1.37 1.09 1.09 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.14

5.2.12.14. EXTENSION_BuildingGeometry
In Version 17, 3D data for building surfaces can be imported by TRNBuild. This data is stored
in the BUI file in a section between the following keywords:
_EXTENSION_BuildingGeometry_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_BuildingGeometry_END_.
First, a list of the vertices used by the building surfaces is written with the following syntax:

5–154
 Keyword VertexID X-coordinate Y-coordinate Z-coordinate

vertex Unique Integer Value Value Value

value

Note: The VertexID following the keyword “vertex” has to be unique!

Before each zone geometry data a separating blanc line is required. The order of the zones has
to match the order of the ZONEs statement although only the zones with 3D data are included.
In addition, the order of the surfaces has to match the order of the previous zone description in
the BUI file. For each zone with 3D data the data is written with the following syntax:

Keyword Zone name

zone Name of a zone in the

BUI file

A surface definition has to start with the keyword wall or window followed by a unique surfaceID
corresponding to the one in the zone description. Then, a sorted list of previously defined
vertices describing a planar polygon with an outfacing normal is required.

Keyword SurfaceID VertexID VertexID …

Wall, floor, roof , Unique Integer Value Value Value

ceiling or value
window

5.2.12.15. EXTENSION_VirtualSurfaceGeometry
In Version 17.1, not only heat transfer and shading surfaces are imported in the BUI file, but
also so-called virtual surfaces. Virtual surfaces are surfaces which don’t exist in the “real”
building (no heat transfer!) and are drawn for generating closed volumes only. This data is stored
in the BUI file in a section between the following keywords:
_EXTENSION_ VirtualSurfaceGeometry_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_ VirtualSurfaceGeometry_END_.
Before each airnode data a separating blanc line is required. The order of the airnodes has to
match the order of the airnodes although only the airnodes with 3D data and virtual surfaces
are included. The data is written with the following syntax:

Keyword Zone name

airnode Name of the airnode in

the BUI file

A virtual surface definition has to start with the keyword wall or floor or ceiling followed by a
unique surfaceID within the range of 20001 to 29999. Then, a sorted list of previously in the
building geometry defined vertices describing a planar polygon with an outfacing normal is
required.

Keyword SurfaceID VertexID VertexID …

5–155
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

wall or ceiling or Unique Integer Value Value Value

floor value

5.2.12.16. EXTENSION_ShadingGeometry
In Version 17, 3D data of shader surfaces can be imported by TRNBuild. This data is stored in
the BUI file in a section between the following keywords:
_EXTENSION_ ExternalShadingGeometry_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_ ExternalShadingGeometry_END_.
First, a list of the vertices used by the shader surfaces is written with the following syntax:

Keyword VertexID X-coordinate Y-coordinate Z-coordinate

vertex Unique Integer Value Value Value

value

Note: The VertexID following the keyword “vertex” has to be unique!

After the vertex definition a banc line is required.
A surface definition has to start with the keyword shader followed by a unique surfaceID within
the range of 10001 to 19999. Then, a sorted list of previously defined vertices describing a
planar polygon is required.

Keyword SurfaceID VertexID VertexID …

shader Unique Integer Value Value Value

value

5.2.12.17. EXTENSION_GEOPositionGeomtry
In Version 17, 3D data for the position of comfort or gain types can be entered in TRNBuild.
This data is stored in the BUI file in a section between the following keywords
_EXTENSION_ GeoPositionGeometry_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_ GeoPositionGeometry_END_.
Before each zone geometry data a separating blanc line is required. The order of the zones has
to match the order of the ZONEs statement although only the zones with 3D data are included.
For each zone with 3D data the data is written with the following syntax:

Keyword Zone name

zone Name of a zone in the

BUI file

5–156
For each zone, the geometrical position (GEOPos) for gains (keyword: ggeopos) and comfort
(keyword: cgeopos) is defined by the GEOposID used in the airnode gain / comfort description.
The GEOPosID has to be unique!

Keyword GEOPosID X-coordinate Y-coordinate Z-coordinate

ggeopos or Unique Integer Value Value Value

cgeopos value

5.2.12.18. EXTENSION_ DaylightSensorPoints

In Version 18, 3D data for the position of daylight sensors can be entered in TRNBuild. This
data is stored in the BUI file in a section between the following keywords
_EXTENSION_DaylightSensorPoints_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_DaylightSensorPoints_END_
Before each zone geometry data a separating blanc line is required. The order of the zones
have to match the order of the ZONEs statement although only the zones with 3D data are
included. For each zone with 3D data the data is written with the following syntax:

Keyword Zone name

zone Name of a zone in the

BUI file

For each zone, the geometrical position (GEOPos) for daylight sensor points (keyword:
dgeopos) is defined by the GEOposID used in the airnode gain. The GEOPosID have to be
unique!

Keyword GEOPosID X-coordinate Y-coordinate Z-coordinate

dgeopos Unique Integer Value Value Value

value

5.2.12.19. EXTENSION_AdditionalDaylightGeometry
In Version 18, additional 3D data for daylight calculation can be entered. This data is stored in
the BUI file in a section between the following keywords
_EXTENSION_AdditionalDaylightGeometry_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_AdditionalDaylightGeometry_END_

First, a list of the vertices used by the shader surfaces is written with the following syntax:

Keyword VertexID X-coordinate Y-coordinate Z-coordinate

5–157
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

vertex Unique Integer Value Value Value

value

Note: The VertexID following the keyword “vertex” must be unique!

After the vertex definition, a blanc line is required.
The additional daylight geometry surface definition must start with the keyword surface, followed
by a radiance material from the radiance material library and a unique surfaceID within the range
of 10001 to 19999. Then, a sorted list of previously defined vertices describing a planar polygon
is required.

Keyword Material SurfaceID VertexID VertexID …

surface Rad Unique Value Value Value

material Integer value

Note: The keyword surface is used for fixes, non-movable surfaces.

In addition to fixed surfaces, movable surfaces like shading devices for windows can be defined.
Their definition must start with the keyword shdX, where X represents an integer, starting with
shd2. This keyword represents the shading state, assigned by the variable DLSHADE.
shdX is followed by a radiance material from the radiance material library and a unique
surfaceID within the range of 10001 to 19999. Then, a sorted list of previously defined vertices
describing a planar polygon is required.

Keyword Material SurfaceID VertexID VertexID …

shd2; shd3; Rad Unique Value Value Value

shd4; …, … material Integer value

Note: The keyword shdX is used for movable surfaces like shaders.

5.2.12.20. EXTENSION_VAMPARAMS
In Version 18, additional data for communication with other programs, etc. can be placed in this
section. This data is stored in the BUI file in a section between the following keywords
_EXTENSION_VAMPARAMS_START_
….
…
…
…
_EXTENSION_VAMPARAMS_END_

5–158
5.3. Trnsys Component Configuration
5.3.1. Parameters
PARAMETER NO. DESCRIPTION

1 LUb FORTRAN logical unit for reading the *.bui file written by
TRNBuild

2 T*-MODE Switch for calculation of star network, <1: only at start of

simulation, >1: every iteration. If automatic heat transfer
coefficients are used or one heat transfer coefficient is an
input/schedule Type56 automatically performs the calculation
of star network each iteration.

3 Aop Weighting factor for operative room temperature

Top = Aop  Tair + (1-Aop)  Tmean_radiant

4 (optional) Not used

5 (optional) Not used

6 (optional) Not used

7 – 11 (optional) Not used (reserved for the Add-on TRNFlow)

12 (optional) Tol_T Tolerance of the airnode temperature used for the internal
iteration [K] (default = 0.01K)

13 (optional) MaxITER Maximum number of internal iterations [-]

(default = 50).

14 (optional) Zeta Minimum relaxation factor for the internal iteration [-]
(default = 0.1)

5–159
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.3.2. Inputs
TRNBuild is called before each building simulation automatically and creates a file for the
building description (*.BLD) and another for the transfer function coefficients (*.TRN) that
characterize the wall constructions. These two files are assigned internally to Type 56 and
include all information Type56 needs about the building itself.
For the new detailed radiation model Type 56 needs the new matrix files as inputs. These files
are connected automatically by their names, no logical unit has to be defined.

*.BUI *.shm *.ism *.vfm

Building Input Shading Matrix Insolation Matrix ViewFaktorMatrix

TYPE 56
Multizone Building

In addition, TRNBuild generates an information file (*.INF) with a list of required inputs and
available outputs. The first seven inputs are fixed where as the following depend on the project
definition.

Input NO. DESCRIPTION

1 TAMB Ambient air temperature [°C]

2 RELHUMAMB Relative humidity of ambient [%]

3 TSKY Effective sky temperature for longwave radiation exchange of

external surfaces with the sky [°C]

4 TSGRD Effective “ground” surface temperature for longwave

radiation exchange with outside surfaces [°C]
This temperature represents all surface temperatures except
the sky temperatures which are in the view to the outside of
an external surface.
Note: This surface temperature is used for longwave
radiation exchange of external surface only!!

5 AZEN Solar zenith angle [deg]

(Note: For internal radiaton calculation this input has to be
connected to a weather component like Type 15,16,99)

6 AAZM Solar azimuth angle [deg]

(0=facing equator, 90=facing west, -90=270=facing east)
This input can be used to rotate the building by an angle
without changing the 3D surface data and orientation
definition. e.g. for a rotation of 45 degrees “ TURN = 45 “ ,
this input has to include the rotation angle (AAZM_Type56 =
SolarAzimuthAngle – TURN)

5–160
 7 GRDREF Ground reflection [-]
In Trnsys 18, this input overwrites the ground reflection
given by the connected weather component.
For internal calculation it used to calculate the ground
refeflection; for external radiation calculation it is used for
calculating the sky diffuse radiation from the given total
diffuse radiation only.

The user must specify the proper input connections in the Trnsys studio and Trnsys input file,
respectively.

5.3.3. Outputs
For Type 56 a large number of outputs are available (see section 5.2.3.4 ). The user defines the
outputs within TRNBuild. TRNBuild is called before each building simulation automatically and
generates an information file (*.INF) with a list of required inputs and available outputs.

5–161
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4. Mathematical Description of Type 56

The general case, which does not include the simplified model of the heating and cooling
equipment, is presented first. If separate equipment components are used, they can be coupled
to the airnodes as either internal convective gains or ventilation gains. Following this, the
simplified method of providing heating and cooling equipment within the Type 56 component is
described. Another section will cover the use of a simulation timestep that is not equal to the
timebase on which the wall transfer function relationships are based. Finally, descriptions of the
optical and thermal window model, the way in which solar and internal radiation are distributed
within each zone, the moisture balance calculations and the integrated model for thermo-active
walls are given.

5.4.1. Thermal Zone /Airnode

The building model in Type 56 is an energy balance model. Since version 17 a zone may have
more than one airnode. The thermal capacity of the air volume and capacities which are closely
connected with the air node (furniture, for example). Thus the node capacity is a separate input
in addition to the volume.

Figure 5.4.1-1: Heat balance on the air node

5.4.1.1. Convective Heat Flux to the Air Node

𝑄̇𝑖 = 𝑄̇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓,𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡,𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑔,𝑐,𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝐼𝑆𝐻𝐶𝐶𝐼,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-1

Where
𝑄̇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓,𝑖 is the convective gain from surfaces
𝑄̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 the infiltration gains (air flow from outside only), given by

𝑄̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 = 𝑉̇ ∙ 𝜌 ∙ 𝑐𝑝 (𝑇𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒,𝑖 − 𝑇𝑎𝑖𝑟 ) Eq. 5.4.1-2

5–162
𝑄̇𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡,𝑖 is the ventilation gains (air flow from a user-defined source, like an HVAC system, given
by

𝑄̇𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡,𝑖 = 𝑉̇ ∙ 𝜌 ∙ 𝑐𝑝 (𝑇𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛,𝑖 − 𝑇𝑎𝑖𝑟 ) Eq. 5.4.1-3

𝑄̇𝑔,𝑐,𝑖 is the internal convective gains (by people, equipment, illumination, radiators, etc.), and
𝑄̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑖 is the gains due to (connective) air flow from airnode I or boundary condition, given by

𝑄̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑖 = 𝑉̇ ∙ 𝜌 ∙ 𝑐𝑝 (𝑇𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒,𝑖 − 𝑇𝑎𝑖𝑟 ) Eq. 5.4.1-4

𝑄̇𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 the fraction of solar radiation entering an airnode through external windows which is
immediately transferred as a convective gain to the internal air (see 5.4.1.9)
𝑄̇𝐼𝑆𝐻𝐶𝐶,𝑖 is the absorbed solar radiation on all internal shading devices of zone and directly
transferred as a convective gain to the internal air

5.4.1.2. Coupling
The coupling statement allows the definition an air mass flow a airnode receives from another
airnode, considered as a heat flow from or to the air node. The statement does not automatically
define the air flow back to the adjacent airnode as would occur in an interzonal air exchange.
To consider this return flow, the corresponding coupling must be defined in the adjacent airnode
to receive the same air flow in return. The reason for this convention is to allow the user to
describe cross ventilation or a ventilation circle within 3 or more airnodes (e.g., thermosyphon
through a 2 story winter-garden,).
Coupl. ventilation
Coupl.
Z1 Z2 Coupl. Z1 Z2

interzonal airchange cross ventilation

coupl.

Z1

coupl.

coupl.
Z3 Z2

Ventilation circle
Note: There is no air balance check in Type 56. The user can empty or overload a
airnode by couplings. Be sure that the specified air flows into a airnode by coupling,
ventilation, and infiltration are physically meaningful.

5–163
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.1.3. Radiative Heat Flows (only) to the Walls and Windows

q
wall gain

solar gains by windows are

distributed to all walls and
rad. windows-faces
gain
Figure 5.4.1-2: Radiative energy flows considering one wall with its surface temperature node.

𝑄̇𝑟,𝑤𝑖 = 𝑄̇𝑔,𝑟,𝑖,𝑤𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑠𝑜𝑙,𝑤𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑙𝑜𝑛𝑔,𝑤𝑖 + 𝑄̇𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙−𝑔𝑎𝑖𝑛 Eq. 5.4.1-5

where 𝑄̇𝑟,𝑤𝑖 is the radiative gains for the wall surface temperature node, 𝑄̇𝑔,𝑟,𝑖,𝑤𝑖 is the radiative
airnode internal gains received by wall, 𝑄̇𝑠𝑜𝑙,𝑤𝑖 is the solar gains through zone windows received
by walls, 𝑄̇𝑙𝑜𝑛𝑔,𝑤𝑖 is the longwave radiation exchange between this wall and all other walls and
windows (i =1), and 𝑄̇𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙−𝑔𝑎𝑖𝑛 is the user-specified heat flow to the wall or window surface. All
of these quantities are given in kJ/h.

5.4.1.4. Integration of Walls and Windows

Figure 5.4.1-3 shows the heat fluxes and temperatures that characterize the thermal behavior
of any wall or window. The nomenclature used in this figure is defined as follows:

𝑆𝑠,𝑖 Radiation heat flux absorbed at the inside surface (solar and radiative gains)

𝑆𝑠,𝑜 Radiation heat flux absorbed at the outside surface (solar gains)

𝑞̇ 𝑟,𝑠,𝑖 Net radiative heat transfer with all other surfaces within the zone

𝑞̇ 𝑟,𝑠,𝑜 Net radiative heat transfer with all surfaces in view of the outside surface

𝑞̇ 𝑤,𝑔,𝑖 User defined heat flux to the wall or window surface

𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖 Conduction heat flux from the wall at the inside surface

𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑜 Into the wall at the outside surface

𝑞̇ 𝑐,𝑠,𝑖 Convection heat flux from the inside surface to the air

𝑞̇ 𝑐,𝑠,𝑜 Convection heat flux to the outside surface from the boundary/ambient

5–164
 𝑇𝑠,𝑖 Inside surface temperature

T𝑠,𝑜 Outside surface temperature

Figure 5.4.1-3: Surface Heat Fluxes and Temperatures

The walls are modeled according to the transfer function relationships of Mitalas and Arseneault
[1,2,6] defined from surface to surface. For any wall, the heat conduction at the surfaces are:
𝑛𝑏𝑠 𝑛𝑐𝑠 𝑛𝑑𝑠
𝑘 𝑘
𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖 = ∑ 𝑏𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑜
𝑘
− ∑ 𝑐𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑖 − ∑ 𝑑𝑠𝑘 𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-6
𝑘=0 𝑘=0 𝑘=1

𝑛 𝑎𝑠 𝑛 𝑏𝑠 𝑛𝑑𝑠
Eq. 5.4.1-7
𝑘 𝑘
𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑜 = ∑ 𝑎𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑜
𝑘
− ∑ 𝑏𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑖 − ∑ 𝑑𝑠𝑘 𝑞̇ 𝑠,0
𝑘=0 𝑘=0 𝑘=1

These time series equations in terms of surface temperatures and heat fluxes are evaluated at
equal time intervals. The superscript k refers to the term in the time series. The current time is
k=0, the previous time is for k=1, etc. The time-base on which these calculations are based is
specified by the user within the TRNBuild description. The coefficients of the time series (a's,
b's, c's, and d's) are determined within the TRNBuild program using the z-transfer function
routines of reference [2].
A window is thermally considered as an external wall with no thermal mass, partially transparent
to solar, but opaque to long-wave internal gains. Long-wave absorption is considered to occur
only at the surfaces. In the energy balance calculation of the Type 56, the window is described
as a 2-node model shown in Figure 5.4.1-4. The detailed optical and thermal window model is
described in Section 5.4.2. Eq. 5.4.1-6 to Eq. 5.4.1-33 are valid for a window with:

𝑎𝑠𝑜 = 𝑏𝑠𝑜 = 𝑐𝑠𝑜 = 𝑑𝑠𝑜 = 𝑈𝑔,𝑠

𝑎𝑠𝑘 = 𝑏𝑠𝑘 = 𝑐𝑠𝑘 = 𝑑𝑠𝑘 = 0 for k>0.

5–165
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.4.1-4: Two-node window model used in th Type56 energy balance equation.

5.4.1.5. Transfer Function Method by Mitalas

The method of the transfer function or response factors can be described as the method to tell
the "thermal history" of the wall. The wall is considered as a black box. The number of time-
steps (𝑘) related to the time-base (defined by the user) shows whether the wall is a heavy wall
with a high thermal mass (𝑘 ≤ 20) or if only a few time-steps have to be considered to describe
the thermal behavior of this wall. If the time-base of the considered wall is higher than the time-
constant, the calculation of the Transfer-function matrix coefficients is stopped. Therefore such
a "thin" wall can be replaced by a resistance definition neglecting the thermal mass. As an
example, the Figure 5.4.1-5 shows the different material layers of a wall. The wall example
consists of three layers with concrete, mineral wool and gypsum from outside to inside.

Figure 5.4.1-5: Real wall and black box model of the wall

5–166
Material Thickness Conductivity Capacity Density
data [m] kJ/hmK kJ/kgK kg/m3

Concrete 0.025 7.56 1.0 2400

Mineral Wool 0.08 0.144 1.0 40

Gypsum 0.02 2.52 1.0 1400

Using the transfer function method, the TRNBuild-program calculates the transfer function
coefficients, listed below for the example wall.

---------- WALL Type EXAMPLE ----------

THERMAL CONDUCTANCE, U= 1.76429 kJ/h m2K; U-value= 0.45239 W/m2K

TRANSFERFUNCTION COEFFICIENTS

K A B C D

0 3.0402072E+01 8.6597596E-01 6.2473097E+01 1.0000000E+00

1 -2.8791436E+01 8.7958309E-01 -6.1044043E+01 -5.5725114E-03
2 1.4382785E-01 8.9032318E-03 3.2541274E-01 1.0083948E-07
3 -1.0589132E-06 4.0042651E-07 -4.7183532E-06
SUM 1.7544627E+00 1.7544627E+00 1.7544627E+00 9.9442759E-01

Figure 5.4.1-6: Transfer function equation-system (Mitalas)

For the test wall, the coefficient table looks like that above. In addition to the transfer function
coefficients, the listing contains 𝑎 calculation of the heat conduction value 𝑈 of the wall
construction and the total heat transfer coefficient 𝑘 considering 𝑎 constant combined
(convective+radiative) heat transfer (𝛼𝑖 , 𝛼𝑜 ) for the inside and outside surface.
Note: these combined heat transfer coefficients are not used during the simulation. For
the calculation of the U-values stated in the information file (*.INF), the following
combined heat transfer coefficients are used:

1 𝑊 −1
= 0.13 [ 2 ]
𝛼𝑖 𝑚 𝐾

1 𝑊 −1
= 0.04 [ 2 ]
𝛼𝑜 𝑚 𝐾

A dynamic simulation considering the thermal mass of a wall element does not use these values
explicitly, but is describing the thermal resistance implicit in transient heat flows into and out of
the wall surfaces. A validation report for the transfer function method and the whole Type 56
building model was prepared by Peter Voit [7] using detailed measurements from the CEC
research program PASSYS.

5–167
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.1.6. The Long-Wave Radiation

Standard model: Star network
For the star network approach a zone is restricted to a single airnode. The long-wave radiation
exchange between the surfaces within the airnode and the convective heat flux from the inside
surfaces to the airnode air are approximated using the star network given by Seem [3] and
represented in Figure 5.4.1-7. This method uses an artificial temperature node (𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟 ) to
consider the parallel energy flow from a wall surface by convection to the air node and by
radiation to other wall and window elements. Comparisons to the detailed building model
JOULOTTA from the University of Lund, Sweden done by S. Holst, ZAE Munich [4], show a
good agreement for the surface temperatures. A single node model using a combined
convective and radiative heat transfer coefficient shows much higher differences (IEA Task 13
report,[7]).

1
𝑅𝑆𝑇𝐴𝑅,𝑖 = 𝑓(𝛼𝑖 , 𝐴𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓,𝑖 ) = (𝑇𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑟 − 𝑇𝑖 ) Eq. 5.4.1-8
𝑄𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓,𝑖

Methods to calculate the resistances 𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 and 𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 can be found in reference [3]. Area ratios
are used in these calculations to find the absorption factors between all surfaces. The star
temperature can be used to calculate a net radiative and convective heat flux from the inside
wall surface:

𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑠,𝑖 = 𝑞̇ 𝑐,𝑠,𝑖 + 𝑞̇ 𝑟,𝑠,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-9

then,

1
𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑠,𝑖 = (𝑇 − 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟 ) Eq. 5.4.1-10
𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 𝐴𝑠,𝑖 𝑠,𝑖

where 𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑠,𝑖 is the combined convective and radiative heat flux, and 𝐴𝑠,𝑖 is the inside surface
area.

.. . . .
q +q +q +q .
+ qsolair+ qISHCCI,i

.
q

. .
q +q R . .
q +q

T T
. .
R R
q q
T

S S
R
WG
. .
WG
q +q
S
WG
T

.
q

5–168
 Figure 5.4.1-7: Star network for a zone with three surfaces.

For external surfaces the long-wave radiation exchange at the outside surface is considered
explicitly using a sky temperature, 𝑇𝑠𝑘𝑦 , which is an input to the Type 56 model and a view factor
to the sky, 𝑓𝑠,𝑠𝑘𝑦 and a fictive ground temperature 𝑇𝑠𝑔𝑟𝑑 and the view factor (1 − 𝑓𝑠,𝑠𝑘𝑦 ) for each
external surface. The total heat transfer is given as the sum of convective and radiative heat
transfer:

𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑠,𝑜 = 𝑞̇ 𝑐,𝑠,𝑜 − 𝑞̇ 𝑟,𝑠,𝑜 Eq. 5.4.1-11

with

𝑞̇ 𝑐,𝑠,𝑜 = ℎ𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑠,𝑜 (𝑇𝑎,𝑠 − 𝑇𝑠,𝑜 ) Eq. 5.4.1-12

4 4
𝑞̇ 𝑟,𝑠,𝑜 = 𝜎𝜀𝑠.𝑜 (𝑇𝑠,𝑜 − 𝑇𝑓𝑠𝑘𝑦 ) Eq. 5.4.1-13

𝑇𝑓𝑠𝑘𝑦 = (1 − 𝑓𝑠,𝑠𝑘𝑦 ) ∙ 𝑇𝑠𝑔𝑟𝑑 − 𝑓𝑠,𝑠𝑘𝑦 ∙ 𝑇𝑠𝑘𝑦 Eq. 5.4.1-14

where

𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑠,𝑜 Combined convective and radiative heat flux to the surface

𝑞̇ 𝑐,𝑠,𝑜 Convective heat flux to the surface

𝑞̇ 𝑟,𝑠,𝑜 Radiative heat flux to the surface

ℎ𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑠,𝑜 Convective heat transfer coefficient at the outside surface

𝑓𝑠𝑘𝑦 Fraction of the sky seen by the outside surface1

𝑇𝑠𝑘𝑦 Fictive sky temperature used for long-wave radiation exchange

𝑇𝑠𝑔𝑟𝑑 Fictive ground temperature used for long wave radiation exchange

Es,o Long-wave emissivity of outside surface (for walls: userdefined; for windows:
read from window library)

σ Stephan-Boltzmann constant

Energy balances at the surfaces give:

𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖 = 𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑠,𝑖 + 𝑆𝑠,𝑖 + 𝑊𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑔𝑎𝑖𝑛 Eq. 5.4.1-15

𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑜 = 𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑠,𝑜 + 𝑆𝑠,𝑜 Eq. 5.4.1-16

For internal surfaces 𝑆𝑠,𝑖 can include both solar radiative and long-wave radiation generated
form internal objects such as people or furniture.
Wallgain is a user-defined energy flow to the inside wall or window surfaces. It can describe
solar gains changing during the day due to different sun positions or might be used as a simple
way to model a floor heating or a chilled ceiling system. For external surfaces, 𝑆𝑠,𝑖 consists of
solar radiation only.

1
For a vertical wall with no buildings nearby, a reasonable value for fsky is 0.5. If there are buildings in front of the
wall obstructing the view of the sky, the value for fsky would be lower than 0.5. For a horizontal roof with only the sky
in view, fsky would be 1.0.
5–169
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Detailed Model: Gebhart Method

In comparison to the standard model there is no artificial star node, because the long-wave
radiative heat transfer is treated separately.

standard model detailed model

TAIR TAIR

TSTAR
T1 T3 T1 T3

T2 T2

combined convective convective radiative

Figure 5.4.1-8: Standard and detailed radiation model in comparison for a zone with three surfaces.

The derivation of the describing equations for the detailed longwave radiation heat transfer is
based on the following assumptions:
1. Absorption of radiation on a surface is indicated by a negative sign of the corresponding
heat flux, whereas net emission means a positive heat flux.
2. All surfaces are isothermal.
3. All surfaces are perfect opaque for longwave radiation.
4. All surfaces are (diffuse) gray. This signifies that emissivity and absorptivity do depend
neither on wavelength nor on direction.
5. ρir is the hemispherical longwave reflecitvity
The so-called Gebhart-Factor Gir,j→k [1,2] is defined as the fraction of the emission from surface
Aj that reaches surface Ak and is absorbed. Gir,j→k includes all the paths for reaching Ak , that is,
the direct paths and paths by means of one or multiple reflections. The abbreviation IR stands
for “infrared”, meaning the longwave range of the radiation spectrum.
Using the assumptions from above the (dimensionless) Gebhart matrix for longwave radiation
can be written as

𝐺𝑖𝑟 = (𝐼 − 𝐹𝜌𝑖𝑟 )−1 𝐹𝜀𝑖𝑟 Eq. 5.4.1-17

Where ρir and εir are diagonal matrices describing reflectivity and emissivity, respectively. The
variable I describes the identity matrix. The view factor (written by F ) is defined as the fraction
of diffusely radiated energy leaving surface A that is incident on surface B. For details regarding
view factors see 5.5.2.
∗ 𝑊
Introducing the auxiliary matrix 𝐺𝑖𝑟 with dimension [ 4] it can be shown that the net heat flux
𝐾
vector 𝑄̇𝑖𝑟 longwave radiation in an enclosure is given by

𝑄̇𝑖𝑟 = 𝐺𝑖𝑟
∗ 4
𝑇 Eq. 5.4.1-18

with

5–170
 ∗ 𝑇
𝐺𝑖𝑟 = (𝐼 − 𝐺𝑖𝑟 )𝐴𝜀𝜎 Eq. 5.4.1-19

𝑇
T is the temperature vector in the enclosure, 𝐺𝑖𝑟 is the transpose of Gir , σ the Stefan–Boltzmann
constant and 𝐴 the diagonal matrix describing the surface areas.
∗
The auxiliary matrix 𝐺𝑖𝑟 only depends on optical (emissivity, reflectivity) and geometrical (view
factor, area) properties as well as on the Stefan–Boltzmann constant. If this matrix is calculated
first, the net heat flux of all surfaces in the enclosure can simultaneously be calculated by one
simple matrix multiplication with the fourth power of the temperature vector.
Gebhart, B.: Heat Transfer, 2. ed, pp. 150-163, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1971
Gebhart, B.: Surface Temperature Calculations in Radiant Surroundings of Arbitrary Complexity
– for Gray, Diffuse Radiation, Int. J. Heat mass Transfer, vol. 3, no. 4, pp. 341 – 346, 1961.

5.4.1.7. Detailed Radiation Transfer Model

E. Radiation Energy Balance on inside surfaces
Hence the heat flux balance for detailed radiation transfer at the inside surface gives

Eq. 5.4.1-20
𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑚 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑚 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡(𝑗)
𝑄̇𝑠,𝑖 = − (𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑙 + 𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑙
𝑠𝑒𝑐
+ 𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 + 𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙
𝑠𝑒𝑐
+ ∑ 𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 + 𝑄̇𝑖𝑟 + 𝑄̇𝑝𝑠 ) + 𝑄̇𝑤𝑔
𝑗

where

𝑄̇𝑠,𝑖 radiation driven heat flux at the inside surface

𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑚
𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑙 heat flux caused by direct solar radiation originating from external windows
(primary distribution of non-reflected direct solar radiation)

𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑟𝑠𝑜𝑙
𝑠𝑒𝑐 heat flux caused by direct solar radiation originating from internal windows
(secondary distribution of single-reflected direct solar radiation)

𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑚
𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 heat flux caused by diffuse solar radiation originating from external windows
(primary distribution of non-reflected diffuse solar radiation)

𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙
𝑠𝑒𝑐 heat flux caused by diffuse solar radiation originating from internal windows
(secondary distribution of single-reflected diffuse solar radiation)

𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡(𝑗)
𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 heat flux caused by diffuse solar radiation originating from internal windows
after passing the second internal window. That is, all solar radiation is treated
as diffuse radiation (distribution of multiple-reflected diffuse solar radiation,
multiple means two or more reflections)

𝑄̇𝑖𝑟 heat flux caused by longwave radiation

𝑄̇𝑝𝑠 heat flux caused by point sources emitting longwave radiation

𝑄̇𝑤𝑔 wallgain - user-defined energy flow to the inside wall or window surfaces

[1] Gebhart, B.: Heat Transfer, 2. ed, pp. 150-163, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1971
[2] Gebhart, B.: Surface Temperatur Calculations in Radiant Surroundings of Arbitrary
Complexity – for Gray, Diffuse Radiation, Int. J. Heat mass Transfer, vol. 3, no. 4, pp. 341 –
346, 1961.

5–171
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.1.8. Distribution of Long-Wave Radiation Internal gains

Standard Model: Area weighted
All surfaces are assumed to be black for longwave radiative exchange and radiative internal
gains. These gains are distributed according to area ratios. The fraction of the internal radiative
gains for any zone that is adsorbed by a surface s is

𝐴𝑠
𝑓1,𝑠 = 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-21
∑ 𝐴𝑠

Detailed Model: Gebhart Method

For the description of long-wave radiation sources the same assumptions as for the gray
(temperature driven) surfaces in chapter 5.4.1.6 are valid. In addition, the following assumption
is made:
6. Radiation sources are point sources. That means they have negligible extent (the equivalent
of an infinitesimal area) and cannot absorb radiation.
Using the point source view factor matrix 𝐹 ° the point source (“ps”) auxiliary matrix 𝐺𝑝𝑠
∗
can be
written as

∗ 𝑇
𝐺𝑝𝑠 = −(𝐺𝑖𝑟 𝐴𝜌𝑖𝑟 + 𝐴𝜀𝑖𝑟 ) ∙ (𝐹°𝐴−1 )𝑇 Eq. 5.4.1-22

where 𝐺𝑖𝑟 is the Gebhart matrix from Eq. 5.4.1-17.

Then the net heat flux vector 𝑄̇𝑝𝑠 can be given in terms of the point source radiation power
vector 𝑄̇ ° (with one component for each point source in the enclosure) by

𝑄̇𝑝𝑠 = 𝐺𝑝𝑠
∗ ̇
𝑄° Eq. 5.4.1-23

With this relation the net heat flux on each surface caused by point heat sources can again
easily be determined by a simple matrix multiplication. In comparison to Eq. 5.4.1-18, the driving
∗
force now is the power from the point sources which is distributed by 𝐺𝑝𝑠 instead of the driving
∗
force of thermal radiation of all surfaces distributed by 𝐺𝑖𝑟 .

5.4.1.9. Distribution of Solar Radiation

In version 17.1, a so-called solar to air factor which is used in several standards is integrated.
The solar to air factor 𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 defines the fraction of solar radiation entering an airnode through
external windows which is immediately transferred as a convective gain to the internal air.

𝑄̇𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 = 𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 ∙ (𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠,𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑖 + 𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠,𝑑𝑖𝑟,𝑖 ) Eq. 5.4.1-24

Where
𝑄𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 solar radiation entering the airnode through external windows which is immediately
transferred as a radiative gain to the airnode 𝑖
𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 is the solar to air fraction to the airnode 𝑖
𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠,𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑖 is the diffuse solar radiation transmitted through all external windows of the airnode 𝑖
𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠,𝑑𝑖𝑟,𝑖 is the direct solar radiation transmitted through all external windows of the airnode 𝑖
The remaining incoming solar radiation is distributed by distribution factors. The applied
distribution factor depend on the type of solar radiation: diffuse and direct, respectively.

5–172
Direct radiation - standard model:
The remaining incoming (primary) direct solar radiation is distributed according to the
distribution coefficients (GEOSURF) defined in the building description. These values are
distribution factors related to the total direct solar radiation entering the zone (not airnode!!) and
not related to a surface area. The sum of GEOSURF values given for all inside surfaces of a
zone should sum up to 1 at all times. The fraction of remaining incoming direct solar that is
absorbed by any surface i is given by the product of solar absorptance 𝛼𝑠 value times the
GEOSURF value given for this surface s. If the GEOSURF values for all surfaces of a zone are
set to zero, all direct solar radiation entering this zone is treated as diffuse radiation (like in
Trnsys 14.2).
Note: As for the distribution of remaining primary direct solar radiation there is no
dependence on the surface area, it is possible to concentrate all direct solar to a small
surface by giving it a high value of GEOSURF. This would result in very high surface
temperatures and possible instabilities in solving the energy balance equations of Type
56!
With the GEOSURF values solar beam radiation might be distributed even when passing
internal windows between zones up to two passages. After passing the second internal window
all solar radiation is treated as diffuse radiation. To pass direct solar radiation over several zones
like in a atria from the top zone to the middle zone to the bottom zone a fictive window between
top and bottom zone might be used.

Direct radiation - detailed model:

For a detailed treatment of shortwave beam radiation shading and distribution the multizone
building model reads in the sunlit factor matrices generated by TRNBuild at the beginning of the
simulation. For each time step the current sunlit fraction of surfaces are determined by a bilinear
interpolation of the four nearest center points with respect to the sun’s actual position.
The matrices are used for distributing primary beam radiation entering a zone through external
windows only. For direct radiation entering a zone through adjacent windows the standard
model based on userdefined GEOSURF values is used.
Note: For the detailed model the zone (not airnode!) has to be a convex and closed volume!!

Diffuse radiation - standard model:

In general, the diffuse solar radiation within a zone is distributed to the surfaces of a zone acc.
to transmission-absorption weighted area factors.

(1−𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 )∙𝐴𝑠
𝑓𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠,𝑠 = ∑
(1−𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 )∙𝐴𝑠
all_surfaces_of_zone
Eq. 5.4.1-25

where

𝐴𝑠 the area of the surface

𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 the reflectance for diffuse solar radiation of the surface

Wall surfaces are assumed to have no transmission losses:

𝜏𝑠 = 0 Eq. 5.4.1-26

𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 = 1 − 𝛼𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-27

For windows, the transmission losses are considered by

5–173
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 = 1 − 𝛼𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 − 𝜏𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-28

where 𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠 is the reflectance for diffuse solar radiation from inside.

In Version 17.1, the primary distribution is improved such that diffuse radiation entering a zone
through an external window is distributed to all other surfaces except the window itself.
Therefore, a modified so-called primary diffuse distribution factor 𝑓𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑝𝑟,𝑠 is applied:

𝑒𝑥𝑡. 𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠,𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑤 𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠,𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠

(∑𝑤=1 − )
1 − 𝑓𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠,𝑤 1 − 𝑓𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠,𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-29
𝑓𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑝𝑟,𝑠 = 𝑓𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠,𝑠 ∙
∑𝑒𝑥𝑡.
𝑤=1
𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒
𝐼𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠,𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑤

Diffuse radiation - detailed model (Gebhart Method)

In order to use a mathematical description similar to the long wave case, all surfaces are
assumed to be transparent. That means solar radiation enters the zone from outside. The
surfaces are not emitting radiation. They are assumed to be “passive” because they are only
reflecting, absorbing and/or transmitting solar radiation originating from outside of the zone.
Based on this idea again a (solar) Gebhart matrix can be created. For opaque surfaces (walls)
the transmitted diffuse solar radiation is zero.
The derivation of the describing equations for the detailed diffuse solar radiation heat transfer
is based on the following assumptions:
1. All surfaces are assumed to be transparent (opaque surfaces are considered later).
2. Radiation leaving a surface is is indicated by a positive sign of the corresponding heat flux.
3. 𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 is the hemispherical solar reflectivity.
The Gebhart-Factor 𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙,𝑗⟶𝑘 for diffuse solar radiation is defined as the fraction of transmitted
solar radiation through surface 𝐴𝑗 that reaches surface 𝐴𝑘 and is not reflected. 𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙,𝑗⟶𝑘
includes all the paths for reaching 𝐴𝑘 , that is, the direct paths and paths by means of one or
multiple reflections. The abbreviation “difsol” stands for diffuse solar radiation.
Using the assumptions from above the (dimensionless) Gebhart matrix for diffuse solar radiation
can be written as

−1 Eq. 5.4.1-30
𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 = (𝐼 − 𝐹𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 ) 𝐹(𝐼 − 𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 )

Where 𝜌𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 is a diagonal matrix. The variable I describes the identity matrix, 𝐹 again stands
for the view factor matrix.
∗
Using the auxiliary matrix 𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 with dimension [𝑚2 ] it can be shown that the net heat flux
vector 𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 for diffuse solar radiation in an enclosure is given by

𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 = 𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙
∗
𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 Eq. 5.4.1-31

with

∗ 𝑇
𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 = −𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 𝐴 Eq. 5.4.1-32

𝑇
𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 is the transpose of 𝐺𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 and 𝐴 is the diagonal matrix describing the surface areas.
The driving force for diffuse solar radiation is the vector 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 with one component 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙,𝑘 for
each surface 𝐴𝑘 of the enclosure. 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙,𝑘 is equal to the transmitted part of the incident diffuse
solar on the outside of surface 𝐴𝑘 leaving the inner side. Walls are perfect opaque to solar
𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙
radiation and therefore 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙,𝑘 = 0. 𝑄̇𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 is determined by a matrix multiplication with the
driving force 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓𝑠𝑜𝑙 .
5–174
5.4.1.10. External Walls
It is possible to combine Eq. 5.4.1-7 to Eq. 5.4.1-16 to express the inside surface heat flux for
an external wall as a function of the boundary air temperatures:

𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖 = 𝐵𝑠 𝑇𝑎,𝑠 − 𝐶𝑠 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑠 + 𝐷𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-33

where

𝑒𝑠 ℎ𝑠,𝑜
𝐵𝑠 = Eq. 5.4.1-34
(1 − 𝑓𝑠 )

𝑓𝑠 1
𝐶𝑠 = ( ) Eq. 5.4.1-35
(𝑓𝑠 − 1) 𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 𝐴𝑠,𝑖

𝑓𝑠 𝑆𝑠,𝑖 + 𝑒𝑠 (𝑆𝑠,𝑜 − 𝑘𝑠,𝑜 ) + 𝐾𝑠,𝑖

𝐷𝑠 = Eq. 5.4.1-36
(1 − 𝑓𝑠 )

𝑏𝑠𝑜
𝑒𝑠 = Eq. 5.4.1-37
𝑎𝑠𝑜 + ℎ𝑠,𝑜

𝑓𝑠 = (𝑏𝑠𝑜 𝑒𝑠 − 𝑐𝑠𝑜 )𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 𝐴𝑠,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-38

The values for 𝐾𝑠,𝑖 and 𝐾𝑠,𝑜 are defined by the transfer function equations:

𝑛𝑏𝑠 𝑛𝑐𝑠 𝑛𝑑𝑠

𝑘 𝑘
𝐾𝑠,𝑖 = ∑ 𝑏𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑜
𝑘
− ∑ 𝑐𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑖 − ∑ 𝑑𝑠𝑘 𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-39
𝐾=0 𝑘=0 𝑘=1

𝑛 𝑎𝑠 𝑛 𝑏𝑠 𝑛𝑑𝑠
Eq. 5.4.1-40
𝑘
𝐾𝑠,𝑜 = ∑ 𝑎𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑜
𝑘
− ∑ 𝑏𝑠𝑘 𝑇𝑠,𝑖 − ∑ 𝑑𝑠𝑘 𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑜
𝑘

𝑘=0 𝑘=0 𝑘=1

5–175
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.1.11. Walls with Boundary Conditions

Eq. 5.4.1-33 also applies for a wall with a known boundary temperature, 𝑇𝑏,𝑠 , with 𝑇𝑏,𝑠 substituted
for 𝑇𝑎,𝑠 .

5.4.1.12. Adjacent, Internal Walls and Walls with Identical

Boundary Conditions
For walls adjacent to another airnode, internal walls, or walls adjacent airnodes with identical
conditions, Eq. 5.4.1-33 applies, but with:

Adjacent airnode: 𝑇𝑎,𝑠 = 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑗

Internal wall: 𝑇𝑎,𝑠 = 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖

Adjacent identical 𝑇𝑎,𝑠 = 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖

and

𝑒𝑠 1
𝐵𝑠 = ( ) Eq. 5.4.1-41
(1 − 𝑓𝑠 ) 𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑗 𝐴𝑠,𝑗

𝑏𝑠𝑜
𝑒𝑠 =
1 Eq. 5.4.1-42
𝑎𝑠𝑜 +
𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑗 𝐴𝑠,𝑗

Note: For an internal wall, both sides must be considered for the area As.
It is also possible to specify a boundary condition for the outside surface temperature rather
than an air temperature by setting HBACK < 0.001. In this case, 𝑇𝑎,𝑠 = 𝑇𝑠,𝑜 = 𝑇𝑏,𝑠 . Eq. 5.4.1-33
applies, but with:

𝑏𝑠𝑜
𝐵𝑠 = 𝑜 Eq. 5.4.1-43
1+ 𝑐𝑠 𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 𝐴𝑠,𝑖

𝑐𝑠𝑜
𝐶𝑠 = Eq. 5.4.1-44
1 + 𝑐𝑠𝑜 𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 𝐴𝑠,𝑖

𝐾𝑠,𝑖 + 𝑐𝑠𝑜 𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 𝐴𝑠,𝑖 𝑆𝑠,𝑖

𝐷𝑠 = Eq. 5.4.1-45
1 + 𝑐𝑠𝑜 𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑣,𝑖 𝐴𝑠,𝑖

5.4.1.13. Total Gains from Surfaces in a Airnode

The total gain to airnode i from all surfaces is the sum of the combined heat transfers, or from
Eq. 5.4.1-16 and Eq. 5.4.1-33, is:

5–176
 𝐴𝑑𝑗.𝑍𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗

𝑄̇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓,𝑖 = ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑏,𝑖= ∑ ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝐵𝑠 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑗

𝑗=1 𝑖=1
𝑒𝑥𝑡.𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠

+ ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝐵𝑠 𝑇𝑎
𝑖𝑛𝑡.𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-46
+ ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝐵𝑠 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟
𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒
𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑 𝑖𝑛 𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑖

+ ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝐵𝑠 𝑇𝑏,𝑠 + ∑ 𝐴𝑠 (𝐶𝑠 𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 − 𝐷𝑠 − 𝑆𝑠,𝑖 )

where 𝐴𝑠 is the inside area of surface s.

Both sides of an internal wall are considered as inside surfaces and must be included twice in
Eq. 5.4.1-46.
An energy balance on the star node in Figure 5.4.1-7 also shows that:

1
𝑄̇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓,𝑖 = (𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 − 𝑇𝑖 ) Eq. 5.4.1-47
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖

5.4.1.14. Infiltration, Ventilation, and Convective Coupling

Infiltration and ventilation rates are given in terms of air changes per hour for each airnode. The
mass flow rate is the product of the airnode air volume, air density, and air change rate.
Infiltration occurs always from outdoor conditions, while ventilation occurs from a specified
(possibly variable) temperature. Equal amounts of air are assumed to leave the airnode at the
airnode temperature. The energy gains to any airnode i due to infiltration and ventilation are:

𝑄̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 = 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 𝐶𝑝 (𝑇𝑎 − 𝑇𝑖 ) Eq. 5.4.1-48

𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡

𝑄̇𝑣,𝑖 = ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 𝐶𝑝 (𝑇𝑣,𝑘 − 𝑇𝑖 ) Eq. 5.4.1-49

𝑘

where

𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 mass flow rate of infiltration air

𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 mass flow rate of ventilation air of ventilation type k

𝐶𝑝 specific heat of the air

𝑇𝑣,𝑘 temperature of ventilation air of ventilation type k

𝑇𝑎 ambient air temperature

For each wall or window separating airnodes of floating temperature or each wall having a
known boundary condition, it is possible to specify a convective coupling. This coupling is the
mass flow rate that enters the airnode across the surface. An equal quantity of air is assumed
to leave the airnode at the airnode temperature. The energy gain due to the convective coupling
is the sum of all such gains for all walls or windows in the airnode.
5–177
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

𝑎𝑑𝑗.𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗 𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑

𝑄̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑖 = ∑ ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 𝐶𝑝 (𝑇𝑗 − 𝑇𝑖 ) + ⋯ + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 𝐶𝑝 (𝑇𝑏,𝑠 − 𝑇𝑖 ) Eq. 5.4.1-50

where 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 is the mass flow rate of air entering airnode i across walls or windows.

5.4.1.15. Floating Airnode Temperature (No Heating or

Cooling)
The rate of change of internal energy for any free floating airnode is equal to the net heat gain
or

𝑑
𝐶𝑖 𝑇 = 𝑄̇𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-51
𝑑𝑡 𝑖

where 𝐶𝑖 is the thermal capacitance of airnode i ( minimal = 𝑉𝑖 𝜌𝐶𝑝 with 𝑉𝑖 = airnode volume).

The net heat gain, 𝑄̇𝑖 , is a function of 𝑇𝑖 and the temperatures of all other airnodes adjacent to
airnode i.
Note: To simplify the solution of the set of equations, 𝑄̇𝑖 is considered constant during
any timestep, evaluated at average values of the airnode temperatures. In this case,
the solution to the differential equation for final temperature for a given time interval is

̅̅̅̅̅
𝑄̇і𝛥𝑡
𝑇𝑖,𝜏 = 𝑇𝑖,𝜏−𝛥𝑡 + Eq. 5.4.1-52
𝐶і

where

𝛥𝑡 = The simulation time-step

𝑇𝑖,𝜏−𝛥𝑡
= The airnode temperature at the beginning of the time-step.

The temperature variation is linear, such that the average is:

𝑇𝑖,𝜏 + 𝑇𝑖,𝜏−𝛥𝑡
𝑇𝑖 = Eq. 5.4.1-53
2

If Eq. 5.4.1-53 is solved for 𝑇𝑖,𝜏 and the result substituted into Eq. 5.4.1-52, along with the
individual expressions representing the net heat gain, the following is obtained:

5–178
 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐. 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛
𝑍𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠
2 ∙ 𝐶𝑖 ∙ (𝑇̅𝑖 − 𝑇𝑖,𝜏−𝛥𝑡 ) = ∑ ̅𝑗 + 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 ∙ 𝑐𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑎 +
∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 ∙ 𝑐𝑝 ∙ 𝑇 ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑖 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑏,𝑠
𝛥𝑡 𝑗=1

1
−
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖
(
𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐.
𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠 𝑍𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡

+ ∑ ̅𝑖
𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑖 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 + 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 𝑐𝑝 𝑇
𝑗=1 𝑘
( ) )
𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡
1
+( ∙ ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 ∙ 𝑐𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑣,𝑘 + 𝑄𝑔,𝑐,𝑖 )
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖

Eq. 5.4.1-54
Eq. 5.4.1-46 and Eq. 5.4.1-47 can be equated and regrouped to find:

𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐.
𝑖𝑛𝑡.𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑠 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓.𝑖𝑛𝑖 𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑠 𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗
1
( − ∑ 𝐴𝑆 𝐵𝑆 + ∑ 𝐴𝑆 𝐶𝐶 ) ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 − ∑ ∑ 𝐴𝑆 𝐵𝑆 ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑗
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖
( )
1
− 𝑇̅𝑖
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-55
𝑒𝑥𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑜𝑟 𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒
𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠 𝑖𝑛𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒,𝑖

= ∑ 𝐴𝑆 𝐵𝑆 𝑇𝑎 + ∑ 𝐴𝑆 𝐵𝑆 𝑇𝑏,𝑠 + ∑ 𝐴𝑆 (𝐷𝑆 + 𝑆𝑆,𝑖 )

( )

The set of energy balances given by Eq. 6.3.2-38 and Eq. 5.4.1-55, written for all airnodes,
results in a linear set of equations in average airnode temperatures and average star
temperatures. In matrix form,

[𝑋][𝑇̅ ] = [𝑍] Eq. 5.4.1-56

This matrix can be partitioned such that

𝑋11 𝑋12
[𝑋] = [ ] Eq. 5.4.1-57
𝑋21 𝑋22

𝑇̅1 𝑇̅
[𝑇] = [ ] = [ ] Eq. 5.4.1-58
̅
𝑇2 ̅
𝑇𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟

𝑍1
[𝑍] = [ ] Eq. 5.4.1-59
𝑍2

where

𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛
𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗 𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠
2𝐶𝑖 1
𝑋11,𝑖𝑖 = ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 + 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 + + + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑖 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 Eq. 5.4.1-60
∆𝑡 𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖
𝑘
( )

5–179
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐. 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠
𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗

𝑋11,𝑖𝑗 = − ∑ ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑖≠𝑗 Eq. 5.4.1-61

𝑗=1

1
𝑋12,𝑖𝑖 = − Eq. 5.4.1-62
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖

𝑋12,𝑖𝑗 = 0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑖≠𝑗 Eq. 5.4.1-63

1
𝑋21,𝑖𝑗 = − Eq. 5.4.1-64
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖

𝑋21,𝑖𝑗 = 0 Eq. 5.4.1-65

𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 𝑖𝑛
𝑖𝑛𝑡.𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑠 𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑖
1 Eq. 5.4.1-66
𝑋22,𝑖𝑖 = ∑ 𝐴𝑠 ∙ 𝐵𝑠 + ∑ 𝐴𝑠 ∙ 𝐶𝑠 +
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖

𝑎𝑑𝑗. 𝑤𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑠
𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑖𝑡𝑜 𝑗

𝑋22,𝑖𝑗 = − ∑ ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝐵𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-67

𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛
𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠 𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡
2𝐶𝑖 ∙ 𝑇𝑖,𝜏−𝛥𝑡
𝑍1,𝑖 = 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑎 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑏,𝑠 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑣,𝑘 + + 𝑄𝑔,𝑐,𝑖
𝛥𝑡
𝑘

Eq. 5.4.1-68

𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓.
𝑒𝑥𝑡.𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓. 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠 𝑖𝑛𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑖

𝑍2,𝑖 = ( ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝐵𝑠 ) 𝑇𝑎 + ∑ 𝐴𝑠 𝐵𝑠 𝑇𝑏,𝑠 + ∑ 𝐴𝑠 (𝐷𝑠 + 𝑆𝑠,𝑖 ) Eq. 5.4.1-69

For the case of all airnodes in floating temperature,

[𝑇̅ ] = [𝑋]−1 [𝑍] Eq. 5.4.1-70

The final temperature for each airnode I is

𝑇𝑖,𝜏 = 2𝑇̅𝑖 − 𝑇𝑖,𝜏 −𝛥𝑡 Eq. 5.4.1-71

Note: The mean temperatures during the time-step for each airnode are output by Type
56. This follows the Trnsys standard for providing results as mean values during the
last time-step.

5.4.1.16. Simplified Heating and Cooling

It is possible to determine the energy requirement for airnodes controlled in an idealized way.
Therefore the heating and cooling energy flow is directly connected to the airnode air
temperature node. The output of the heating and/or cooling equipment is a function of the
airnode temperature as shown in Figure 5.4.1-9, where

𝑃𝑖 Power output for airnode i (negative for heating, positive for cooling)

5–180
 𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑖 Absolute value of the maximum power for airnode i

𝑇𝑠𝑒𝑡,𝑖 Set temperatures for heating or cooling in airnode i

For the simulation of heating equipment that produces a partially radiative gain to the airnode,
the radiative fraction of the supplied heating power may be defined. This fraction of the power
is supplied as internal radiative gains and distributed to the walls of the airnode. As the set
temperature for the heating equipment is related to the air temperature of the airnode, the
radiative fraction of the heating power cannot be higher than 0.99 in order to have a convective
part left to ensure stable control of the heating equipment.
The airnode temperature is free floating in the comfort region where the power is zero. If the
temperature of a free floating airnode is within the heating or cooling regions at the end of a
timestep, power is applied throughout the timestep so that the final airnode temperature just
reaches 𝑇𝑠𝑒𝑡 . If the power required is greater than the maximum specified, then the maximum
power is applied throughout the timestep and the airnode temperature is again free floating.

Figure 5.4.1-9: Power output versus temperature

The temperature change of the airnode air, when power is supplied, is assumed to be linear. If
power is required and enough is available to maintain the final airnode temperature at 𝑇𝑠𝑒𝑡,𝑖 then
the final and average airnode temperatures are known.

𝑇𝑡 = 𝑇𝑠𝑒𝑡,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-72

𝑇𝜏−𝛥𝑡 + 𝑇𝑠𝑒𝑡,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-73

𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 =
2

where, 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 is the average airnode temperature over the time-step if less than maximum power
is required.
It is necessary to consider the general case of airnodes that are in different control regions. With
the inclusion of the control laws, the equations remain linear. For the airnodes that have floating
temperatures, the solution for average airnode temperatures and star temperatures is again of
the form

[𝑇̅ ] = [𝑋 ′ ]−1 [𝑍 ′ ] Eq. 5.4.1-74

The coefficients of the 𝑋 ′ matrix and 𝑍 ′ vector depend upon the control region. In the comfort
airnode, with no energy requirement:

′
𝑋𝑖𝑗 = 𝑋𝑖𝑗 for all 𝑖 and 𝑗 Eq. 5.4.1-75

𝑍𝑖′ = 𝑍𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-76

5–181
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

For airnodes whose temperature falls below the point for maximum heating or above that for
maximum cooling

′
𝑋𝑖𝑗 = 𝑋𝑖𝑗 for all 𝑖 and 𝑗 Eq. 5.4.1-77

𝑍𝑖′ = 𝑍𝑖 + 𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑖,ℎ 𝑍_𝑖^′ = 𝑍_𝑖 − 𝑃_(𝑚𝑎𝑥, 𝑖, 𝑐) Eq. 5.4.1-78

For airnodes that fall within the heating or cooling regions and require less than maximum
power, the final temperature is assumed to be equal to the heating or cooling set temperature
and the average room temperature is then 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 . Eq. 5.4.1-51 can be rewritten to include the
power requirements.

𝑑
𝐶𝑖 𝑇 = 𝑄̇𝑖 − 𝑃𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-79
𝑑𝑡 𝑖

𝑃𝑖 and 𝑄̇𝑖 are considered constant over the time-step and 𝑄̇𝑖 is evaluated at the average airnode
temperature. Substituting into Eq. 5.4.1-79 yields:

𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐. 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠
𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗
1
𝑃̅𝑖 − ∙𝑇 − ∑ ∑ 𝑚𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇̅𝑗
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖
𝑗=1

𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐. 𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛

𝑚𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒𝑠 𝑖 𝑡𝑜 𝑗 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠
1
=− + 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 + ∑ ∑ 𝑚𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔 + ∑ ̅̅̅̅̅̅
𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔 𝐶𝑝 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖
𝑘 𝑗=1
[ ( ) ]
𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡
𝐶𝑖
− (𝑇𝑠𝑒𝑡,𝑖 − 𝑇𝜏−∆𝑡 ) + 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑎 ∙ ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑣,𝑘 + 𝑄𝑔,𝑐,𝑖
∆𝑡
𝑘𝑛𝑜𝑤𝑛
𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑒𝑠

+ ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 ∙ 𝐶𝑝 ∙ 𝑇𝑏,𝑠

Eq. 5.4.1-80
Eq. 5.4.1-80 is substituted into the set of energy balances on all airnodes for any airnode that
is in the less than maximum heating or cooling region. The solution given by Eq. 5.4.1-74 is
valid with the following substitutions for airnodes evaluated with Eq. 5.4.1-80.

′
𝑋11,𝑖𝑗 = 𝑋11,𝑖𝑗 for 𝑖 ≠ 𝑗 Eq. 5.4.1-81

′
𝑋11,𝑖𝑖 =1.0 Eq. 5.4.1-82

′
𝑋12,𝑖𝑗 = 𝑋12,𝑖𝑗 Eq. 5.4.1-83

′
𝑋22,𝑖𝑖 = 𝑋22,𝑖𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-84

1
Eq. 5.4.1-55 is corrected by adding ( 𝑇 ) to both sides of the equation, then
𝑅𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟,𝑖 𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖

𝑋 ′ 21,𝑖𝑖 = 0 Eq. 5.4.1-85

𝑍 ′ 2,1 = 𝑍2,𝑖 − 𝑋11,𝑖𝑖 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.1-86

For any airnode i connected to any airnode m at a fixed set-point, the X' matrix and the Z' vector
are modified as

5–182
 𝑋 ′11,𝑖𝑚 = 0 Eq. 5.4.1-87

𝑍 ′ 𝑖 = 𝑍 ′ 𝑖 − 𝑋 ′ 𝑖𝑚 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑚 Eq. 5.4.1-88

The solution given by Eq. 5.4.1-74 using the adjusted matrix entries is valid with one further
note. The temperature vector actually contains the required power instead of the average
airnode temperature, for those airnodes in the less than heating or cooling regions.
In order to determine the proper control regions for all airnodes, temperatures are calculated for
the case of no heating or cooling. This allows a first estimate of the control. For airnodes where
heating or cooling is required, the energy required to maintain the final airnode temperature at
the set temperature is determined. If the required energy is less than the maximum power
available, then the airnode is considered to be within the less than maximum heating or cooling
region. Otherwise, the heating or cooling output is equal to the maximum. Elements of the X'
matrix and Z' vector are set according to the control situation. The system of equations
represented by the matrix Eq. 5.4.1-74 is solved. This process is repeated until the control is
not changing. The energy requirements are then evaluated for the airnodes maintained at fixed
setpoints.

5.4.1.17. Simulation Timestep versus Wall Timebase

Eq. 5.4.1-33 gives the heat transfer at the inside surface of a wall given the inside and outside
air temperatures. Since it is based upon the time series (Eq. 5.4.1-6 and Eq. 5.4.1-7) it is only
strictly correct when these temperatures represent averages over the time-base interval of the
time series. The differential equation describing the rate of change of internal energy of the
airnode air, on the other hand, is solved over the simulation time-step. This may be less than or
equal to the wall time-base. If the simulation time-step is less than the wall time-base, then the
average heat transfer at the inside wall surface over the time-base is

𝑞̇̅𝑠,𝑖,𝛥𝑡𝑏 = 𝐵𝑠 𝑇̅𝑖,𝛥𝑡𝑏 + 𝐶𝑠 𝑇̅𝑎,𝑠,𝛥𝑡𝑏 + 𝐷𝑠 Eq. 5.4.1-89

Where 𝛥𝑡𝑏 refers to the wall time-base.

The average time-base air temperatures are
𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
Eq. 5.4.1-90
∑𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒 𝑇𝑖,𝛥𝑡 𝛥𝑡
𝑇̅𝑖,𝛥𝑡𝑏 =
𝛥𝑡𝑏
𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
Eq. 5.4.1-91
∑𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒 𝑇𝑎,𝑠,𝛥𝑡 𝛥𝑡
𝑇𝑎,𝑠,𝛥𝑡𝑏 =
𝛥𝑡𝑏

If Eq. 5.4.1-90 and Eq. 5.4.1-91are substituted into Eq. 5.4.1-89, then
𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒
𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟 Eq. 5.4.1-92
𝛥𝑡 ∑𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒 𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖,𝛥𝑡 𝛥𝑡
𝑞̇ 𝑠,𝑖,𝛥𝑡𝑏 = ∑ (𝐵𝑠 𝑇̅𝑖,𝛥𝑡 + 𝐶𝑠 𝑇̅𝑎,𝑠,𝛥𝑡 + 𝐷𝑠 ) =
𝛥𝑡𝑏 𝛥𝑡𝑏

The average heat flux over the wall time-base is equal to the average of the heat fluxes
evaluated at the average temperatures over the simulation time-step. For the solution of the set
of equations each time-step, the heat flux for any wall, as given by Eq. 5.4.1-33, is determined
using the current conditions. However, the temperatures and heat fluxes characterizing the
previous time history of the wall represent averages over the wall time-base. This leads to
temperature steps in the period of the time-base value.
For heavy and thick walls the time-base can be set to two or more hours. If there are very thin
walls in the same building, the TRNBuild program stops with an error message. This is caused
by the time constant of the light construction. If the time-constant is lower than the transfer
function time-base, the response description will produce an error. In this case, thin walls should
5–183
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

be replaced by a description using resistance layers. This procedure yields a heat flux over the
wall time-base as given by Eq. 5.4.1-92.

5.4.2. Optical and Thermal Window Model

A complex fenestration model has been incorporated into the Type 56 component using output
data from the WINDOW 4.1 program developed by Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, USA [8].
This window model calculates transmission, reflection and absorption of solar radiation in detail
for windows with up to six panes. External and internal shading devices and an edge correction
for different glazing spacer types are considered. The optical and thermal window model is
described below.

5.4.2.1. Description of the Window

Windows may consist of up to six individual glazings with five different gas fillings between them.
Every window pane has its own temperature node and the inner window pane is coupled via
the star network to the star node temperature of the building airnode as described in the previous
chapters. The outer window pane is coupled via convective heat transfer to the temperature of
the ambient air and via long-wave radiative exchange with the fictive sky temperature, Tfsky , as
described above. The heat capacity of the frame, the window panes and the gas fillings are
neglected.
For each glazing of the window, the resulting temperature is calculated considering
transmission, absorption and reflection of incoming direct and diffuse solar radiation, diffuse
short-wave radiation being reflected from the walls of the airnode or an internal shading device,
convective, conductive and long-wave radiative heat transfer between the individual panes and
with the inner and outer environment (see Figure 5.4.2-1).

Figure 5.4.2-1: Complex fenestration model

5.4.2.2. 2-Band-Solar-Radiation-Window-Model
With Version 16 a 2-Band-Solar-Radiation-Window-Model was introduced. The model is only
different in regard to the shortwave solar radiation. The model splits the external solar radiation
into a visual part and a non visual part. The fraction of the visual part can be calculated with the
radiation of a black body at a temperature of 5800 K for a wave length band between 380nm-
780nm related to the total radiation of a black body at the same temperature. This leads to the
following equations for the visual radiation:

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑣𝑖𝑠𝑢𝑎𝑙 = 0.466 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑟 Eq. 5.4.2-1

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟,𝑣𝑖𝑠𝑢𝑎𝑙 = 0.466 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟,𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑟 Eq. 5.4.2-2

5–184
The non visual part of the solar radiation can then be calculated with

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑛𝑜𝑛𝑣 𝑖𝑠𝑢𝑎𝑙 = (1 − 0.466)𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑟 Eq. 5.4.2-3

𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟,𝑛𝑜𝑛𝑣𝑖𝑠𝑢𝑎𝑙 = (1 − 0.466)𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟,𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑟 Eq. 5.4.2-4

The model reads now the visual transmission and in visual reflectance for front and backside
from the W4-Library. Relative absorption values for total solar band will be taken for the
distribution of the absorbed energy of the visual and non visual band on each individual pane
as there is no better data available from W4-lib. All data taken from W4-lib in the type56 window
model are shown in Chapter 5.2.4.6.
The model calculates then for the visual and for the non visual part separately the reflection, the
absorption on single panes and the distribution within the airnodes including multiple reflection.
The absorbed and transmitted radiation is summed up to get the total solar absorbed or
transmitted radiation. For all later energy and temperature calculations only the total solar
radiation values are used.

5.4.2.3. Transmission of Solar Radiation

Each glazing absorbs and reflects a part of the incoming solar radiation depending on the
glazing material and the incidence angle. In the program WINDOW 4.1, the detailed calculation
of reflection between the individual panes and the absorption and transmission of each pane is
performed hemispherically for diffuse radiation and in steps of 10° incidence angle for direct
solar radiation. Together with the thermal properties of the gas fillings and the conductivity and
emissivity of the glazings, the optical data for the window is written to an ASCII file by the
WINDOW 4.1 program. This output file has a standard format, which makes the results available
for thermal analysis programs such as DOE 2.1 and Trnsys. For Trnsys, a window library file
was created using the WINDOW 4.1 program to have commonly-used glazing systems available
for the user.
This data is read by the Type 56 component and interpolated using the interpolation of Akima
/14/
Using this interpolated data, the transmission of solar radiation and the total absorption of short-
wave radiation for each window pane is calculated.

5.4.2.4. Heat Flux between Window Panes

The heat transport between the individual window panes is shown in the Figure 5.4.2-2.
Conduction, convection and long-wave radiation are considered separately.

Figure 5.4.2-2: Resistance network between window panes.

The heat flux from the inner pane of the window the to ambient is calculated as:
5–185
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

𝑄̇𝑛−𝑎 = 𝑈𝑛−𝑎 ∙ 𝐴 ∙ (𝑇𝑛 − 𝑇𝑎 ) Eq. 5.4.2-5

with

1
𝑈𝑛−𝑎 = Eq. 5.4.2-6
∑𝑖𝑗 𝑅𝑖𝑗 + 𝑅𝑎

1
𝑅𝑗𝑗 = Eq. 5.4.2-7
𝛬𝑗𝑗

1
𝑅𝑎 = Eq. 5.4.2-8
𝛼𝑐,𝑎 + 𝛼𝑟,𝑎

1
𝑅𝑖 = Eq. 5.4.2-9
𝛼𝑐,𝑖 + 𝛼𝑟,𝑖

𝛬𝑗𝑗 = 𝛬𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑗𝑗 + 𝛬𝑟𝑎𝑑,𝑗𝑗 + 𝛬𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑,𝑗𝑗 Eq. 5.4.2-10

The radiative heat exchange coefficient between glazings is calculated using

4𝜎𝑇 3 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑛
𝛬𝑟𝑎𝑑 = Eq. 5.4.2-11
1 1
+ −1
𝜀1 𝜀2

The convective heat exchange coefficient between the individual glazings is calculated
considering the slope of the window using:

𝑁𝑢 𝜆(𝑇)
𝛬𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣 = Eq. 5.4.2-12
𝑠

1 +
1708(sin(1.8𝛽))1.6 1708 + 𝑅𝑎 cos 𝛽 3
𝑁𝑢 = 1 + 1.44 (1 − ) (1 − ) + (( ) − 1) Eq. 5.4.2-13
𝑅𝑎 cos 𝛽 𝑅𝑎 cos 𝛽 5830

𝑔 𝛥𝑇 𝐿3
𝑅𝑎 = Eq. 5.4.2-14
𝑇𝜇𝛼

5.4.2.5. Absorption of Short-Wave Radiation

The absorption of short-wave radiation (direct and diffuse solar radiation, diffuse reflected
radiation from the all the surfaces of the airnode and the optional inner shading device) on the
glazing system of the window leads to a heat flux from the pane to the airnode which is given
by

(𝑅𝑖−𝑙 + 𝑅𝑎 )
𝑄̇𝑎𝑏𝑠,𝑖 = ∑ ((𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑟 𝑎𝑏𝑠𝑑𝑖𝑟,𝑖 + 𝐼𝑑𝑖𝑓 𝑎𝑏𝑠𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑖 + (𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑓,𝑧 + 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑓,𝑠ℎ )𝑎𝑏𝑠𝑑𝑖𝑓,𝑖,𝑏 ) ) Eq. 5.4.2-15
𝑅𝑡𝑜𝑡
𝑖→𝑛

It can be shown that the total heat flux of such a glazing system can be split into a heat loss flux
which is only dependent on the temperature differences and the pane absorption heat flux which
is only dependent on the intensity of the short-wave radiation [5].
As the solar radiation reflected by the airnode surfaces can only be calculated by Type 56 if the
amount of transmitted solar radiation from all external and internal windows of the airnode is
known, an iterative loop for all windows of a airnode is performed until all entered direct or
diffuse solar radiation is either absorbed at an internal wall or frame surface or any window pane
of an internal or external window or transmitted back to outside through an external window.
5–186
After having distributed all entering solar radiation for all airnodes of the building including
multiple reflections in a airnode or between airnodes via internal windows, the calculations of
surface temperatures and the window pane temperature calculations are performed.

5.4.2.6. Iterative Solution for Pane Temperatures

The absorption of short-wave radiation leads to a temperature increase of each individual
window pane. This leads to a heat flux to adjacent window panes or to the inside (airnode) and
the outside (ambient) of the window and therefore to an additional change in pane temperatures.
This iteration of pane temperatures is performed until the change of pane temperatures is lower
than a specified tolerance.

5.4.2.7. Total Energy Flux through the Window Glazing

Having determined the individual pane temperatures and all of the heat fluxes through the
glazings, the absorbed short-wave radiation is summed over the various window panes and
distributed to the inner and outer window node. Based on the temperatures of the window
nodes, the absorbed short-wave radiation of the window nodes are found to be

𝑄̇𝑎𝑏𝑠,𝑖 = 0.5(𝑄̇𝑎𝑏𝑠 + ℎ𝑖 (𝑇𝑖 − 𝑇𝑧𝑜𝑛𝑒 ) − ℎ𝑐,𝑜 (𝑇0 − 𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏 ) − 𝑄̇𝑠𝑘𝑦 ) Eq. 5.4.2-16

𝑄̇𝑎𝑏𝑠,𝑎 = 𝑄̇𝑎𝑏𝑠 − 𝑄̇𝑎𝑏𝑠,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.2-17

These heat fluxes of the two-node model are used in the Type 56 heat balance algorithm to
calculate the dynamic behavior of the multi-airnode building.

5.4.2.8. Edge Correction and Window Frame

The calculations of the glazing temperatures of the window were performed for undisturbed
center of glass values with no influence of the glazing edge. To take the cold bridge effect of
the spacer at the edge of the glazing system into account, edge correction coefficients are
calculated by the WINDOW 4.1 program for five different spacer materials. The edge of the
glazing is defined as an 2.5 inch (63.5 mm) wide area along the perimeter of the glazing. These
correction coefficients and the height and width of a glazing sample defined in the TRNBuild
program and the U-value of the glazing is calculated as a shunt circuit of center of glass value,
𝑈𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟 and the U-value of the glazing edge, 𝑈𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 :
2
𝑢𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 = 𝑐𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒,1 + 𝑐𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒,2 𝑢𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟 + 𝑐𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒,3 𝑢𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟 Eq. 5.4.2-18

This corrected U-value, uglass, is used in Type 56 for the thermal calculation of the window as
it is defined in the building description.
In the building description, the ratio of the frame area to the total window area is defined.
Additionally a U-value for the frame is given there. The total U-value of the window is calculated
as the arithmetic mean value of glazing and frame U-value:

𝑢𝑤𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑜𝑤 = 𝑓𝑓𝑟𝑎𝑚𝑒 𝑢𝑓𝑟𝑎𝑚𝑒 + (1 − 𝑓𝑓𝑟𝑎𝑚𝑒 )𝑢𝑔𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠 Eq. 5.4.2-19

The transmission of solar radiation is reduced by this fraction (to account for the opaque frame
part of the window). In the heat balance algorithm of Type 56, all the heat flows and the resulting
temperatures are related to the total window area.

5–187
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.2.9. External and Internal Shading Devices

External or internal shading devices may be defined for each external window of the building.
In Version 17.1 an integrated radiation depending control of the shading devices for external
windows is available.
External shading
External shading devices reduce the incoming solar radiation on the glazing area of the external
window by a factor given in the building description. A thermal resistance that reduces the heat
losses of the glazing to the ambient, if the external shading device is active, may be specified.
In addition to the userdefined external shading factor of external windows, a detailed treatment
of shortwave beam radiation shading by external shaders and self-shading of the building can
be applied. Type 56 reads in a shading matrix file generated by TRNBuild at the beginning of
the simulation (if the file exists). This matrix is based on the division of the celestial hemisphere
into patches. For each patch the sunlit fraction for external windows is stored. During the
simulation Type 56 determines the actual sunlit fraction of surfaces by a bilinear interpolation of
the four nearest patches with respect to the sun’s current position for each time step.
Internal shading
For internal windows only an internal shading device for the surface defined as FRONT in the
building description may be defined.
An internal shading device is specified giving the reduction of the transmitted solar radiation, a
reflection coefficient for solar radiation for both faces of the shading device and a parameter
defining the degree of additional convection to the air node. The model takes into account
multiple reflections between the internal shading device and the window panes and calculates
the absorption of reflected solar radiation from the internal shading on the different window
panes. The multiple reflections between internal shading and window panes can be expanded
into a endless series and expressed in a closed form for each face of the window resulting in

𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑤𝑖𝑛,𝑖 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ (1 − 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑠ℎ,𝑖 )

𝑞̇ 𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ = [𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ (1 − 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑠ℎ,𝑜 ) + (1 − 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ ) ( )] 𝐼𝑟𝑒𝑓,𝑧
1 − 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑤𝑖𝑛,𝑖 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑠ℎ,𝑖
Eq. 5.4.2-20
𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ (1 − 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑠ℎ,𝑖 )
+ 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑤𝑖𝑛 ( )𝐼
1 − 𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑠ℎ,𝑖 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑤𝑖𝑛,𝑖

where

𝑓𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ Non transparent fraction of internal shading related to the total glass area

𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑡𝑠ℎ,𝑖 solar reflection of internal shading facing the glass

𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑠ℎ,𝑜 solar reflection of internal shading facing the room

𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑤𝑖𝑛,𝑖 solar reflection of glass surface facing the internal shading device

𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑤𝑖𝑛 solar transmittance of all window panes

This calculation is performed separately with the optical properties for direct and diffuse solar
radiation and the total absorption of the internal shading device is given by the sum of absorption
of direct and diffuse solar radiation parts.
With the internal shading device located behind the inner glazing an additional convection is
started resulting in a chimney effect of warm air heated by the absorption of solar radiation on
the shading device. The absorbed solar radiation on the inner shading is given as the product
of the transmitted solar radiation and the fraction of the shaded glazing area considering the
reflected radiation and the fraction which is transferred to the air node of the airnode via the
specified additional convection:

𝑞̇ 𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 𝑞̇ 𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ (1 − 𝑐𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑠ℎ ) Eq. 5.4.2-21

5–188
The additional convective heat flow to the air node of the airnode is therefore given as:

𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑠ℎ = 𝑞̇ 𝑖𝑛𝑡,𝑠ℎ 𝑐𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑠ℎ Eq. 5.4.2-22

Shading device control

In Version 17.1, radiation depending control for shading devices of external windows has been
integrated in the multizone building model. For adjacent windows this feature isn’t available
and an external control by the ON/OFF controller (Type 2) can be used.
For activating this feature, the shading control has to be set to “integrated control” of the
window definition in the airnode. The shading factor for the integrated control has to be
specified for a completely closed shading device. The actual control (open or closed) is
calculated by the given level of total incident radiation on the window plane acc. to the window
type definition. Thereby, the total incident radiation is the total radiation in the plane of the
window without geometrical shading effects (e.g. like a tilted radiation sensor on a roof). Note:
The radiation level for closing has to be higher than for reopening. A difference (hysteresis) of
at least 80 kJ/h m² is recommended.

5–189
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.3. Moisture Balance

In parallel with the sensible energy balance calculation, Type 56 calculates a moisture balance
considering free floating humidity ratios or humidification/dehumidification to a certain set-point.
In this case, Type56 calculates the latent load. There are two models for the calculation of the
moisture balance available in Type 56. The first model considers sorption effects with an
enlarged moisture capacity of the air the second, more sophisticated, model offers a surface
and a deep moisture buffer in the walls of the airnode.

5.4.3.1. Effective Capacitance Humidity Model

In the first model, the buffer effect of adsorptive and desorptive materials, soil areas, or plants
is considered by an effective moisture capacitance which is defined as the product of the air
mass and a moisture capacitance ratio:

𝑀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 = 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 𝑀𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 Eq. 5.4.3-1

where

𝑀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 effective moisture capacitance of the airnode

𝑀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 the mass of air in the airnode

𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 multiplication factor generally in the range of 1 to 10.

A moisture balance for any airnode results in the following differential equation:

𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠
𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑖−𝑗
𝑑𝜔𝑖 Eq. 5.4.3-2
𝑀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 = 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 (𝜔𝑎 − 𝜔𝑖 ) + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 (𝜔𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 − 𝜔𝑖 ) + 𝑊𝑔,𝑖 ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 (𝜔𝑗 − 𝜔𝑖 )
𝑑𝑡
𝑘

where

𝑀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 effective moisture capacitance of the airnode

𝜔𝑖 the humidity ratio of the airnode

𝜔𝑎 the ambient humidity ratio

𝜔𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 the humidity ratio of the ventilation air from ventilation type k

𝑊𝑔,𝑖 internal moisture gains

𝜔𝑗 the humidity ratio of an adjacent airnode j

In order to simplify the solution of the simultaneous set of differential equations, the values of 𝜔
at the end of the previous time-step are used in the above expression. Subroutine DIFFEQ is
then used to independently solve for the final and average values of the humidity ratio over each
timestep for each airnode. If the average humidity ratio of the airnode falls below or rises above
a setpoint for humidification or dehumidification, then latent energy is added or removed to
maintain the humidity ratio at the setpoint. It is assumed that the change in airnode humidity
ratio occurs instantly so that 𝜔̅𝑖 = 𝜔𝜏,𝑖 . In this case

5–190
 𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡

𝑄𝑙𝑎𝑡,𝑖 = ℎ𝑣 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 (𝜔𝑎 −𝜔𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 ) + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 (𝜔𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 − 𝜔𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 ) + 𝑊𝑔,𝑖

𝑘
( Eq. 5.4.3-3
𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠
𝑖−𝑗
𝑀𝑒𝑓𝑓,𝑖 (𝜔𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 𝜔𝑖,𝜏−𝛥𝑡 )
+ ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 (𝜔𝑗,𝜏−𝛥𝑡 − 𝜔𝑖,𝜏−𝛥𝑡 ) −
𝛥𝑡
)

where

𝑄𝑙𝑎𝑡,𝑖 latent energy removed (positive for dehumidification, negative for humidification)

ℎ𝑣 the heat of vaporization of water

𝜔𝑟𝑒𝑞,𝑖 the set-point for humidification or dehumidification

Between the two set-points, the humidity ratio is free floating.

5.4.3.2. Buffer Storage Humidity Model

The buffer storage model describes a separate humidity buffer divided into a surface and deep
storage. These buffers are connected to each other as shown in Figure 5.4.3-1. The surface
buffer is additionally connected with the airnode node. Each buffer is defined with three
parameters.
The first parameter is the gradient of the sorptive isothermal line 𝐾 of the material. These values
represent the water storage capacity of the material. The second parameter is the mass of the
material. The third parameter 𝛽 controls the moisture transport from the storage to the airnode
node.

Figure 5.4.3-1: Buffer storage humidity model.

5.4.3.3. Mathematical Description of the Buffer Storage

Humidity Model
The differential equation for the calculation of the airnode humidity was extended by a term
taking into account the exchange of moisture between the airnode node and the surface
storage. A comparison of the old and the new differential equations are shown below.
Effective Capacitance Model:
𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡
𝑑𝜔𝑖
𝑀𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 ∙ 𝑊𝑐𝑎𝑝 = 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 (𝜔𝑎 − 𝜔𝑖 ) + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 (𝜔𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 − 𝜔𝑖 ) + 𝑊̇𝑔,𝑖
𝑑𝑡
𝑘
Eq. 5.4.3-4
+ ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 (𝜔𝑗 − 𝜔𝑖 )
𝑖−𝑗

5–191
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Buffer Storage Model:

𝑛𝑣𝑒𝑛𝑡
𝑑𝜔𝑖
𝑀𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑖 = 𝑚̇𝑖𝑛𝑓,𝑖 (𝜔𝑎 − 𝜔𝑖 ) + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 (𝜔𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 − 𝜔𝑖 ) + 𝑊̇𝑔,𝑖 + ∑ 𝑚̇𝑐𝑝𝑙𝑔,𝑠 (𝜔𝑗 − 𝜔𝑖 )
𝑑𝑡 Eq. 5.4.3-5
𝑘 𝑖−𝑗
+ 𝛽𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 (𝜔𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 − 𝜔𝑖 )

where

𝜔𝑖 the humidity ratio of airnode i

𝜔𝑎 the ambient humidity ratio

𝜔𝑣,𝑘,𝑖 the humidity ratio of the ventilation air from ventilation type k

𝜔𝑗 the humidity ratio of an adjacent airnode j

𝜔𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 the humidity ratio of the surface storage

𝑊𝑔,𝑖 internal moisture gains

𝑚̇, 𝛽 exchange coefficients

Additionally, two new differential equations were introduced to describe the dynamics of the
water content of the surface and the deep storage.

𝑑𝜔𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓
𝑀𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 κ𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 𝑓(𝜑, 𝜔) = 𝛽𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 (𝜔𝑖 − 𝜔𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 ) + 𝛽𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 (𝜔𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 − 𝜔𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 ) Eq. 5.4.3-6
𝑑𝑡

𝑑𝜔𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝
𝑀𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 𝜅𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 𝑓(𝜑, 𝜔) = 𝛽𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 (𝜔𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 − 𝜔𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 ) Eq. 5.4.3-7
𝑑𝑡

where

𝜔𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 the humidity ratio of the deep storage

𝜅𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 gradient of sorptive isothermal line of surface buffer

[𝑘𝑔𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 /𝑘𝑔𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙 /𝑟𝑒𝑙. ℎ𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑑𝑖𝑡𝑦]

𝜅𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 gradient of sorptive isothermal line of deep buffer

[𝑘𝑔𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟 /𝑘𝑔𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙 /𝑟𝑒𝑙. ℎ𝑢𝑚𝑖𝑑𝑖𝑡𝑦]

𝑓(𝜑, 𝜔) conversion factor from relative humidity to humidity ratio

𝛽𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 𝑘𝑔
the exchange coefficient between airnode and surface storage [ ]
ℎ

𝛽𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 𝑘𝑔
the exchange coefficient surface between storage and deep storage [ ]
ℎ

Initially, the user must assign the actual wall layers to the two humidity storage types. For the
surface buffer, only the material with the lowest diffusion resistance is relevant. By means of the
equation

0.1𝐴
𝛽𝑠𝑢𝑓 =
0.094 Eq. 5.4.3-8
+ ∑ 𝑑𝑖 𝜇𝑖
𝛽′
𝛽𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 can be calculated. It depends on the surface size A in m², the steam-transition coefficient
𝛽 ′ (≈12 m/h), the thickness 𝑑 in m and the diffusion resistance 𝜇 of layer 𝑖. For the calculation
of 𝛽𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 , the steam-transition coefficient can be neglected:
5–192
 0.1 𝐴
𝛽𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 = Eq. 5.4.3-9
∑𝑖 𝑑𝑖 𝜇𝑖

If the thickness 𝑑 is chosen, the corresponding mass

𝑀 = 2∙𝑑∙𝐴∙𝜌 Eq. 5.4.3-10

of the buffer material and the coefficients 𝛽 can easily be determined. To determine the size of
the thickness 𝑑 the following should be considered. If, for example, the surface buffer is defined
only by the first millimeter of gypsum and the deep buffer by the second millimeter, the humidity
storage of the wall surface is well described but the capacity of the deeper parts is neglected.
Measurements of air humidity in an office have shown that the influence of walls can be well
described if

𝛽𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 𝑘𝑔𝑎𝑖𝑟
= 3[ 2 ] Eq. 5.4.3-11
𝐴 𝑚 ℎ

𝛽𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 𝑘𝑔𝑎𝑖𝑟
= 1[ 2 ] Eq. 5.4.3-12
𝐴 𝑚 ℎ

The reason for this lies in the fact that the first value describes the mass flow within minutes and
the second the mass flow within several hours. Measurements and detailed simulations have
also shown that the moisture flow from central parts of the walls (walls of bricks and concrete)
to the room air is so low that it can be neglected. The moisture flow from the surrounding to the
airnode is much higher and must be well defined by the infiltration parameters if the simulation
time is longer than a few days.
The values mentioned above are recommendations. Of course the deep buffer can also be
defined in a different way. A very small value of 𝛽/𝐴 can describe the moisture transport flow
within a season. With Eq. 5.4.3-9, the thickness d and therefore the corresponding mass 𝑀 then
can easily be determined.
If only one kind of material is used for one storage (for example, concrete for the deep storage),
the user has to put the corresponding parameters 𝐾 and 𝑀 into the building description file
*.BUI. If the user wishes to take into account different kinds of materials, i.e. concrete and
gypsum, it is necessary to set one parameter to 1 and the other to the sum of the corresponding
products of 𝐾 and 𝑀

𝜅1 𝑀1 + 𝜅2 𝑀2 + ⋯ Eq. 5.4.3-13

5–193
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Table 5.4.3-1: Material data for buffer storage humidity model

Material Density   Diffusion

Resistance 
[kg/m³] 𝒌𝒈𝒘𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒓 /𝒌𝒈𝒃𝒖𝒊𝒍𝒅𝒊𝒏𝒈 𝒎𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒓𝒊𝒂𝒍
[ ]
𝒓𝒆𝒍. 𝒉𝒖𝒎𝒊𝒅𝒊𝒕𝒚

Heavy Concrete 2200 0.04 70-150

Porous o. Gas Concrete 600 0.05-0.08 5-10

Sand-Lime Brick 1900 0.03 15-25

Clay Brick 1600 0.005 5-10

Plaster 1800 0.02 5-20

Gypsum 900 0.015 8

Wood 600 0.20 40

Cork 100 0.03 5-10

Mineral Wool 100 0.01 1

HR-Foam 20 0.7 20-70

5.4.3.4. Buffer Storage Example

Air humidity and temperature have been measured for an office of 80 m³ air volume, surrounded
by walls covered with layers from gypsum (thickness: 12 mm) and mineral wool (thickness 10
cm), with the ceiling and ground floor of concrete, for a period of two days. Periodically, the
absolute air humidity was raised significantly.
From
Table 5.4.3-1 the coefficient KSURF of gypsum can be determined:
KSURF= 0.015
The deep buffer takes into account different materials. Therefore the value of KDEEP is
KDEEP = 1
The size of the gypsum layers is 50 m². The penetration depth is d = 3 mm and therefore the
corresponding mass is 270 kg:

5–194
 MSURF = 50 m² x 2 x 3 mm x 900 kg/m³ = 270 kg

MDEEP = 𝜅1 𝑀1 + 𝜅2 𝑀2 + 𝜅3 𝑀3

= M(gypsum) (gypsum) + M(mineral wool) (mineral wool) +

M(concrete) (concrete)

= 270 x 0.015 + 500 x 0.01 + 175 x 0.04 = 16

(Note: In this example, 1.8 mm of concrete with a related area of 43 m² and a
density of 2200 kg/m³ is considered.)

𝛽𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓 𝑘𝑔
BSURF = 𝐴 = 3 [ 2 ] ∙ 50[𝑚2 ] = 150[𝑘𝑔/ℎ]
𝐴 𝑚 ℎ

𝛽𝑑𝑒𝑒𝑝 𝑘𝑔
BDEEP = 𝐴 = 1 [ 2 ] ∙ 50[𝑚2 ] = 50[𝑘𝑔/ℎ]
𝐴 𝑚 ℎ

The building description should contain the parameters in the following order (instead of the
parameter WCAPR):
KSURF = 0.015 KDEEP = 1
MSURF = 270 MDEEP = 16
BSURF = 150 BDEEP = 50

5.4.3.5. Comparison of Measurement and Simulation for the

Buffer Storage Humidity Model

5–195
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Figure 5.4.3-2: Results of measurement and simulation according to the described model.

Figure 5.4.3-3: Results of outputs 𝑸𝒍𝒈𝒂𝒊𝒏 and 𝑸𝒃𝒖𝒇 . 𝑸𝒃𝒖𝒇 describes the energy flow to the surface
buffer.

5.4.4. Integrated Model for Thermo-Active Building

Elements
Thermo-active building elements (slabs or walls of a building) are used to condition buildings by
integrating a fluid system into massive parts of the building itself. Examples are radiant floor
heat or cooling systems, radiant ceilings or wall heating or cooling systems.
Due to the finite distance between pipes, a two-dimensional temperature field develops in the
plane of the thermo-active construction element cross-section (see Figure 5.4.4-1 and Figure
5.4.4-2). Thermal input or output along piping loops causes a change in the water temperature
within the pipe. This change affects the construction element temperature in the z direction. This
means that all three dimensions have to be taken into account for the calculation of a thermo
active construction element system. Multi-dimensional thermal conduction problems can usually
be calculated by a Finite Difference Method (FD) or a Finite Element Method (FEM). Therefore,
the region to be examined needs to be transformed into small three-dimensional grid cells. For
each cell and for every point in time the required physical variables can be calculated step-by-
step in dependency of the adjoining cells. To achieve a sufficiently high level of precision, the
grid must be sufficiently dense. This makes calculations complex and usually results in long
calculation times. Also, a certain level of experience is required for the collection of geometric
data on the construction element and the pipes as well as for the creation of an effective grid
design.
For these reasons, a powerful alternative method for the calculation of thermo active
construction element systems was developed [9], integrated into the Type 56 building model,
which will be described below.

5–196
5.4.4.1. Stationary solution in the x–y plane of a thermo-active
construction element

Figure 5.4.4-1: Structure of the thermo active construction element system.

Figure 5.4.4-2: Heat flow in a cross section of a thermo active construction element

The stationary solution for temperature distribution in the x-y plane results, as described in [11],
in the following formula for heat flow on the surface towards room 1:

𝑈1 ∙ 𝑈2
𝑞̇ 1 = 𝛷 ∙ 𝑈1 ∙ (𝜗3 − 𝜗1 ) + (1 − 𝛷) ∙ ∙ (𝜗2 − 𝜗1 ) Eq. 5.4.4-1
𝑈1 + 𝑈2

The first term to the right of the equation sign in Eq. 5.4.4-1 describes the heat flow between
temperature 𝜗3 on the outside surface of the pipe and temperature 𝜗1 within room 1. The
temperature difference is multiplied by the proportionality factor ɸ ∙ 𝑈1 , which represents the
coefficient of thermal transmittance for the pipe configuration. The physical variable ɸ is used
as correction factor. This variable resembles the shape factor and can be derived from the partial
differential equation for thermal conduction (see references [10] and [11]). For the configuration
of pipes, ɸ becomes

2 ∙ 𝛱 ∙ 𝜆𝑏 ∙ 𝛤
𝛷= Eq. 5.4.4-2
𝑑𝑥 ∙ (𝑈1 + 𝑈2 )

where

5–197
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

∞ −1
𝑑𝑥 2 ∙ 𝛱 ∙ 𝜆𝑏 𝑔1 (𝑠) + 𝑔2 (𝑠)
𝛤 = [𝐼𝑛 ( )+ +∑ ] Eq. 5.4.4-3
𝛱∙𝛿 𝑑𝑥 ∙ (𝑈1 + 𝑈2 ) 𝑠
𝑠=1

To check the evidence of this formula, Eq. 5.4.4-3 can be calculated with ɸ = 0 as a borderline
case, which means that the calculation is done for a construction element without pipes. The
result is equal to the heat flow in the upper half of the construction element determined by the
familiar calculation method using the 𝑈 value:

𝑈1 ∙ 𝑈2
𝑞̇ 1 = ∙ (𝜗2 − 𝜗1 ) Eq. 5.4.4-4
𝑈1 + 𝑈2

The heat flow for the second side of the room can be determined in a similar way as in Eq.
5.4.4-1

𝑈1 ∙ 𝑈2
𝑞̇ 2 = 𝛷 ∙ 𝑈2 (𝜗3 − 𝜗2 ) + (1 − 𝛷) ∙ ∙ (𝜗1 − 𝜗2 ) Eq. 5.4.4-5
𝑈1 + 𝑈2

Equations Eq. 5.4.4-1 and Eq. 5.4.4-5 can be represented by a network of resistances in a
triangular arrangement (see Figure 5.4.4-3).

Figure 5.4.4-3: Network of resistances, triangular arrangement

The three resistances can be described as follows:

1
𝑅𝑎 = Eq. 5.4.4-6
𝛷 ∙ 𝑈1

1 Eq. 5.4.4-7
𝑅𝑏 =
𝛷 ∙ 𝑈2

𝑈1 + 𝑈2 Eq. 5.4.4-8
𝑅𝑐 =
𝑈1 ∙ 𝑈2 ∙ (1 − 𝛷)

The triangular network can be transformed into an equivalent star network (see Figure 5.4.4-4)
using the following relations:

𝑅𝑎 ∙ 𝑅𝑐
𝑅1 =
𝑅𝑎 + 𝑅𝑏 + 𝑅𝑐 Eq. 5.4.4-9

5–198
 𝑅𝑏 ∙ 𝑅𝑐 Eq. 5.4.4-10
𝑅2 =
𝑅𝑎 + 𝑅𝑏 + 𝑅𝑐

𝑅𝑎 ∙ 𝑅𝑏 Eq. 5.4.4-11
𝑅𝑥 =
𝑅𝑎 + 𝑅𝑏 + 𝑅𝑐

Figure 5.4.4-4: Network of resistances, star arrangement

Inserting the Eq. 5.4.4-6 to Eq. 5.4.4-8 into the equations Eq. 5.4.4-9 to Eq. 5.4.4-11 the
following results are achieved for the star resistances:

1
𝑅1 = Eq. 5.4.4-12
𝑈1

1 Eq. 5.4.4-13
𝑅2 =
𝑈2

(1 − 𝛷) Eq. 5.4.4-14
𝑅𝑥 =
𝛷 ∙ (𝑈1 + 𝑈2 )

Due to the transformation of the triangular network into the equivalent star network the
information on the pipes can be expressed by one single resistance, that is the 𝑅𝑥 resistance.
This means that the resistance of each construction element now depends solely on its 𝑈 value.
Despite the multi-dimensional nature of the problem, equations Eq. 5.4.4-12 and Eq. 5.4.4-13
prove that thermal transmittance through both halves of the construction element can be
calculated by means of the one-dimensional equation for thermal conductance. When 𝛷 is
replaced in Eq. 5.4.4-14 by equation Eq. 5.4.4-2 and Eq. 5.4.4-3, the following equation is
achieved after several transformations:

𝑑𝑥 𝑔1 (𝑠) + 𝑔2 (𝑠) Eq. 5.4.4-15

𝑑𝑥 ∙ [𝐼𝑛 ( ) + ∑∞𝑠=1 ]
𝜋∙𝛿 𝑠
𝑅𝑥 =
2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝜆𝑏

The summation term in Eq. 5.4.4-15 served the purpose of adaptation to the boundary
conditions when used in the differential equation in [10]. If

5–199
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

𝑑𝑖 𝛿
> 0.3 and < 0.2
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑥

the summation term is negligible for practical applications. Therefore, Eq. 5.4.4-15 can be
simplified to the following:

𝑑𝑥 Eq. 5.4.4-16
𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝐼𝑛 ( )
𝑅𝑥 ≈ 𝜋∙𝛿
2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝜆𝑏

Thus, the resistance 𝑅𝑥 depends only on two geometric variables, i.e., the distance between
pipes 𝑑𝑥 and the pipe diameter 𝛿, and on the thermal conductivity of the material layer 𝜆𝑏 in the
pipe plane. The transformation from triangular to star-shaped network results in the additional
temperature 𝜗𝑘 for the center point of the star-network. This temperature equals the mean
temperature in the pipe plane when 𝑦 = 0 (see Figure 5.4.4-1) as is described in detail in [11].
This temperature is called core temperature.

5–200
Based on the above mentioned calculations of the thermal resistance several different Thermo-
Active Building elements might be described:

Resistance in x-direction Criteria

Radiant heating or cooling 𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝐼𝑛 ( 𝑑𝑥 ) 𝑑𝑥 ≥ 5.8 ∗ 𝛿
𝑅𝑥 ≈ 𝜋∙𝛿 𝑑𝑖
system (ceiling or wall) > 0.3
2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝜆𝑏 𝑑𝑥
𝛿
< 0.2
𝑑𝑥
Capillary tube system 𝑑𝑥 < 5.8 ∗ 𝛿
𝑑𝑥 ∙ 1 ( 𝑑𝑥 ) 𝑑𝑖
𝑅𝑥 ≈ 3 𝜋∙𝛿 𝑑𝑥
> 0.3
2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝜆𝑏 𝛿
< 0.2
𝑑𝑥

Floor heating systems 𝑑𝑥 𝑔1 (𝑠) 𝑑𝑥 ≥ 5.8 ∗ 𝛿

𝑑𝑥 ∙ (𝐼𝑛 ( ) + ∑100
𝑠=1 )
𝜋∙𝛿 𝑠 𝜆𝐼𝑛𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑊
𝑅𝑥 =
2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝜆𝑏 𝛼2 = < 1.212 2
𝑑𝐼𝑛𝑠𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑚 𝐾
𝛼2 𝛿
∙ 𝑑𝑥 − 2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝑠 −4∙𝜋∙𝑠 ≤ 𝑑2
𝜆 ∙𝑑 2
𝑔1 (𝑠) = − 𝛼𝑏 ∙ 𝑒 𝑑𝑥 2 𝑑1
2
∙𝑑 +2∙𝜋∙𝑠 ≤ 0.3
𝜆𝑏 𝑥 𝑑𝑥

5.4.4.2. Thermal transmittance through the pipe shell

Heat transfer from the fluid within the pipe with the temperature 𝜗𝑤 through the pipe shell to the
concrete with the temperature 𝜗3 is called thermal transmittance. Thermal transmittance can be
separated into two different processes, the process of convection and the process of thermal
conductance. In the first step energy is being exchanged between the fluid and the pipe shell
by forced convection. Then energy is transferred through the pipe shell by thermal conductance.
Both forms of heat transfer can be described as a thermal resistance in proportion to the surface
area of the construction element by 𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝑙 . Thermal resistance by convection for cylindrical areas
is expressed in the following formula:

𝑑𝑥 Eq. 5.4.4-17
𝑅𝑤 =
ℎ𝑤 ∙ (𝛿 − 2 ∙ 𝑑𝑟 ) ∙ 𝜋

The convective heat transfer coefficient ℎ𝑤 from the water to the pipe shell for turbulent flow
(Re≥2300) can be calculated as follows

𝑤 0.87 Eq. 5.4.4-18

ℎ𝑤 = 2040 ∙ (1 + 0.015 ∙ 𝜗𝑤 ) ∙
(𝛿 − 2 ∙ 𝑑𝑟 )0.13

with a sufficient level of precision, according to [11]. When Eq. 5.4.4-18 is inserted into Eq.
5.4.4-17 with 𝜗𝑤 = 20 °𝐶 the result after several transformations is the following:

0.87
𝑑𝑥0.13 𝛿 − 2 ∙ 𝑑𝑟 Eq. 5.4.4-19
𝑅𝑤 = ∙( )
8.0 ∙ 𝜋 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑙

This is the thermal resistance for heat transfer from the fluid to the pipe shell. The resistance for
heat transfer through the pipe shell by thermal conduction can be determined in a similar way.
The formula for the reference surface area 𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝑙 is

𝛿 Eq. 5.4.4-20
𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝐼𝑛 ( )
𝛿 − 2 ∙ 𝑑𝑟
𝑅𝑟 =
2 ∙ 𝜆𝑟 ∙ 𝜋
5–201
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.4.3. Mean water temperature in a pipe coil

So far, the above considerations referred only to a two-dimensional cross-section in the 𝑥 – 𝑦
direction of the construction element. They were all based on the temperature 𝜗𝑤 of the fluid.
However, this temperature is not constant, but changes along the pipe coil. With the longitudinal
and the transverse heat transfer in the construction element being neglected and based on the
equations Eq. 5.4.4-1 and Eq. 5.4.4-5 the change in the temperature 𝜗𝑤 can be calculated as
follows:

𝛷
−𝑚̇ ∙ 𝑐 ∙ 𝑑𝜗𝑤 (𝑧) = ∙ [𝑈1 (𝜗𝑤 (𝑧) − 𝜗1 ) + 𝑈2 (𝜗𝑤 (𝑧) − 𝜗2 )] ∙ 𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝑑𝑧
1 + 𝛷 ∙ (𝑈1 + 𝑈2 ) ∙ (𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 )

Eq. 5.4.4-21

On the left side of equation Eq. 5.4.4-21 the change in temperature of the fluids 𝑑𝜗𝑤 (𝑧) is
represented in each downstream-oriented step along the length 𝑑𝑧 (see Figure 5.4.4-5: Change
in temperature in the pipe in z direction).

Figure 5.4.4-5: Change in temperature in the pipe in z direction

The integration of Eq. 5.4.4-21 results in a 'heat exchanger model' of the relation between the
mean water temperature 𝜗𝑤 ̅ in a pipe coil and the room temperatures 𝜗1 and 𝜗2 . The formula
for determining the mean water temperature is as follows:

𝑈1 ∙ 𝜗1 + 𝑈2 ∙ 𝜗2 Eq. 5.4.4-22
̅ =
𝜗𝑤 + 𝛥𝜗𝑙𝑔
𝑈1 + 𝑈2

Several transformations, which are described to greater detail in [11], lead to the following
formula for the heat flow between the water inlet temperature and the mean water temperature.
̅ )
𝑞̇ = 𝑓(𝑅𝑤 , 𝑅𝑟 , 𝑅𝑥 , 𝑈𝑖 , 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 , 𝑐 ) ∙ (𝜗𝑖𝑛 − 𝜗𝑤 Eq. 5.4.4-23

The reciprocal value of the function ∫(𝑅𝑤 … ) can be interpreted as the thermal resistance in
𝑧 direction and be expressed by the following formula:

1 1
𝑅𝑧 = −1 − (𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 + )
1 𝑈1 + 𝑈2
𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐 ∙ {1 − exp [− (𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐 ∙ (𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 + )) ]}
𝑈1 + 𝑈2

Eq. 5.4.4-24

5.4.4.4. Total resistance

When placed in series, as shown in Figure 5.4.4-6, all of the single resistances can be summed
up to form a total resistance:

5–202
 𝑅𝑡 = 𝑅𝑧 + 𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 Eq. 5.4.4-25

Figure 5.4.4-6: Total resistance between water inlet temperature and core temperature

The insertion of Eq. 5.4.4-24 into Eq. 5.4.4-25 results in the following formula for the total
resistance:

1 1 Eq. 5.4.4-26
𝑅𝑡 = −1 −
1 𝑈1 + 𝑈2
𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐 ∙ {1 − 𝑒𝑥𝑝 [− (𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐 ∙ (𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 + )) ]}
𝑈1 + 𝑈2

Figure 5.4.4-7 shows how the coefficient of thermal transmittance 𝑈1 + 𝑈2 and the specific mass
flow rate 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 affect the total resistance 𝑅𝑡 as described in Eq. 5.4.4-26. The selected pipe
dimension and the distance between pipes are both shown in the legend. The first number
indicates the inside diameter, the second indicates the outside diameter.

Figure 5.4.4-7: Thermal transmittance and mass flow affecting Rt

The higher the selected specific mass flow rate, the less relevant its dependency on 𝑈1 + 𝑈2 .
For 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 = 5 kg/hm2 the total resistance 𝑅𝑡 varies by 15 %, for 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 = 10 kg/hm2 by 6 % and for
𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 = 15 kg/hm2 by 3 % in the region shown. For higher specific mass flow rates the sum of the
coefficients of thermal transmittance 𝑈1 + 𝑈2 can be decreased without significant change in the
total resistance 𝑅𝑡 . When 𝑈1 + 𝑈2 ⟶ 0 is inserted into Eq. 5.4.4-26 the total resistance is
simplified to

1 Eq. 5.4.4-27
𝑅𝑡 = + 𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥
2 ∙ 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐

When the coefficients of thermal transmittance 𝑈1 + 𝑈2 , which apply to stationary calculations

only, are eliminated from Eq. 5.4.4-26 the newly developed theory can also be used for dynamic
(time-dependent) problems. In Eq. 5.4.4-27, the first term on the right side stands for the
resistance in 𝑧 direction:

1 Eq. 5.4.4-28
𝑅𝑧 =
2 ∙ 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐

5–203
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

This is equivalent to a linearization of the change in water temperature between the inlet and
outlet as shown in Figure 5.4.4-5. However, this change of temperature shows a highly
exponential character for very low mass flow rates. Linearization of an exponential curve like
this results in a significant loss in precision. In certain orders of magnitude it can even result in
conditions which are impossible with regard to physics.
According to [11] the criterion

1 Eq. 5.4.4-29
𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐 ∙ (𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 ) ≥
2

can be specified as the boundary condition. If this boundary condition cannot be met by the
selected configuration, the pipe coil has to be split up into several sections. In a similar way as
described above, the total resistance can be derived for each of the 𝑛 sections from

1 Eq. 5.4.4-30
𝑅𝑡,𝑖 = + 𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥
2 ∙ 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑛 ∙ 𝑐

The boundary condition of each section is expressed by

1 Eq. 5.4.4-31
𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑐 ∙ 𝑛 ∙ (𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 ) ≥
2

For a regular pipe design of thermo-active construction element systems the criterion in Eq.
5.4.4-29 can be met for 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ≥ 13 kg/hm2. In this region even the simplification 𝑈1 + 𝑈2 ⟶ 0 as
specified in Figure 5.4.4-7: Thermal transmittance and mass flow affecting Rt𝑅𝑡 leads to good
results. When mass flow rates of less than 13 kg/hm2 are used for certain designs, a minimum
of two sections should be expected. Splitting the pipe coil up into 𝑛 sections increases the
specific mass flow rate of each section by the 𝑛 -th multiple. This has a positive effect on the
simplification 𝑈1 + 𝑈2 ⟶ 0 in Eq. 5.4.4-26, because the approximation is closer to the exact
result for higher specific mass flow rates.
Inserting the equations for each single resistance, i. e.Eq. 5.4.4-16, Eq. 5.4.4-19 and Eq.
5.4.4-20, into Eq. 5.4.4-30 for a turbulent current in the pipe and on the condition of Eq. 5.4.4-31
results in the following formula for the total resistance:

Eq. 5.4.4-32
𝛿 − 2 ∙ 𝑑𝑟 0.87 𝛿
1
𝑑𝑥0.13 ∙ (
𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑙
) 𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝐼𝑛 ( ) 𝑑𝑥 ∙ 𝐼𝑛 ( 𝑑𝑥 )
𝛿 − 2 ∙ 𝑑𝑟 𝜋∙𝛿
𝑅𝑡,𝑖 = + + +
2 ∙ 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 ∙ 𝑛 ∙ 𝑐 8.0 ∙ 𝜋 2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝜆𝑟 2 ∙ 𝜋 ∙ 𝜆𝑏

where

𝑑𝑖 𝛿
> 0.3 and < 0.2
𝑑𝑥 𝑑𝑥

The variable 𝑅𝑡,𝑖 in Eq. 5.4.4-32 contains all the relevant parameters required for the calculation
of thermo-active construction element systems.

5.4.4.5. Comparing the calculation methods

The previous considerations show, that the newly developed method can also be applied to
dynamic (time-dependent) calculations. The resistance 𝑅𝑡,𝑖 which was newly introduced for this
theory contains no variables which are only valid for stationary calculations. Consequently, the
results achieved by this model must be equivalent to those achieved by an exact method.
Therefore, the theory is checked against the FEM method. In the comparison with the FEM
method the room temperature is considered to be a known. The boundary conditions for the
calculation are specified in Figure 5.4.4-8.

5–204
 Figure 5.4.4-8: Simulated FEM section of a construction element with boundary conditions

In the beginning of the calculation the construction element has an even starting temperature of
20 °C. For Case 1 the inlet temperature is increased rapidly from 20 to 30 °C (see Figure
5.4.4-9). However, the room temperature is maintained at 20 °C.

Figure 5.4.4-9: Temperatures for Case 1 and 2

Figure 5.4.4-10 shows the change in the core temperature and in the temperature on the
surface. The close correspondence between the results of the model and the results of the exact
FEM calculation become apparent in this figure.

26

25
Core temperature  k
24
Temperature [°C]

23

22 Surface temperature

21
Model
20
FEM
19
0 5 10 15 20
Time [h]

Figure 5.4.4-10: Comparison of the simplified model with the FEM calculation (Case 1)

5–205
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

For Case 2 the room temperature is also maintained at 20 °C, just as for Case 1. The water inlet
temperature is increased from 20 to 30°C and maintained on that level for five hours (see Figure
5.4.4-9). After five hours the water temperature is decreased again to 20°C.

26
Model
25
FEM
24
Temperature [°C]

23 Core temperature  k

22

21

20 Surface temperature

19
0 5 10 15 20
Time [h]

Figure 5.4.4-11: Comparison of the simplified model with the FEM calculation (Case 2)

Figure 5.4.4-11 shows that good correspondence between the simplified model and the FEM
calculation is also achieved for Case 2.

5.4.4.6. Variables and Indices

Variables
c [ J / kgK ] Specific heat
d [m] Thickness
2
h [W / m K ] heat transfer coefficient
l [m] Pipe length
m [ kg / s ] Mass flow rate
n [-] Multiplier for pipe sections
R [ m 2 K /W ] Thermal resistance
Re [-] Reynold's number
2
U [W / m K ] Coefficient of thermal transmittance
w [ m/ s ] Velocity
 [m] Outside diameter
 [-] Number 
 [ W / mK ] Thermal conductivity
 [ C ] Temperature
 [ C ] Mean temperature

Indices
1 Room side 1
2 Room side 2

5–206
3 Outside pipe surface
b Construction element
k Core
i Room side
in Inlet
r Pipe shell
sp Specific
t Total
w Water, fluid
x x direction
y y direction
z z direction

5–207
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.5. Integrated Model for Chilled Ceiling Panels

Figure 5.4.5-1 shows a schematic drawing of a chilled ceiling panel.

Figure 5.4.5-1: Chilled ceiling panel

̅
𝜗𝑤 [ C ] Mean fluid temperature
̅
𝜗𝑜,𝑘𝑑 [ C ] Mean surface temperature of chilled ceiling
𝜗𝑟,2 [ C ] operative room temperature
𝜗𝑖𝑛 [ C ] fluid inlet temperature
The chilled ceiling model of Type56 needs results from a ceiling test according to DIN 4715-1
as Input. From this results and the known boundary conditions for the test the model calculates
the resistance network at test conditions. Figure 5.4.5-2 shows the resistance model for chilled
ceiling test conditions.

Figure 5.4.5-2: Resistance model for chilled ceiling test conditions after 4715-1.

2
𝑅𝑤 [ m K /W ] Thermal resistance fluid to pipe
2
𝑅𝑟 [ m K /W ] Thermal resistance pipe
2
𝑅𝑥 [ m K /W ] Thermal resistance in x-direction
2
𝑅𝑐𝑝 [ m K /W ] Thermal resistance of chilled ceiling panel at test conditions
2
𝑅1 [ m K /W ] Thermal resistance upper wall at test conditions well insulated
2
𝑅2 [ m K /W ] Thermal resistance combined heat transfer to the room
𝜗𝑤 ̅ [ C ] Mean fluid temperature
𝜗𝑘̅ [ C ] Mean temperature of chilled ceiling
𝜗𝑟,2 [ C ] Operative room temperature
𝜗𝑟,1 [ C ] Operative outside temperature
2
𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 [ kJ / h m K] Heat transfer coefficient

Besides the test results the heat transfer coefficient 𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 = 1/(𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 ) is needed. 𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥
can be calculated internally from the specific norm power using the following approximation for
common used chilled ceiling panels:

0.0469 𝑃𝑠𝑝𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 𝑘𝐽 Eq. 5.4.5-1

𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 = 0.6 exp ( ) 3.6 [ 2 ]
3.6 ℎ𝑚 𝐾

where 𝑃𝑠𝑝𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 in [kJ/h m²]is the specific norm power after DIN 4715-1.
5–208
 Table 5.4.5-1: 𝑼𝒘𝒓𝒙 and 𝒅𝑻𝒔𝒖𝒓𝒇𝒏 𝒐𝒓𝒎 for different chilled ceiling panels

Producer Product 𝑸𝒏 𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 𝑑𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑛 𝑜𝑟𝑚

[W/m2] [W/m2] [K]

Approximation

Approximation
Measurement

Measurement

Measurement
Zent - Variocool Spectra M-plate 96 54.0476 54.1400 1.8 1.8
Frenger
Variocool Spectra L-plate 92 44.1986 44.8792 2.1 2.0

Krantz KKS-1 pipe spacing 90mm 91 42.1673 42.8230 2.2 2.1

Lindner LMD Plafotherm B/E/K metal

92.5 45.2706 45.9441 2.0 2.0
ceiling

LMD Plafotherm FMA metal

90 40.2735 40.8609 2.2 2.2
ceiling

Barcol-Air CBA-FE-CU12/16 88.7 37.9951 38.4441 2.3 2.3

value 2K

value 2K
Approx.
Internet

approx
Guess

Guess
data

Zent-Frenger Varicool Linea 3 98 49 59.5 2 1.6

EMCO QL-tec RA 50 110 55 104.4 2 1.1

Gebr. Trox WK-D-WF 153 76.5 784.4 2 1.2

Siegle + CuRo
153 76.5 784.4 2 0.2
Epple

Also the temperature difference 𝑑𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 between mean fluid temperature 𝜗𝑤 ̅ and mean
surface temperature 𝜗𝑘̅ if known for test conditions can be used to calculate the heat transfer
coefficient 𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 with the following equation:

𝑃𝑠𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑚 Eq. 5.4.5-2

𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 =
𝑑𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚

Table 5.4.5-1 shows for some chilled ceiling samples 𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 and 𝑑𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 for measurement and
the approximation used by Type 56. For non-ventilated chilled ceiling with a cooling power 𝑄𝑛
< 95 W/m² (of) a good agreement between measured values and the approximation used by
Type 56 is achieved. For higher rate of performance the approx. values of the resistance
(1/𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥 ) are unrealistically low. In general, the higher performance is due to ventilation. This
fact cannot be handled by the approximation model.

5–209
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

𝑅𝑟 and 𝑅𝑥 are characteristically for each chilled ceiling panel and independent from the
conditions in the room or the massflow rate through the panel. The sum of both resistances is
calculated with the following equation:

1 Eq. 5.4.5-3
𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 = − 𝑅𝑤
𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥

According to [12], the thermal resistance 𝑅𝑤 for heat transfer from a fluid (𝜗𝑤 = 20°C and a
density of fluid 1000 kg/m³) to the pipe shell for turbulent flow (𝑅𝑒 ≥ 2300) can be calculated
as follows:

𝑑𝑥0.13 𝛿 − 2𝑑𝑟 Eq. 5.4.5-4

𝑅𝑤 = ( )
8.0𝜋 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 𝑙

For laminar flow the following equation is used

𝑑𝑥 4 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 𝑐 𝑑𝑥 −1/3 Eq. 5.4.5-5

𝑅𝑤 = (49.03 + 4.17 )
𝜋𝜆𝑤 𝛱𝜆𝑤

The thermal resistance of the chilled ceiling panel can be calculated from the specific norm
power by the following equation:

𝜗𝑟,2 − 𝜗𝑤̅ 10𝐾 Eq. 5.4.5-6

𝑅𝑐𝑝 = =
𝑞̇ 𝑐𝑝 𝑞̇ 𝑛,𝑐𝑝

The thermal resistance 𝑅2,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 for the combined heat transfer from the chilled ceiling panel to
the room at test conditions can be calculated with

1 Eq. 5.4.5-7
𝑅2,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 = 𝑅𝑐𝑝 −
𝑈𝑤𝑟𝑥

The convective heat transfer coefficient from the panel to the room at test conditions can be
calculated with:

1 3 Eq. 5.4.5-8
𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,2,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 = − 4𝜎𝑇𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚
𝑅2,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚

where 𝑇𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚 is given in K.

Using the parameters for the internal calculation heat transfer coefficients which are defined at
properties for a chilled ceiling the convective heat transfer coefficient 𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣 𝑓𝑙𝑎𝑡 𝑐𝑒𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 for a
flat chilled ceiling panel at norm conditions can be calculated with:
𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑙𝑒𝑑
𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑓𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑐𝑒𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 ,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 = 𝐾𝑐𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑙𝑒𝑑 (10𝐾 − 𝑑𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑓,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 ) Eq. 5.4.5-9

The convective heat transfer of a flat panel is adjusted to the test results by the factor 𝐾𝑘𝑜𝑟𝑟𝐻 𝑇𝐶 to
fit the measured norm power, 𝑃𝑠𝑝,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 . A factor greater than 1 is possible due to fins of a so
called convective chilled ceiling.

𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,2,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 Eq. 5.4.5-10

𝐾𝑘𝑜𝑟𝑟𝐻𝑇𝐶 =
𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑓𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑐𝑒𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 ,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚

The convective heat transfer coefficient from the panel to the room during the simulation is
calculated with:
𝑒𝑐𝑒
𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑐𝑒𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑙𝑒𝑑 = 𝐾𝑘𝑜𝑟𝑟𝐻𝑇𝐶 𝐾𝑐𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑙𝑒𝑑 (𝜗̅ − 𝑇𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑐𝑒𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 ) 𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑙𝑒𝑑 Eq. 5.4.5-11

5–210
 𝑒𝑐𝑒
𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,𝑐𝑒𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 = 𝐾𝑘𝑜𝑟𝑟𝐻𝑇𝐶 𝐾𝑐𝑒ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 (𝜗̅ − 𝑇𝑎𝑖𝑟,𝑐𝑒𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 ) ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 Eq. 5.4.5-12

This model assumes that the front and the backside of the chilled ceiling panel do have the
same surface temperature 𝜗𝑘̅ . However in an expert mode additional heat transfer coefficients
for upper and lower construction might be added which will modify the surface temperatures for
front and back side but also the resulting cooling power of the chilled ceiling panel. The total
resistance to the room during the simulation is calculated by the following equation:

1 1 Eq. 5.4.5-13
𝑅2,𝑛𝑜𝑟𝑚 = 3
+
𝛼𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣,2 + 4𝜎𝑇𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚 𝑈𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡

The resistance 𝑅1 between the chilled ceiling and ceiling for direct contact is calculated with the
following equation:

1 1 Eq. 5.4.5-14
𝑅1 = +
9000 𝑈𝑢𝑝𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡

In Figure 5.4.5-3 the heat transfer model in the gap for a chilled ceiling with out direct contact is
shown.

Figure 5.4.5-3: Assumed heat transfer in the gap between chilled ceiling and ceiling..

The resistance 𝑅1 between chilled ceiling and ceiling for a gap can then calculated with the
following equation:

1 Eq. 5.4.5-15
𝑅1 = 𝑅𝑔𝑎𝑝 +
𝑈𝑢𝑝𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡

With the resistance, 𝑅𝑔𝑎𝑝 which is calculated depending the heat flux direction:

1 Eq. 5.4.5-16
𝑅𝑔𝑎𝑝 = 𝑚𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛
3
(4𝜎𝑇𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚 + 0.5 𝑘𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛 (0.5𝑑𝑇𝑔𝑎𝑝 ) )

1 Eq. 5.4.5-17
𝑅𝑔𝑎𝑝 = 𝑚𝑢𝑝
3
(4𝜎𝑇𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑚 + 0.5𝑘𝑢𝑝 (0.5𝑑𝑇𝑔𝑎𝑝 ) )

where 𝑑𝑇𝑔𝑎𝑝 is the temperature difference between the chilled ceiling and ceiling. The
coefficients to calculate the convective heat transfer 𝑘𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛 , 𝑘𝑢𝑝 , 𝑚𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛 and 𝑚𝑢𝑝 can be
changed from the default values to user-defined values in an expert mode.
According to the transformations shown in Section 5.4.4.4, the total resistance of an active layer
can be calculated with the following equation:

5–211
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

1 1 Eq. 5.4.5-18
𝑅𝑡 = −
−1 1 1
+
𝑅1 𝑅2
1
𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 𝑐 1 − exp − 𝑚̇𝑠𝑝 𝑐 (𝑅𝑤 + 𝑅𝑟 + 𝑅𝑥 + 1 1)
+
𝑅1 𝑅2
( ( ( ) ))

Figure 5.4.5-4: Resistance model chilled ceiling with additional construction and a gap

5–212
5.4.6. Comfort model
Operative Temperature
The operative (effective) room temperature (𝑇𝑜𝑝 ) is defined as the uniform temperature of an
enclosure, in which a person would exchange the same amount of heat with radiation and
convection as in the actual case under study.

The exact equation for the operative temperature is given by:

ℎ𝑐 𝑇𝑎 + ℎ𝑟 𝑇𝑀𝑅 Eq. 5.4.6-1
𝑇𝑜𝑝 =
ℎ𝑐 + ℎ𝑟

with:

𝑇𝑎 the air temperature,

𝑇𝑟 the mean radiant temperature,
ℎ𝑐 the heat exchange coefficient by convection,
ℎ𝑟 the heat exchange coefficient by radiation.

The expression can also be written by:

𝑇𝑜𝑝 = 𝑎𝑇𝑎 + (1 − 𝑎)𝑇𝑀𝑅 Eq. 5.4.6-2

with:

ℎ𝑐
𝑎 =
ℎ𝑐 + ℎ𝑟

When the relative velocity of air is below 0.2 m/s and the difference between mean radiant
temperature and air temperature is below < 4 °C the operative temperature can be approximated
by the mean of air- and the mean of radiation temperature (acc. to. EN ISO 7726:2001)

Mean radiant temperature.

The mean radiant temperature in relation to a person in a given body posture and clothing placed
at a given point in a room, is defined as that uniform temperature of black surroundings which will
give the same radiant heat loss from the person as the actual case under study. (Definition by
Fanger)
The mean radiant temperature can be calculated from the surface temperature of the enclosure
and the view factor of a person in relation to the surrounding surfaces, which depends on the
shape, size and arrangement of the area to the person.

Userdefined Input
Since most materials have a high emissivity, reflection is often neglected.This means all the
surrounding surfaces are assumed to be black which leads to:

4
𝑇𝑀𝑅 = 𝑇14 𝐹𝑝−1 + 𝑇24 𝐹𝑝−2 + ⋯ + 𝑇𝑛4 𝐹𝑝−𝑛 Eq. 5.4.6-3

With:

𝑇𝑀𝑅 the mean radiant temperature in [K],

𝑇𝑛 the surface temperature of the area n in [K],
𝐹𝑝.𝑛 the angular factor between a person and the area n.

5–213
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

For small differences in surface temperature, the previous equation simplifies to:

𝑇𝑀𝑅 = 𝑇1 𝐹𝑝−1 + 𝑇2 𝐹𝑝−2 + ⋯ + 𝑇𝑛 𝐹𝑝−𝑛 Eq. 5.4.6-4

Internal calculation - simple model

To calculate the mean radiant temperature all the view factors between the person and the
different surfaces must be known. If they are not known due to a lack of three dimenational data,
the mean radiant temperature is assumed to be the area weighted mean surface temperature
of all the surface of a zone:

𝑇1 𝐴1 + 𝑇2 𝐴2 + ⋯ + 𝑇𝑛 𝐴𝑛 Eq. 5.4.6-5
𝑇𝑀𝑅 =
𝐴1 + 𝐴2 + ⋯ + 𝐴𝑛

This rough approximation is widely used in practical engineering and is part of the standard
comfort model in Trnsys 17.

Internal calculation - detailed model

In the detailed model a so-called bulb thermometer is simulated. A bulb thermometer can be
used to determine the operative temperature in a room by measurement. This temperature is
based on the time averaged values of the bulb temperature and the temperature and the velocity
of the sourrounding air.
The bulb thermometer is composed of a gray sphere with a concentric thermometer inside.
According to DIN EN ISO 7726 and 3787 a bulb thermometer 0.07 m in diameter is simulated.
Furthermore, the bulb thermometer is called a comfort sensor.
The heat transfer coefficient from air to the comfort sensor for free convection is given by
𝑇𝑎 − 𝑇𝑠 1/4 𝑊 Eq. 5.4.6-6
ℎ𝑐 = 1.4 ( ) [ 2 ]
𝐷 𝑚 𝐾
The heat transfer coefficient from air to the comfort sensor for forced convection for an air
velocity 𝑣𝑎 is given by
𝑣𝑎0.6 𝑊 Eq. 5.4.6-7
ℎ𝑐 = 6.3 ( 0.4
)[ 2 ]
𝐷 𝑚 𝐾
For the calculation the large one of both is taken.

The infrared emission coefficient of the sphere is fixed to a value of 0,82 which corresponds the
standard value of the human body. Direct or diffuse solar radiation on the sensor isn’ taken into
account .

The comfort sensor is placed at a given position in the room. After some time a thermal
equilibrium between the radiation and convection is reached. The surface temperature and the
temperature inside are assumed to be the same. Therefore, the sensor temperature driven by
radiation and convection can be determined.

From the following equations the surface temperature of the comfort sensor Ts can be
calculated.

𝑄̇𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣 + 𝑄̇𝑠𝑖𝑟 = 0 Eq. 5.4.6-8

5–214
 𝑛
Eq. 5.4.6-9
𝑄̇𝑠𝑖𝑟 = −𝐴𝑠 𝜀𝑠𝑖𝑟 𝜎𝑇𝑠4 + ∑ 𝐴𝑖 𝜀𝑖𝑖𝑟 𝜎𝑇𝑖4 𝐺𝑖,𝑠
𝑖𝑟

𝑖=1

𝑄̇𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑣 = ℎ𝑐𝑔 𝐴𝑠 (𝑇𝑎 − 𝑇𝑠 ) Eq. 5.4.6-10

with:

𝑇𝑎 the air temperature,

𝑇𝑠 surface temperature of the comfort sensor,
𝑠  {1, 2, …,n},
𝑛−1 number of surrounding surfaces.

Now, all the temperatures are known and the the following equation can be used to determine
the mean radiant temperature:

1
𝑛 4
Eq. 5.4.6-11
𝑇𝑀𝑅 = [∑ 𝑇𝑖 4 𝐺𝑠,𝑖
𝐿𝑊
]
𝑖=1

The equation is derived from Fanger’s definition of the mean radiant temperature based on
longwave radiation. Again, Gebhart factors are used for the description of the detailed longwave
radiation heat exchange between all the surfaces.

5–215
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.4.7. Supply air conditioning model

For TRNSYS 18 a simple model is provided in TYPE 56 to model preconditioning of supply air
to the airnode. The calculated energy for heating, cooling, dehumidification and humidification
refers to a conditioning from outdoor air and to supply air condition. The feature allows
calculating conditioning including optional sensible heat recovery.
The temperature of the supply air 𝑇𝐻𝑅 after the heat exchanger is calculated with the sensible
efficiency 𝜂𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑠 , and the return 𝑇𝑅𝐴 and outdoor air temperature 𝑇𝑂𝐴 , by the following equation.

𝑇𝐻𝑅 = 𝜂𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑠 (𝑇𝑅𝐴 − 𝑇𝑂𝐴 ) + 𝑇𝑂𝐴 Eq. 5.4.7-1

Depending on the technology, air handling units have frost protection systems to avoid icing of
the heat exchanger. The implemented model assumes that the exhaust air won’t be cooled
down below 𝑇𝐸𝐴,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 4°𝐶his leads to the calculation of the supply air after the heat exchanger
shonw in the following:

𝑇𝐻𝑅 = min(𝜂𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑠 (𝑇𝑅𝐴 − 𝑇𝑂𝐴 ), 𝑇𝑅𝐴 − 𝑇𝐸𝐴,𝑚𝑖𝑛 ) + 𝑇𝑂𝐴 Eq. 5.4.7-2

The sensible energy to heat up 𝑄̇ℎ𝑡,𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑠 or cool down 𝑄̇𝑐𝑙,𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑠 the air to set point temperature 𝑇𝑆𝑒𝑡
is with the given massflow 𝑚̇ calculated according to the formulas below:

𝑄̇ℎ𝑡,𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑠 = 𝑚̇ ∙ 𝑐𝑝(𝑇𝑆𝑒𝑡 − 𝑇𝐻𝑅 ) Eq. 5.4.7-3

𝑄̇𝑐𝑙,𝑠𝑒𝑛𝑠 = 𝑚̇ ∙ 𝑐𝑝(𝑇𝐻𝑅 − 𝑇𝑆𝑒𝑡 ) Eq. 5.4.7-4

The max. and min. humidity (𝑤min and 𝑤max ) have to be set by the user. If the outdoor
humidity is within the range, no humidification or dehumidification energy is calculated.
Otherwise its calculated with the evaporation enthalpy Δℎ𝑉 according to the formula shown
below. The dehumidification process is divided into three processes, a sensible part where the
air is cooled down to dewpoint temperature and the latent part where water condenses, the
energy for both processes are summarized in 𝑄̇𝑐𝑙,𝑑𝑒ℎ𝑢𝑚 . The third process is reheat the air
𝑄̇ℎ𝑡,𝑟𝑒ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡 .

𝑄̇ℎ𝑡,ℎ𝑢𝑚 = 𝑚̇ ∙ Δℎ𝑉 ∙ (𝑤𝑚𝑖𝑛 − 𝑤𝑂𝐴 ) Eq. 5.4.7-5

𝑄̇𝑐𝑙,𝑑𝑒ℎ𝑢𝑚 = 𝑚̇ ∙ 𝑐𝑝(𝑇𝐻𝑅 − 𝑇𝑂𝐴,𝑑𝑒𝑤 ) + Δℎ𝑉 ∙ (𝑤𝑂𝐴 − 𝑤𝑚𝑎𝑥 ) Eq. 5.4.7-6

𝑄̇ℎ𝑡,𝑟𝑒ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡 = 𝑚̇ ∙ 𝑐𝑝(𝑇𝐻𝑅 − 𝑇𝑂𝐴,𝑑𝑒𝑤 ) Eq. 5.4.7-7

5–216
5.4.8. References
1. Stephenson, D.G. and Mitalas, G.P., "Calculation of Heat Conduction Transfer
Functions for Multi-Layer Slabs," ASHRAE Annual Meeting, Washington, D.C., August
22-25, 1971.
2. Mitalas, G.P. and Arseneault, J.G., "FORTRAN IV Program to Calculate z-Transfer
Functions for the Calculation of Transient Heat Transfer Through Walls and Roofs",
Division of National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa.
3. Seem, J.E., "Modeling of Heat in Buildings," Ph. D. thesis, Solar Energy Laboratory,
University of Wisconsin Madison (1987).
4. Holst, ,S., "Heating load of a building model in Trnsys with different heating systems",
ZAE Bayern, Abt. 4, Trnsys-User Day 1993, Stuttgart
5. Feist, W., "Thermal building simulation, A critical review of different building models" (in
german), C.F. Müller-Verlag, Karlsruhe, 1994, ISBN 3-7880-7486-8
6. Lechner, Th., " Mathematical and physical fundamentals of the Transfer function
method (in german), Institut für Thermodynamik und Wärmetechnik, Universität
Stuttgart, April 1992
7. Voit, P., Th. Lechner, M. Schuler, "Common EC validation precedure for dynamic
building simulation programs - application with Trnsys", TRANSSOLAR GmbH,
Conference of international simulation societies 94, Zürich
8. "WINDOW 4.1, PC Program for Analyzing Window Thermal Performance in
Accordance with Standard NFRC Procedures", Windows and Daylighting Group,
Building Technologies Program, Energy and Environment Division, Lawrence berkeley
Laboratory, CA 94729 USA, March 1994
9. "Design of a thermal model for thermo-active construction element systems (TABS) ",
10. Markus Koschenz, Beat Lehmann , EMPA, Abteilung Energiesysteme/Haustechnik,
CH-8600 Dübendorf (Switzerland); Stefan Holst, TRANSSOLAR, Energietechnik
GmbH, D-70569 Stuttgart (Germany), February 2000
11. Glück B., Strahlungsheizung – Theorie und Praxis, Verlag C. F. Müller, Karlsruhe 1982
12. Koschenz M., Lehmann B., Handbuch thermoaktive Bauteilsysteme TABS (work in
progress), EMPA Abteilung Energiesysteme/Haustechnik, CH-8600 Dübendorf, 2000
13. Stender, Merker, Recknagel Sprenger, Oldenburg Verlag, München, 92/93
14. Press, Flannery, Teukolsky, Vetterling, Numerical Recipes, The Art of Scientific
Computing,.Cambridge University Press, ISBN 0-521-38330-7

5–217
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.5. Mathematical Description of Auxiliary

Tools
5.5.1. TRNSHD
The integrated tool for calculating solar sunlit and distribution factors is based on TRNSHD
(Hiller, 2000). The code has been completely revised and adapted to the needs of Trnsys. In
addition, the 2D polygon clipping procedure which calculates the shading effect of a set of
arbitrary polygons on a receiving polygon has be replaced by the GPC library Version 2.23 from
Alan Murta, University of Manchester,UK is applied (http://www.cs.man.ac.uk/~toby/gpc/). Also,
the beam radiation shading is no longer solved by hourly calculation for a given location but by
discretisation of the half hemisphere. The approach has several advantages:
• pure geometric sunlit factors
• independent from building location
• only one calculation for both beam and diffuse radiation
• less data

Sky division model based on Tregenza

The sky is represented by a hemisphere where the building is placed in its center. The celestial
hemisphere is subdivided into patches. The Tregenza-based sky division scheme divides the
hemisphere vertically into 7 superimposed horizontal rows, each representing a differential
altitude of 12°, with the hemisphere topped at its zenith by a circular segment having a half-
cone angle of 6°. Each horizontal row is then divided into rectangular segments based on the
Tregenza convention for a total of 144 rectangular and 1 circular segments. A scaling factor is
used to increase the number of direct solar positions. (Bourgeois, 2008). Besides a medium
resolution of 577 patches a high resolution of 2305 patches is available.

Hemisphere
Patch
Center
point

Figure 5.5.1-1: Discretization of the celestrial hemisphere

5–218
Solar sunlit factors of external windows
Each center point of a patch is defined as a sun position. The portion of external surfaces sunlit
by beam radiation for each sun position is determined by projection and 2D polygon clipping.
The fraction of each patch sunlit by beam radiation is given by:
𝐴𝑠𝑢𝑛𝑙𝑖𝑡
𝑓𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚,𝑒𝑥 =
𝐴𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙

where Asunlit is the sunlit area and Atotal is the total area of an external window.

For solving the diffuse radiation shading it is assumed that the patches are rather small and far
away. Thus, the diffuse radiation leaving each patch can be treated as parallel radiation with
the direction from its center point to the center of the hemisphere. In the current version the
diffuse radiation is assumed to be isotropic. Therefore, the diffuse fraction of an external window
can be determined by:
∑𝑛𝑘=1 cos 𝛼𝑘 ∙ ∆𝜔 ∙ 𝑓𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚,𝑘
𝑓𝑑𝑓𝑢,𝑒𝑥 =
∑𝑛𝑘=1 cos 𝛼𝑘 ∙ ∆𝜔

∆𝜔 = sin 𝜃𝑍,𝑘 ∙ ∆𝜃𝑍 ∙ ∆𝛾

where n is the number of patches where the external window is sunlit, k is the angle between
the surface normal vector and the sun vector of patch k, Z,k is the zenith angle of patch k,
fbeam,k is the “beam” sunlit fraction of patch k, k is the increment of the solid angle of patch
k,  k is the increment of the solar azimuth angle, Z is the increment of the solar zenith angle
of patch.
All calculated sunlit fractions are written to an external file, the so-called SHading Matrix file
(*.SHM), which is read in by the multizone building model at the start of the simulation.

Figure 5.5.1-2: Example of a SHading Matrix file (*.SHM)

5–219
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

Solar beam distribution factors of external windows

In addition to sunlit fractions of external windows, TRNSHD can calculate the beam sunlit
fractions of the window that strike each inside surface of the zone (not airnode!). The performed
calculation steps are similar those for external shading. All sunlit inside surfaces are projected
onto the plane of the window and clipped against the remaining sunlit parts of the window
obtained from the external shading calculations. In the current version the beam distribution
factor calculation is restricted to external windows only.
The calculated distribution factors are also written to one external file for each zone, the so-
called InSolation Matrix file (*_xxx.ISM), which is read in by the multizone building model at the
start of the simulation.

Figure 5.5.1-3: Example of a zone InSolation Matrix file (*_xxx.ISM)

Model limitations
• Zones have to be closed and convex volumes.
• Surfaces have to be planar polygons described by an ordered list of vertices.
• Surfaces aren’t allowed to have holes.
• Windows must be subsurfaces of walls.
• Building surfaces must have an outward normal vector.
• No reflection is taken into account.

References
Bourgeois D, Reinhart CF, Ward G, “A Standard Daylight Coefficient Model for
DynamicDaylighting Simulations” Building Research & Information 36:1 pp. 68 – 82, 2008

Hiller, M. D.E., Beckman, W.A, Mitchell, J.W. 2000. TRNSHD – a program for shading and
insolation calculations. Building and Environment 35, p.633 - 644.

Murta, A. - GPC library Version 2.23, University of Manchester,UK

http://www.cs.man.ac.uk/~toby/gpc/

5–220
5.5.2. View factor calculation
Polygon to polygon
The view factor FA→B between two surfaces A and B is defined as the part of diffuse radiation,
that leaves surface A and strikes surface B on the direct path. The view factor is a pure
geometrical factor and does not include any optical properties. Trnsys 17 uses a combination
of an algorithm of Schröder et al., 1993 and view factor relationships (symmetry, reciprocity).
The algorithm of Schröder et al., 1993 provides a closed form solution of the form factor integral
between two general (planar, convex or concave, possibly containing holes) polygons in 3D.
Obstructed views cannot be handled by this approach.
With regard to energy conservation it is important to check the accuracy of the resulting view
factors and to apply special smoothing procedures if necessary. The applied method is
developed by Lawson, 1995.

Polygon to infinitesimal sphere

The view factor between a (planar, concave or convex) polygon and an infinitesimal sphere
(point) in three dimensional space is calculated by a closed form solution. The method uses a
public domain C-Code according to Narkhede et al., 1994.
The view factors are calculated by the sum of (projected) triangle areas divided by 4 . If an
element is projected radially onto any intermediate surface (in particular onto the unit sphere),
the form factor for the projection will be the same as for the element itself. By definition, the solid
𝑆
angle is equal to 2, with S the area of the spherical triangle 𝐴𝐵𝐶 of the sphere with radius r .
𝑟
Putting 𝑟 = 1 implies that Ω = 𝑆. Single triangle areas are determined using the solid angle that
subtends the triangular surface according to Oosterom et al. 1983.
Again, a smoothing procedure is necessary. Therefore, the method of Lawson, 1995 is
simplified for 1D.

References
Lawson, D. A. 1995. An improved method for smoothing approximate exchange areas, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, 38, pp. 3109-3110
Narkhede A. and Manocha D., Fast polygon triangulation algorithm based on Seidel's Algorithm,
UNC-CH, 1994.
Oosterom, Strackee 1983: IEEE Trans. Biom. Eng., Vol BME-30, No 2,
Schröder P., Hanrahan P. 1993. On the form factor between two polygons, Proceedings of the
20th annual conference on Computer graphics and interactive techniques, p.163-164

5–221
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.5.3. DaySIM Integration

DaySIM Routines (Reinhardt 2016) are adapted and integrated into TRNSYS to allow
simultanous thermal and daylight simulations. The process follows the typical DaySIM workflow.
First the geometry has to be provided in the radiance format. The generator in TRNbuild creates
the radiance geometry by using available 3D-Geometry information and assigns automatically
optical properties to opaque surfaces according to the solar absorption coeffcient, defined in the
construction type. The radiance material for the glazing has to be defined manually, the material
has to be available in the library material.rad. The user is free to add materials into the library.

In a pre-process daylight coefficients are generated with the created geometry and the gendc
routine, where the methods “classic” and “dds” are implemented. Daylight coefficients are
normalized contributions from discretized sky or ground segments, or preset solar positions, to
solar quantities calculated at various building sensor points (Bourgeois 2008). Once generated,
daylight coefficients are used in the TRNSYS simulation, where they are folded against
luminance efficacy and distribution models to calculate the illuminance of every sensor point at
each time step.

The model of the diffuse sky is similar in both methods. For both methods 145 patches are
generated to describe the diffuse sky. The ground is described in three sections in the “classic”
variant and as one patch in the dds method.

Figure 4: Discretization of diffuse sky (left, Bourgeois 2008) and the ground (right, Reinhardt
2001)

The main difference between the two methods is the modelling of the direct light. Different from
the diffuse lighting model, where the contribution is calculated by folding the Perez sky with the
diffuse daylight coefficent matrix, the impact of direct light is modeled by interpolating the
daylight coefficient depending on sun position. In the „classic“ method the daylight coefficients
are calculated for certain dates and times in a year. Consequently, the data points varies in
number and sun position, the calculated daylight coefficient are only valid for one orientation
and location. The dds Model differs between indirect and direct solar contributions. 2305
Daylight coefficients are calculated for the dds method, which are evenly distributed on the sky
dome. This approach needs more computational ressources in the pre-process, but the
generated dds files are independent from orientation and location.

5–222
Figure 5: Direct sun positions in the classic and dds format (Bourgeois 2008)
The calculation of the illuminance is calculated in every iteration step, if the shading state
changes. The calculation is done by the subroutine dsillum, which is an adapted DAYSIM
routine to match the requirements by TRNSYS. The daylight coefficients are related to the direct
and diffuse light on the horizontal. TRNSYS is calculating these values according to the sun
position and the solar radiation.

References
Bourgeois D., Reinhart C.F., Ward, G., 2008 A standard daylight coefficient model for dynamic
daylight simulations, Building research and information, Vol. 36, Issue 1, p.68-82
Reinhart C. F. 2016, . Daysim (V4.0). http://daysim.ning.com/
Reinhart C. F 2001, Daylight Availability and Manual Lighting Control in Office Buildings –
Simulation Studies and Analysis of Measurements. Ph.D. thesis, Technical University of
Karlsruhe

5–223
 TRNSYS 18 – Multizone Building modeling with Type56 and TRNBuild

5.6. Building Examples for Type 56

In Trnsys 18 the building example / tutorial has been integrated into 09-Tutorials and
Examples..pdf

5–224